PC200LC 8

CEAM007103
Operation & Maintenance

Manual
PC200LC-8
PC220LC-8
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
SERIAL NUMBERS PC200LC-8 A88001 and up
PC220LC-8 A88001 and up
ENGINE 6D107E-1
This material is proprietary to Komatsu America Corp. and is not to be reproduced, used, or disclosed except in
accordance with written authorization from Komatsu America Corp.
It is our policy to improve our products whenever it is possible and practical to do so. We reserve the right to make
changes or improvements at any time without incurring any obligation to install such changes on products sold
previously.
Due to this continuous program of research and development, revisions may be made to this publication. It is
recommended that customers contact their distributor for information on the latest revision.
Copyright 2016 Komatsu

Printed in U.S.A.
Komatsu America Corp.
March 2016
California
Proposition 65 Warning
This machine may contain mercury in two areas:

a.) The display monitor contains mercury if it has a mercury
label attached.
b.) Optional HID bulbs contain mercury (if the machine is so
equipped).
There is no risk of exposure unless the bulbs are broken.
However, the monitor and/or lamps must be reused, recycled
or properly disposed of in accordance with Local, State and
Federal Laws at the end of their useful lives.
INTRODUCTION 0
PC200/220LC-8 0-1
INTRODUCTION
FORWARD
This manual provides rules and guidelines which will help you use this machine safely and effectively. The precautions in this
manual must be followed at all times when performing operation and maintenance. Most accidents are caused by the failure to
follow fundamental safety rules for the operation and maintenance of machines. Accidents can be prevented by knowing
beforehand conditions that may cause a hazard when performing operation and maintenance.
Before beginning operation or maintenance, operators and maintenance personnel must always observe
the following points.
● Read this manual thoroughly and understand its contents fully.
● Read the safety messages and safety labels given in this manual carefully so that they are understood
fully.
● Keep this manual at the storage location for the Operation and Maintenance Manual given below so
that all personnel involved in working on the machine can consult it periodically.
● In case this manual is lost or damaged, immediately contact Komatsu or your Komatsu distributor to
obtain a new copy.
● When you sell the machine, make sure that this manual is provided to the new owner together with the
machine.
● In this manual, measurements are expressed in international standard units (SI). For the reference
purpose, weight units used in the past are also displayed in ( ).
Storage location for the Operation and Maintenance Manual:

Magazine box on the left side of the operator's seat.
0-2 PC200/220LC-8
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY INFORMATION
Most accidents are caused by the failure to follow fundamental safety rules for the operation and maintenance of machines. To
avoid accidents, read, understand and follow all precautions and warnings in this manual and on the machine before
performing maintenance and machine operations.
The following signal words are used to inform you that there is a potentially hazardous situation that may lead to personal
injury or damage. In this manual and on machine labels, different signal words are used to express the potential level of
hazard.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. This signal word is to be limited to most extreme situations.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Remark
This word is used for precautions that must be taken to avoid actions, which could shorten the life of the
machine.
Safety precautions are described in SAFETY section 1.
KOMATSU AMERICA CORP. cannot predict every circumstance that might involve a potential hazard in operation and
maintenance. Therefore the safety message in this manual and on the machine may not include all possible safety precautions.
If any procedures or actions not specifically recommended or allowed in this manual are used, you must be sure that you and
others can do such procedures and actions safely and without damaging the machine. If you are unsure about the safety of
some procedures, contact your local distributor or KOMATSU AMERICA CORP.
PC200/220LC-8 0-3
INTRODUCTION
• Safety labels
Safety labels are affixed to the machine to inform the operator or maintenance worker on the spot when carrying out
operation or maintenance of the machine that may involve hazard.
This machine uses "Safety labels using words" and "Safety labels using pictograms" to indicate safety procedures.
Example of safety label using words
Safety labels using pictogram

Safety pictograms use a picture to express a level of hazardous
condition equivalent to the signal word. These safety pictograms use
pictures in order to let the operator or maintenance worker
understand the level and type of hazardous condition at all times.
Safety pictograms show the type of hazardous condition at the top or
left side, and the method of avoiding the hazardous condition at the
bottom or right side. In addition, the type of hazardous condition is
displayed inside a triangle and the method of avoiding the hazardous
condition is shown inside a circle.
Komatsu cannot predict every circumstance that might involve a potential hazard in operation and maintenance.
Therefore, the safety messages in this manual and on the machine may not include all possible safety precautions.
If any procedures or actions not specifically recommended or allowed in this manual are used, it is your responsibility to
take the necessary steps to ensure safety.
In no event should you engage in prohibited uses or actions described in this manual.
The explanations, values, and illustrations in this manual were prepared based on the latest information available at that
time. Continuing improvements in the design of this machine can lead to changes in detail which may not be reflected in
this manual. Consult Komatsu or your Komatsu distributor for the latest available information of your machine or for
questions regarding information in this manual.
The numbers in illustrations correspond to the numbers in (_) in the text. (For example: 1 -> (1))
0-4 PC200/220LC-8
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This Komatsu machine is designed to be used mainly for the following work:
• Digging work
• Leveling work
• Ditching work
• Loading work
• Demolition work
See “RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS” on page 2-169 for further details.
Directions of Machine
(A) Front (C) Left (E) Operator’s Seat
(B) Rear (D) Right (F) Sprocket
In this manual, the terms front, rear, left, and right refer to the travel direction as seen from the operator's seat when the
operator's seat is facing the front and the sprocket is at the rear of the machine.
Visibility from Operator's Seat

This machine complies with the visibility standard (ISO 5006).
This machine maintains a close visibility of a height of 1.5 m (4.9 ft) at a point 1 m (3.2 ft) away from the outside surface of
the machine, and a visibility for a circumference of 12 m (39.3 ft).
PC200/220LC-8 0-5
INTRODUCTION
Breaking-in the New Machine
Remark
Your Komatsu machine has been thoroughly adjusted and tested before shipment from the factory. However,
operating the machine under full load before breaking the machine in can adversely affect the performance
and shorten the machine life.
Be sure to break in the machine for the initial 100 hours (as indicated on the service meter).
Make sure that you fully understand the content of this manual, and pay careful attention to the following points when
breaking in the machine.
• Run the engine at idle for 15 seconds after starting it. During this time, do not operate the control levers or fuel control
dial.
• Idle the engine for five minutes after starting it up.
• Avoid operation with heavy loads or at high speeds.
• Immediately after starting the engine, avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration, unnecessary sudden stops, and sudden
changes in direction.
0-6 PC200/220LC-8
INTRODUCTION
Product Information
When requesting service or ordering replacement parts, please inform your Komatsu distributor of the following items.
Product Identification Number (Pin) / Machine Serial No. Plate
On the bottom right of the operator's cab
The design of the nameplate differs according to the territory.
EPA* Regulations, Engine Number Plate

On the upper side of the engine cylinder head cover.
*EPA: Environmental Protection Agency, U.S.A.
PC200/220LC-8 0-7
INTRODUCTION
Service Meter Location
On top of the machine monitor.
Your Machine Serial Numbers and Distributor

Machine serial No.
Engine serial No.
Product identification number (PIN)
Distributor name
Address
Service Personnel
Phone/Fax
0-8 PC200/220LC-8
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FORWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Directions of Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Visibility from Operator's Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Breaking-in the New Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
Product Identification Number (Pin) / Machine Serial No. Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
EPA* Regulations, Engine Number Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
Service Meter Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Your Machine Serial Numbers and Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
SAFETY
SAFETY LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Location of Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Understanding the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Precautions Regarding Safety-related Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
If Problems Are Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Clothing and Personal Protective Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Fire Extinguisher and First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Safety Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Keep Machine Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Keep Operator's Compartment Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Leaving Operator's Seat with Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Handrails and Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Mounting and Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
No Persons on Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Do Not Get Caught in Work Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Burn Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Hot coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Hot oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Fire Prevention and Explosion Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Action if Fire Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Falling Objects, Flying Objects and Intruding Objects Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Attachment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Attachment Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Cab Window Glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Unauthorized Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Safety at Jobsite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
PC200/220LC-8 0-9
INTRODUCTION
Working On Loose Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Distance to High Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Ensure Good Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Ventilation for Enclosed Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Signalman's Signal and Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Emergency Exit from Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
SAFETY MACHINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Starting Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Checks Before Starting Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Safety Rules for Starting Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Starting Engine in Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Checks Before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Safety Rules for Changing Machine Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Safety Rules for Traveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Traveling on Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Operations on Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Prohibited Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Operations on Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Parking Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Loading and Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Shipping the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Battery Hazard Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Starting Engine with Booster Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Safety Rules for Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
LIFTING OBJECTS WITH BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Safety Rules for Lifting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
SAFETY MAINTENANCE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Warning Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Keep Work Place Clean and Tidy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Appoint Leader When Working With Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Precautions When Working at High Places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Stop Engine Before Carrying Out Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Two Workers for Maintenance When Engine Is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Proper Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Handling Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Precautions when using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Precautions when discarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Work Under the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
When using Hammer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
0-10 PC200/220LC-8
INTRODUCTION
Removing Battery Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Safety First when using High-pressure Grease to Adjust Track Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Do Not Disassemble Recoil Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Safety Rules for High-pressure Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Precaution for High Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Safety Handling High-Pressure Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Precaution for High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Waste Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Mercury Containing Component(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Compressed Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Periodic Replacement of Safety Critical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
OPERATION
MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Overall Machine View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
CONTROLS AND GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Machine Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
DETAILED CONTROLS AND GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Basic Operation of Machine Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Emergency Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Caution Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Basic Check Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Meter Display Portion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Pilot Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Gauges and Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Function Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Handling Function Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Service Meter/Clock Display Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Maintenance Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
User Mode Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
SUN ROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
EMERGENCY ESCAPE HAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
DOOR LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
COVER WITH LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
CAP WITH LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
DRINK BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
MAGAZINE BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
ASHTRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Air Conditioner Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Stopping Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
PC200/220LC-8 0-11
INTRODUCTION
Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Stopping Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Operation with Cold Air to Face and Warm Air to Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Defroster Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Use Air Conditioner with Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
Controls of Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Preset Station Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Method of Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
Setting Correct Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
Use Radio with Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
AUXILIARY ELECTRIC POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
24 V power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
12 V power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
FUSIBLE LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
TOOL BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
GREASE GUN HOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
MACHINE OPERATIONS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Before Starting Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Walk-Around Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Checks Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
Operations Before Starting Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
STARTING ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
Turbo Protect Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
AFTER STARTING ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
Breaking-in the New Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
Engine Warm Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
Hydraulic System Warm-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
Operation after Completion of Warming-Up Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
STOPPING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150
MACHINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
Preparations for Moving the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
Moving Machine Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
Moving Machine Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
Stopping Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
STEERING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
Steering the Machine when Stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
Changing Direction of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
Counter-Rotation Turn (Spin Turn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
SWINGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
WORK EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
0-12 PC200/220LC-8
INTRODUCTION
WORKING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
Working Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
One-Touch Power Max. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
GENERAL OPERATION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
Traveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
High Speed Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
Permissible Water Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
TRAVELING ON SLOPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
ESCAPE FROM MUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168
Track on One Side Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168
Tracks on Both Sides Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168
RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Backhoe Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Shovel Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Ditching Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Loading Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
BUCKET REPLACEMENT AND INVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
PARKING MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
MACHINE INSPECTION AFTER DAILY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
LOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
Transportation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
Loading and Unloading with Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
Securing Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182
Stowing Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
LONG DISTANCE TRANSPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187
Normal Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187
Long Distance Transport Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187
LIFTING MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
Standard Specification Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
COLD WEATHER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
Cold Weather Operation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
Fuel and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
Cooling System Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192
AFTER DAILY WORK COMPLETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193
AFTER COLD WEATHER SEASON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193
LONG TERM STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194
Before Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194
During Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194
After Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195
Starting Machine after Long-Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195
TROUBLES AND ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
PC200/220LC-8 0-13
INTRODUCTION
Running out of Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
Phenomena that are Not Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
Towing the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197
Lightweight Towing Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-198
Severe Job Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-198
Discharged Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199
Battery Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199
Battery Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200
Starting Engine with Booster Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201
OTHER TROUBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-204
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-205
Electronic Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206
Point of Contact to Telephone when Error Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

OUTLINE OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Handling Oil, Fuel, Coolant, and Performing Oil Clinic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Coolant and Water for Dilution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Carrying Out KOWA (Komatsu Oil Wear Analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Storing Oil and Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Electric System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
WEAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Wear Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Recommended Brands, Recommended Quality for products other than Komatsu Genuine Oil . . 3-11
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Torque List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Torque of Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Torque of Hose Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Torque of Split Flange Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Torque for Flared Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Torque for O-ring Boss Piping Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Torque for O-ring Boss Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Torque for Hoses (Taper Seal Type and Face Seal Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Safety Critical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Maintenance Schedule Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Maintenance Interval for Hydraulic Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Initial 10 Hours Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
0-14 PC200/220LC-8
INTRODUCTION
Initial 250 Hours Maintenance (Only After the First 250 Hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Initial 500 Hours Maintenance (Only After the First 500 Hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
When Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Check, Clean and Replace Air Cleaner Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Clean Inside of Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Check and Tighten Track Shoe Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Check and Adjust Track Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Replace Bucket Teeth (Vertical Pin Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Replace Bucket Teeth (Horizontal Pin Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Adjust Bucket Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Check Window Washer Fluid Level, Add Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Check and Maintenance Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Wash Washable Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Check Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Bleeding Air from Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Check Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Every 100 Hours Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Lubricating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Check Level of Battery Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Check Air Conditioner Compressor Belt Tension, Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Lubricating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Change Oil in Engine Oil Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Replace Engine Oil Filter Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Replace Fuel Pre-Filter Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Check Swing Pinion Grease Level, Add Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Clean and Inspect Radiator Fins, Oil Cooler Fins, Aftercooler Fins, Fuel Cooler Fins,
and Condenser Fins (Only Machines Equipped With Air Conditioner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Clean Air Conditioner Fresh/Recirc Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Replace Breather Element in Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Check Oil Level in Swing Machinery Case, Add Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Check Oil Level in Final Drive Case, Add Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Every 1000 Hours Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Change Oil in Swing Machinery Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Check Oil Level in Damper Case, Add Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Replace Fuel Main Filter Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Check All Tightening Points of Engine Exhaust Pipe Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Check Fan Belt Tension and Replace Fan Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Check Nitrogen Gas Charge Pressure In Accumulator (For Breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Change Oil in Final Drive Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Clean Hydraulic Tank Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Checking Charge Pressure of Nitrogen Gas in Accumulator (For Control Circuit) . . . . . . . . 3-80
Check Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Check Engine Valve Clearance, Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Check Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
PC200/220LC-8 0-15
INTRODUCTION
Check Vibration Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Check Starting Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Replace Accumulator (for Control Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
Check for Looseness of High-pressure Piping Clamp, Hardening Of Rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Check for Missing Fuel Spray Prevention Cap, Hardening Of Rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Check Operating Condition of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Change Oil in Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Replace Fuel Spray Prevention Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Replace High-pressure Piping Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Precautions when selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Read the Instruction Manual Thoroughly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Precautions when Removing or Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Precautions When Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
BUCKET WITH HOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Hook Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Prohibited Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
MACHINE READY FOR ATTACHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Stop Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Selector Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Attachment Control Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Lock Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Breaker Circuit Additional Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Switching Hydraulic Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Adjusting Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Switching Between Breaker and General Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Hydraulic Circuit Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Oil Flow Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Replace Additional Breaker Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Replace Additional Breaker Pilot Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
ATTACHMENT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Attachment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Attachment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
When Using Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
When Using General Attachment such as Crusher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
LONG TERM STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
0-16 PC200/220LC-8
INTRODUCTION
Attachment Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Attachment Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
TRACK SHOES SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
BUCKET TEETH SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Selection Guide for Horizontal or Vertical Pin Type Tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
TRAPEZOIDAL BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
HANDLING EXTENSION ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
HANDLING CLAMSHELL BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
RECOMMENDED ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Hydraulic Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Prohibited Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
HANDLING MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH KOMTRAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Basic Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
PC200/220LC-8 0-17
INTRODUCTION
MEMORANDUM
0-18 PC200/220LC-8
1SAFETY
Please read and make sure that you fully understand the precautions described in this manual and the
safety labels on the machine. Read and follow all safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in serious
injury or death.
PC200/220LC-8 1-1
SAFETY
SAFETY LABELS
The following warning signs and safety labels are used on this machine.
• Be sure that you fully understand the correct position and content of labels.
• To ensure that the content of labels can be read properly, be sure that they are in the correct place and always keep them
clean. When cleaning them, do not use organic solvents or gasoline. These may cause the labels to peel off.
• There are also other labels in addition to the warning signs and safety labels. Handle those labels in the same way.
• If the labels are damaged, lost, or cannot be read properly, replace them with new ones. For details of the part numbers for
the labels, see this manual or the actual label, and place an order with Komatsu distributor.
Location of Safety Labels
Monitor decal (09974-00601)

Contains mercury,
Dispose of in accordance with Local, State and Federal
Laws.
1-2 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
★: If equipped.
PC200/220LC-8 1-3
SAFETY
Safety Labels
1. Caution for operation, inspection and maintenance. (09651-03001)
WARNING - Improper operation and maintenance can cause serious
injury or death. Read manual and labels before operation and
maintenance. Follow instructions and warnings in manual and in
labels on machine. Keep manual in machine cab near operator.
Contact Komatsu distributor for a replacement manual.
2. Caution before operating. (09802-03000)

WARNING - To prevent SEVERE INJURY or DEATH do the
following before moving machine or its attachments:
• Honk horn to alert people nearby.

• Be sure no one is on or near machine or in swing area.
• Rotate cab for full view of travel path if it can be done safety.
• Use spotted if view is obstructed.
Follow above even if machine is equipped with travel alarm and
mirrors.
3. Caution for leaving operator's seat. (09654-03001)

WARNING - To avoid hitting unlocked operation levers, lower
equipment to ground and move LOCK LEVER (located near seat) to
LOCK position before standing up from operator’s seat.
Sudden and unwanted machine movement can cause serious injury

or death.
1-4 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
4. Caution for going close to electric cables. (09801-03002)
DANGER - Hazardous voltage hazard.
Serious injury or death can occur if machine or attachments are not
kept safe distance away from electrical lines.
5. Caution for operating pattern. (09822-03000)

WARNING - In order to prevent an accident resulting in injury or
death caused by error-operation, confirm the machine motion and
indicated operating pattern, when operating machine. Pay attention
to the circumference and operate slowly when confirming the
machine motion.
PC200/220LC-8 1-5
SAFETY
6. Caution when opening or closing front window. (09839-03000)
WARNING - To open or close the front or ceiling window, never
stand up from the operator’s seat before throwing the lock lever to
the LOCK position.
Inadvertently touching any of the working equipment control levers

might cause the machine to start moving all of a sudden, probably
resulting in a serious injury.
7. Caution when stowing front window. (09803-03000)

WARNING - When raising window, lock it in place with lock pins
on both sides.
Falling window can cause injury.
8. Caution for high-temperature hydraulic oil. (09653-03001)

WARNING - Hot oil hazard.
To prevent hot oil from spurting out:

• Turn engine off.
• Allow oil to cool.
• Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing.
9. Caution with high-temperature coolant. (09668-03001)

WARNING - Hot water hazard.
To prevent hot water from spurting out:

• Turn engine off.
• Allow water to cool.
• Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing.
1-6 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
10. Caution when handling accumulator. (09659-53000)
WARNING - Explosion hazard
• Keep away from flame

• Do not weld or drill
11. Caution when adjusting track tension. (09657-03003)

WARNING - Compressed spring lubricator and grease are under
hazardous high pressure and can cause serious injury or death.
• When adjusting track tension, only turn lubricator ONE TURN,

turning lubricator further could cause lubricator and grease to
fly off and hurt you.
• When loosening track shoe, if it does not loosen after turning
lubricator ONE TURN, ask Komatsu dealer or distributor to
disassemble.
12. Caution when handling cable. (09808-03000)

WARNING - Improper use of booster cables and battery cables can
cause an explosion resulting in serious injury or death.
• Follow instructions in manual when using booster cable and

battery cables.
13. Stopping rotation for inspection and maintenance. (09667-03001)

CAUTION - While engine is running:
1. Do not open cover.
2. Keep away from fan and fan-belt.
14. Emergency escape. (09844-00050)
PC200/220LC-8 1-7
SAFETY
15. Caution against falling. (09805-23000)
CAUTION - KEEP AWAY FROM EDGE.
16. Caution against falling. (09805-23000)

CAUTION - NEVER be on this hood.
17. Caution against falling. (09805-C0481)

There is a hazard of falling.
Do not step here!
18. Prohibited to enter swing radius. (09133-23000)

DANGER - Keep off swing area.
19. Caution for operation. (09134-A1681)

Sign indicates a hazard of being hit by the working device of the
machine.
Keep away from machine during operation.
1-8 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
20. Caution when handling battery. (09664-30011)
DANGER/POISON - SHIELD EYES. EXPLOSIVE GASES CAN CAUSE BLINDNESS OR INJURY.
NO
• SPARKS
• FLAMES
• SMOKING
SULFURIC ACID CAN CAUSE BLINDNESS OR SEVERE BURNS.
FLUSH EYES IMMEDIATELY WITH WATER. GET MEDICAL HELP FAST.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
DO NOT TIP, KEEP VENT CAPS TIGHT AND LEVEL.
Old
New
21. Prohibition of jump start. (09842-A0481)

Start the engine only after sitting down in the operator’s seat.
Do not attempt to start the engine by short-circuiting the engine
starting circuit. Such an act may cause a serious bodily injury or fire.
PC200/220LC-8 1-9
SAFETY
22. Engine hood lock. (20Y-00-41480)
• After the hood is closed, pull up its handle to make sure that it is
locked.
SAFETY INFORMATION
Understanding the Machine

Before operating the machine, read this manual thoroughly. If there are any places in this manual that you do not understand,
ask the person in charge of safety to give an explanation.
Precautions Regarding Safety-related Equipment

• Be sure that all guards, covers, cameras, and mirrors are in their proper position. Have them repaired immediately if they
are damaged.
• Understand the method of use of safety features and use them properly.
• Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in good operating condition.
Safety Rules
• Only trained and authorized personnel can operate and maintain the machine.
• Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when operating or performing maintenance on the machine.
• If you are under the influence of alcohol or medication, your ability to safely operate or repair your machine may be
severely impaired putting yourself and everyone else on your jobsite in danger.
• When working with another operator or with a person on worksite traffic duty, be sure that all personnel understand all
hand signals that are to be used.
If Problems Are Found

If you find any problems in the machine during operation or maintenance (noise, vibration, smell, incorrect gauges, smoke, oil
leakage, etc., or any abnormal display on the warning devices or monitor), report to the person in charge and have the
necessary action taken. Do not operate the machine until the problem has been corrected.
1-10 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Clothing and Personal Protective Items

• Do not wear loose clothing and accessories. There is a hazard that they may catch on control levers or other protruding
parts.
• If you have long hair and it hangs out from your hard hat, there is a
hazard that it may get caught up in the machine, so tie your hair up
and be careful not to let it get caught.
• Always wear a hard hat and safety shoes. If the nature of the work
requires it, wear safety glasses, mask, gloves, ear plugs, and safety
belt when operating or maintaining the machine.
• Check that all protective equipment functions properly before using
it.
Fire Extinguisher and First Aid Kit

(If equipped)
Always follow the precautions below to prepare for action if any injury
or fire should occur.
• Be sure that fire extinguishers have been provided and read the
labels to ensure that you know how to use them in emergencies.
• Carry out periodic inspection and maintenance to ensure that the fire
extinguisher can always be used.
• Provide a first aid kit in the storage point. Carry out periodic checks
and add to the contents if necessary.
Safety Equipment
• Be sure that all guards and covers are in their proper position. Have
guards and covers repaired immediately if they are damaged.
• Understand the method of use of safety features and use them
properly.
• Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in good
operating condition.
Keep Machine Clean

• If water gets into the electrical system, there is a hazard that it will cause malfunctions or mis-operation. Do not use water
or steam to wash the electrical system (sensors, connectors).
• If inspection and maintenance is carried out when the machine is still
dirty with mud or oil, there is a hazard that you will slip and fall, or
that dirt or mud will get into your eyes. Always keep the machine
clean.
PC200/220LC-8 1-11
SAFETY
Keep Operator's Compartment Clean

• When entering the operator's compartment, always remove all mud and oil from the soles of your shoes.
If you operate the pedal with mud or oil affixed to your shoes, your foot may slip and this may cause a serious accident.
• Do not leave parts or tools lying around the operator's compartment.
• Do not stick suction pads to the window glass. Suction pads act as a lens and may cause fire.
• Do not use cellular telephones inside the operator's compartment when driving or operating the machine.
• Never bring any dangerous objects such as flammable or explosive items into the operator's compartment.
Leaving Operator's Seat with Lock

• Before standing up from the operator's seat (such as when opening or
closing the front window or roof window, or when removing or
installing the bottom window, or when adjusting the operator's seat),
always lower the work equipment completely to the ground, set lock
lever (1) securely to the LOCK position (L), then stop the engine. If
you accidentally touch the control levers (pedals) when they are not
locked, there is a hazard that the machine may suddenly move and
cause serious injury or property damage.
• When leaving the machine, always lower the work equipment

completely to the ground, set lock lever (1) securely to the LOCK
position (L), then stop the engine. Use the key to lock all the
equipment. Always remove the key, take it with you, and keep it in
the specified place.
1-12 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Handrails and Steps

To prevent personal injury caused by slipping or falling off the machine, always do as follows.
• Use the handrails and steps marked by arrows in the diagram on the
right when getting on or off the machine.
• To ensure safety, always face the machine and maintain three-point

contact (both feet and one hand, or both hands and one foot) with the
handrails and steps (including the track shoe) to ensure that you
support yourself.
• Do not grip the control levers or lock lever when getting on or off the
machine.
• Never climb on the engine hood or covers where there are no
non-slip pads.
• Before getting on or off the machine, check the handrails and steps
(including the track shoe). If there is any oil, grease, or mud on the
handrails or steps (including the track shoe), wipe it off immediately.
Always keep these parts clean. Repair any damage and tighten any
loose bolts.
• Do not get on or off the machine while holding tools in your hand.
Mounting and Dismounting

Never jump on or off the machine. Never get on or off a moving machine.
If the machine starts to move when there is no operator on the machine, do not jump on to the machine and try to stop it.
No Persons on Attachments
Never let anyone ride on the work equipment, or other attachments. There is a hazard of falling and suffering serious injury.
PC200/220LC-8 1-13
SAFETY
Do Not Get Caught in Work Equipment

The clearance around the work equipment will change according to the movement of the link. If you get caught, this may lead
to serious personal injury. Do not allow anyone to approach any rotating or telescoping part.
Burn Prevention
Hot coolant
To prevent burns from hot coolant or steam spurting out when checking
or draining the coolant, wait for the coolant to cool to a temperature
where it is possible to touch the radiator cap by hand before starting the
operation. Even when the coolant has cooled down, loosen the cap slowly
to relieve the pressure inside the radiator before removing the cap.
Hot oil
To prevent burns from hot oil spurting out when checking or draining the
oil, wait for the oil to cool to a temperature where it is possible to touch
the cap or plug by hand before starting the operation. Even when the oil
has cooled down, loosen the cap or plug slowly to relieve the internal
pressure before removing the cap or plug.
1-14 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Fire Prevention and Explosion Prevention

• Fire caused by fuel or oil
Fuel, oil, antifreeze, and window washer liquid are particularly
flammable and can be hazardous. To prevent fire, always observe the
following:
• Do not smoke or use any flame near fuel or oil.
• Stop the engine before refueling.
• Do not leave the machine while adding fuel or oil.
• Tighten all fuel and oil caps securely.
• Do not spill fuel on overheated surfaces or on parts of the
electrical system.
• Use well-ventilated areas for adding or storing oil and fuel.
• Keep oil and fuel in the determined place and do not allow
unauthorized persons to enter.
• After adding fuel or oil, wipe up any spilled fuel or oil.
• When carrying out grinding or welding work on the chassis,
move any flammable materials to a safe place before starting.
• When washing parts with oil, use a non-flammable oil. Diesel
oil and gasoline may catch fire, so do not use them.
• Put greasy rags and other flammable materials into a safe
container to maintain safety at the work place.
• Do not weld or use a cutting torch to cut any pipes or tubes that
contain flammable liquids.
• Fire caused by accumulation of flammable material.
Remove any dry leaves, chips, pieces of paper, dust, or any other
flammable materials accumulated or affixed around the engine, exhaust manifold, muffler, or battery, or inside the
undercovers.
• Fire coming from electric wiring
Short circuits in the electrical system can cause fire.
• Always keep electric wiring connections clean and securely tightened.
• Check the wiring every day for looseness or damage. Tighten any loose connectors or wiring clamps. Repair or
replace any damaged wiring.
• Fire coming from hydraulic line
Check that all the hose and tube clamps, guards, and cushions are securely fixed in position.
If they are loose, they may vibrate during operation and rub against other parts. This may lead to damage to the hoses, and
cause high-pressure oil to spurt out, leading to fire damage or serious injury.
• Explosion caused by lighting equipment
• When checking fuel, oil, battery electrolyte, window washer fluid, or coolant, always use lighting with anti-explosion
specifications. If such lighting equipment is not used, there is danger of explosion that may cause serious injury.
• When taking the electrical power for the lighting from the machine itself, follow the instructions in this manual.
Action if Fire Occurs

If a fire occurs, escape from the machine as follows:
• Turn the start switch OFF to stop the engine.
• Use the handrails and steps to get off the machine.
• Do not jump off the machine. There is the danger of falling and suffering serious injury.
PC200/220LC-8 1-15
SAFETY
Windshield Washer Fluid

Use an ethyl alcohol base washer liquid.
Methyl alcohol base washer liquid may irritate your eyes, so do not use it.
Falling Objects, Flying Objects and Intruding Objects Prevention

On jobsites where there is a hazard that falling objects, flying objects, or
intruding objects may hit or enter the operator's cab, consider the
operating conditions and install the necessary guards to protect the
operator.
• When carrying out demolition or breaker operations, install a front
guard and use a laminated coating sheet on the front glass.
• When working in mines or quarries where there is a hazard of falling
rock, install FOPS (Falling Objects Protective Structure) and a front
guard, and use a laminated coating sheet on the front glass.
• When carrying out the above operations, always close the front
window. In addition, always ensure that bystanders are a safe
distance away and are not in danger from falling or flying objects.
• The above recommendations assume that the conditions are for
standard operations, but it may be necessary to add additional guards
according to the operating conditions on the jobsite. Always contact
your Komatsu distributor for advice.
Attachment Installation
• When installing optional parts or attachments, there may be
problems with safety or legal restrictions. Therefore contact your
Komatsu distributor for advice.
• Any injuries, accidents, or product failures resulting from the use of
unauthorized attachments or parts will not be the responsibility of
Komatsu.
• When installing and using optional attachments, read the instruction
manual for the attachment, and the general information related to attachments in this manual.
Attachment Combinations
Depending on the type or combination of work equipment, there is a hazard that the work equipment may hit the cab or other
parts of the machine. Before using unfamiliar work equipment, check if there is any hazard of interference, and operate with
caution.
Cab Window Glasses

• If the cab glass on the work equipment side is broken, there is a hazard that the work equipment may contact the operator's
body directly. Stop operation immediately and replace the glass.
• The ceiling window is made of organic glass (polycarbonate), and as such it is apt to break easily when receiving damage
on the surface, thereby deteriorating its protective characteristic. If there is a crack or damage caused by a fallen rock, or
when any sign of them is noticed, replace it with a new window.
1-16 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Unauthorized Modifications
If this machine is modified without permission from Komatsu, there is danger that problems may occur with safety and that
this may lead to serious personal injury. Modifications may have an adverse effect on items such as machine strength and
visibility. Before making any modifications, please consult your Komatsu distributor. Komatsu cannot take any responsibility
for accidents, failures, or damage caused by modifications not authorized by Komatsu.
Safety at Jobsite
Before starting operations, thoroughly check the area for any unusual conditions that could be dangerous.
• When carrying out operations near combustible materials such as thatched roofs, dry leaves or dry grass, there is a hazard
of fire, so be careful when operating.
• Check the terrain and condition of the ground at the worksite, and determine the safest method of operation. Do not
operate where there is a hazard of landslides or falling rocks.
• If water lines, gas lines, or high-voltage electrical lines may be
buried under the worksite, contact each utility and identify their
locations. Be careful not to sever or damage any of these lines.
• Take action to prevent unauthorized people from approaching the
jobsite.
• When working on public roads, position flagmen and erect barriers
to ensure the safety of passing traffic and pedestrians.
• When traveling or operating in shallow water or on soft ground,
check the shape and condition of the bedrock, and the depth and
speed of flow of the water before starting operations.
Working On Loose Ground

Avoid traveling or operating your machine too close to the edge of cliffs, overhangs, and deep ditches. The ground may be
weak in such areas. If the ground should collapse under the weight or vibration of the machine, there is a hazard that the
machine may fall or tip over. Remember that the soil after heavy rain or blasting or after earthquakes is weak in these areas.
When working on embankments or near excavated ditches, there is a hazard that the weight and vibration of the machine will
cause the soil to collapse. Before starting operations, take steps to ensure that the ground is safe and to prevent the machine
from rolling over or falling.
Distance to High Voltage Cables

Do not travel or operate the machine near electric cables. There is a
hazard of electric shock, which may cause serious injury or property
damage. On jobsites where the machine may go close to electric cables,
always do as follows.
• Before starting work near electric cables, inform the local power
company of the work to be performed, and ask them to take the
necessary action.
PC200/220LC-8 1-17
SAFETY
• Even going close to high-voltage cables can cause electric shock,
which may cause serious burns or even death. Always maintain a
safe distance (see the table on the right) between the machine and the
electric cable. Check with the local power company about safe
operating procedure before starting operations.
• To prepare for any possible emergencies, wear rubber shoes and
gloves. Lay a rubber sheet on top of the seat, and be careful not to
touch the chassis with any exposed part of your body.
• Use a signalman to give warning if the machine approaches too close
to the electric cables.
• When carrying out operations near high voltage cables, do not let
anyone near the machine.
• If the machine should come too close or touch the electric cable, to
prevent electric shock, the operator should not leave the operator's
compartment until it has been confirmed that the electricity has been
shut off.
Ensure Good Visibility

This machine is equipped with mirrors to improve the visibility, but even with mirrors, there are places which cannot be seen
from the operator's seat, so always be careful when operating.
When operating or traveling in places with poor visibility, if it is impossible to confirm the condition of the job site or if an
obstacle is in the area around the machine and there is danger that the machine may suffer damage or the operator may suffer
serious personal injury. When operating or traveling in places with poor visibility, always observe the following items:
• If the visibility cannot be sufficiently assured, position a flagman. The operator should pay careful attention to the signs
and follow the instructions of the flagman.
• The signals should be given only by one flagman.
• When working in dark places, turn on the working lamps and front lamps of the machine, and if necessary, set up
additional lighting in the area.
• Stop operations if there is poor visibility, such as in fog, snow, rain, or sand storms.
• Check the mirrors on the machine before starting operations every day. Clean off any dirt and adjust the view to ensure
good visibility.
• In areas where it is impossible to confirm the area behind the machine and observation cameras have been set up, clean off
any dirt from the lens and make sure that the camera gives a clear view of the rear.
Ventilation for Enclosed Area

Exhaust fumes from the engine can kill.
• If it is necessary to start the engine within an enclosed area, or when
handling fuel, flushing oil, or paint, open the doors and windows to
ensure that adequate ventilation is provided to prevent gas poisoning.
Signalman's Signal and Signs

• Set up signs to inform of road shoulders and soft ground. If the
visibility is not good, position a signalman if necessary. Operators
should pay careful attention to the signs and follow the instructions
from the signalman.
• Only one signalman should give signals.
• Make sure that all workers understand the meaning of all signals and signs before starting work.
1-18 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Emergency Exit from Operator's Cab

If it should be impossible to open the door of the cab, break the window glass with the hammer supplied and use the window
as an emergency escape.
For details, See “EMERGENCY ESCAPE HAMMER” on page 2-89.
To prevent injury, remove the broken pieces of glass remaining in the frame before escaping through the window. Be careful
not to slip on the broken pieces of glass.
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention

Asbestos dust in the air can cause lung cancer if it is inhaled. There is
danger of inhaling asbestos when working on jobsites handling
demolition work or work handling industrial waste. Always observe the
following.
• Spray water to keep down the dust when cleaning. Do not use
compressed air for cleaning.
• If there is danger that there may be asbestos dust in the air, always
operate the machine from an upwind position. All workers should
use an approved respirator.
• Do not allow other persons to approach during the operation.
• Always observe the rules and regulations for the work site and
environmental standards.
This machine does not use asbestos, but there is a danger that imitation parts may contain asbestos, so always use genuine
Komatsu parts.
PC200/220LC-8 1-19
SAFETY
SAFETY MACHINE OPERATION
Starting Engine
If there is a warning tag hanging from the work equipment control lever,
do not start the engine or touch the levers.
Checks Before Starting Engine

Carry out the following checks before starting the engine at the beginning
of the day's work.
• Remove all dirt from the surface of the window glass to ensure a
good view.
• Remove all dirt from the surface of the lens of the front lamps and working lamps, and check that they light up correctly.
• Check the coolant level, fuel level, and oil level in engine oil pan, check for clogging of the air cleaner, and check for
damage to the electric wiring.
• Adjust the operator's seat to a position where it is easy to carry out
operations, and check that there is no damage or wear to the seat belt
or mounting clamps.
• Check the operation of the instruments and gauges, check the angle
of the mirror, and check that the control levers are all at the Neutral
position.
• Before starting the engine, check that lock lever (1) is in LOCK
position (L).
• Adjust the mirrors so that the rear of the machine can be seen clearly
from the operator's seat.
• When adjusting, See “Rearview Mirrors” on page 2-183.
• Check that there are no persons or obstacles above, below, or in the
area around the machine.
1-20 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Safety Rules for Starting Engine

• When starting the engine, sound the horn as a warning.
• Start and operate the machine only while seated.
• Do not allow anyone apart from the operator to ride on the machine.
• Do not short-circuit the starting motor circuit to start the engine. It is not only dangerous, but may also cause serious
personal injury or fire.
Starting Engine in Cold Weather
• Carry out the warming-up operation thoroughly. If the machine is not thoroughly warmed up before the control levers
(pedals) are operated, the reaction of the machine will be slow or the machine may move in a way not expected by the
operator. Particularly in cold weather, be sure to carry out the warming-up operation thoroughly.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source. There is a
hazard that this will ignite the battery and cause the battery to explode.
• Before charging or starting the engine with a different power source, melt the battery electrolyte and check that there is no
leakage of electrolyte before starting.
PC200/220LC-8 1-21
SAFETY
Operation
Checks Before Operation
When carrying out the checks, move the machine to a wide area where
there are no obstructions, and operate slowly. Do not allow anyone near
the machine.
• Always fasten your seat belt.
• Check that the movement of the machine matches the display on the
control pattern card. If it does not match, replace it immediately with
the correct control pattern card.
• Check the operation of the gauges and equipment, and check the
operation of the bucket, arm, boom, travel system, swing system,
and steering system.
• Check for any problem in the sound of the machine, vibration, heat,
smell, or gauges; check also that there is no leakage of oil or fuel.
• If any problem is found, carry out repairs immediately.
Safety Rules for Changing Machine Directions
• Before traveling, set the machine so that sprocket (1) is behind the
operator's seat.
• If sprocket (1) is in front of the operator's cab, the machine moves in
the opposite direction from the operation of the lever (front and rear
travel is reversed, left and right steering is reversed). Be extremely
careful when operating the machine in this situation.
• Before traveling, check again that there is no one in the surrounding
area, and that there are no obstacles.
• Before travelling, sound the horn to warn people in the area.
• Always operate the machine only when seated.
• Do not allow anyone apart from the operator to ride on the machine.
• Check that the travel alarm (if equipped) works properly.
• Always lock the door and windows of the operator's compartment in
position (open or closed).
• On jobsites where there is a hazard of flying objects or of objects
entering the operator's compartment, check that the door and win-
dows are securely closed.
• If there is an area to the rear of the machine which cannot be seen,
position a signal person. Take special care not to hit other machines
or people when turning or swinging the machine.
Always be sure to carry out the above precautions even when the
machine is equipped with mirrors.
1-22 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Safety Rules for Traveling

• When traveling on flat ground, keep the work equipment 40 to 50 cm
(16 to 20 in) high above the ground.
• If the view to the right side is poor, raise the boom to ensure better
visibility.
• When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed and do not
operate the steering suddenly. There is danger that the machine may
turn over. The work equipment may hit the ground surface and cause
the machine to lose its balance, or may damage the machine or
structures in the area.
• When traveling on rough ground or steep slopes, if the machine is
equipped with auto-deceleration, always turn the auto-deceleration
switch OFF (cancel).
• Avoid traveling over obstacles when possible. If the machine has to
travel over an obstacle, keep the work equipment close to the ground
and travel at low speed. Never travel over obstacles which make the
machine tilt strongly to one side.
• When traveling or carrying out operations, always keep a safe
distance from people, structures, or other machines to avoid coming
into contact with them.
• When passing over bridges or structures, check first that the structure
is strong enough to support the weight of the machine. When
traveling on public roads, check first with the relevant authorities
and follow their instructions.
• When operating in tunnels, under bridges, under electric wires, or
other places where the height is limited, operate slowly and be
extremely careful not to let the work equipment hit anything.
PC200/220LC-8 1-23
SAFETY
Traveling on Slopes
To prevent the machine from tipping over or slipping to the side, always
do as follows.
• Keep the work equipment approximately 20 to 30 cm (8 to 12 in)
above the ground. In case of emergency, lower the work equipment
to the ground immediately to help stop the machine.
• When travel up slopes, set the operator's cab facing uphill, when
travel down slopes, set the operator's cab facing downhill. Always
check the firmness of the ground under the front of the machine
when traveling.
• Do not work on a slope covered with the steel plates. Even with
slight slopes there is a hazard that the machine may slip.
• When traveling up a steep slope, extend the work equipment to the

front to improve the balance, keep the work equipment
approximately 20 to 30 cm (8 to 12 in) above the ground, and travel
at low speed.
• When traveling downhill, lower the engine speed, keep the travel
lever close to the neutral position, and travel at low speed.
• Always travel straight up or down a slope. Traveling at an angle or

across the slope is extremely dangerous.
• Do not turn on slopes or travel across slopes. Always go down to a
flat place to change the position of the machine, then travel on to the
slope again.
• Do not travel on a slope covered with the steel plates. Even with
slight slopes there is a hazard that the machine may slip.
• Travel on grass or fallen leaves with low speed. Even with slight
slopes there is a hazard that the machine may slip. If the engine stops
when the machine is traveling on a slope, move the control levers
immediately to the neutral position and start the engine again.
1-24 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Operations on Slopes
• When working on slopes, there is a hazard that the machine may lose
its balance and turn over when the swing or work equipment are
operated. This may lead to serious injury or property damage, so
always provide a stable place when carrying out these operations,
and operate carefully.
• Do not swing the work equipment from the uphill side to the
downhill side when the bucket is loaded. This operation is
dangerous, and may cause the machine to tip over.
• If the machine has to be used on a slope, pile the soil to make a
platform (A) that will keep the machine as horizontal as possible.
Prohibited Operations
• Never dig the work face under an overhang. There is a hazard that
rocks may fall or that the overhang may collapse and fall on top of
the machine.
• Do not excavate too deeply under the front of the machine. The
ground under the machine may collapse and cause the machine to
fall.
• To make it easier to escape if there is any problem, set the tracks at

right angles to the road shoulder or cliff with the sprocket at the rear
when carrying out operations.
PC200/220LC-8 1-25
SAFETY
• Do not carry out demolition work under the machine. There is a
hazard that the machine may become unstable and tip over.
• When working on or from the top of buildings or other structures,
check the strength and the structure before starting operations. There
is a hazard of the building collapsing and causing serious injury or
damage.
• When carrying out demolition work, do not carry out demolition

above your head. There is a hazard of broken parts falling or of the
building collapsing and causing serious injury or property damage.
• Do not use the impact force of the work equipment for breaking
work. There is a hazard of damage to the work equipment, or a
hazard of serious personal injury being caused by flying pieces of
broken materials, or of the machine tipping over due to reaction from
the impact.
• Generally speaking, the machine is more liable to overturn when the
work equipment is at the side than when it is at the front or rear.
• When using a breaker or other heavy work equipment, there is a
hazard of the machine losing its balance and tipping over when oper-
ating on flat ground as well as on slopes.
• Do not suddenly lower, swing, or stop the work equipment.
• Do not suddenly extend or retract the boom cylinder. There is a
hazard that impact will cause the machine to tip over.
• Do not pass the bucket over the head of other workers or over the
operator's seat of dump trucks or other hauling equipment. The load
may spill or the bucket may hit the dump truck and cause serious
injury or property damage.
• In the operation using the fork or grapple, do not attempt to pick up
an object with their tips. There is a danger of damage to the machine
or personal injury, as the picked - up object can easily slip off.
1-26 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Operations on Snow
• Snow-covered or frozen surfaces are slippery, so be extremely careful when traveling or operating the machine, and do
not operate the levers suddenly. Even a slight slope may cause the machine to slip, so be particularly careful when
working on slopes.
• With frozen ground surfaces, the ground becomes soft when the temperature rises, and this may cause the machine to tip
over.
• If the machine enters deep snow, there is a hazard that it may tip over or become buried in the snow. Be careful not to
leave the road shoulder or to get trapped in a snow drift.
• When clearing snow, the road shoulder and objects placed beside the road are buried in the snow and cannot be seen.
There is a hazard of the machine tipping over or hitting covered objects, so always carry out operations carefully.
Parking Machine
• Park the machine on firm, level ground.
• Select a place where there is no hazard of falling rocks or landslides,
or of flooding if the land is low.
• Lower the work equipment completely to the ground.
• When leaving the machine, set lock lever (1) to the LOCK position
(L), then stop the engine.
• Always close the operator's cab door, and use the key to lock all the
equipment in order to prevent any unauthorized person from moving
the machine. Always remove the key, take it with you, and leave it in
the specified place.
• If it is necessary to park the machine on a slope, always do as

follows:
• Set the bucket on the downhill side, then dig it into the ground.
• Put blocks under the tracks to prevent the machine from
moving.
PC200/220LC-8 1-27
SAFETY
TRANSPORTATION
When the machine is transported on a trailer, there is danger of serious personal injury or death during transportation. Always
do as follows.
Always check the machine dimensions carefully. Depending on the work equipment installed, the machine weight,
transportation height, and overall length may differ.
Check beforehand that all bridges and other structures on the transportation route are strong enough to withstand the combined
weight of the transporter and the machine being transported.
The machine can be divided into parts for transportation, so when transporting the machine, please contact your Komatsu
distributor to have the work carried out.
Loading and Unloading

When loading or unloading the machine, mistaken operation may bring
the hazard of the machine tipping over or falling, so particular care is
necessary. Always do as follows.
• Perform loading and unloading on firm, level ground only. Maintain
a safe distance from the edge of the road or cliff.
• Never use the work equipment to load or unload the machine. There
is danger that the machine may fall or tip over.
• Always use ramps of adequate strength. Be sure that the ramps are
wide, long, and thick enough to provide a safe loading slope. Take
suitable steps to prevent the ramps from moving out of position or
coming off.
• Be sure the ramp surface is clean and free of grease, oil, ice and
loose materials. Remove dirt from machine-tracks. On a rainy day, in
particular, be extremely careful since the ramp surface is slippery.
• Turn the auto-decelerator switch OFF (auto-deceleration function released).
• Run the engine at low speed and travel slowly.
• When on the ramps, do not operate any lever except for the travel lever.
• Never correct your steering on the ramps. If necessary, drive off the ramps, correct the direction, then enter the ramps
again.
• The center of gravity of the machine will change suddenly at the joint between the ramps and the track or trailer, and there
is danger of the machine losing its balance. Travel slowly over this point.
• When loading or unloading to an embankment or platform, make sure that it has suitable width, strength, and grade.
• When swinging the upper structure on the trailer, the trailer is unstable, so pull in the work equipment and swing slowly.
• For machines equipped with a cab, always lock the door after boarding the machine. If this is not done, the door may
suddenly open during transportation.
• Refer to “TRANSPORTATION” on page 2-177.
Remark
Explanation of diagram above: (1) Blocks (2) Ramp (a) Center line of trailer (4) Angle for setting ramps (Max.
15°)
Shipping the Machine

When shipping the machine on a trailer, do as follows.
• The weight, transportation height, and overall length of the machine differ according to the work equipment, so be sure to
confirm the dimensions.
• When passing over bridges or structures on private land, check first that the structure is strong enough to support the
weight of the machine. When traveling on public roads, check first with the relevant authorities and follow their instruc-
tions.
• For details of the shipping procedure, See “TRANSPORTATION” on page 1-28.
1-28 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
BATTERY
Battery Hazard Prevention

Battery electrolyte contains sulfuric acid, and batteries generate flammable hydrogen gas, which may explode. Mistaken
handling can lead to serious injury or fire. For this reason, always observe the following precautions.
• Do not use or charge the battery if the battery electrolyte level is below the LOWER LEVEL line. This may cause an
explosion. Check the battery electrolyte level periodically and add distilled water to bring the electrolyte level to the
UPPER LEVEL line.
• When working with batteries, always wear safety glasses and rubber gloves.
• Never smoke or use any flame near the battery.
• If you spill acid on your clothes or skin, immediately flush the area
with large amount of water.
• If acid gets into your eyes, flush them immediately with a large
amount of water and seek medical attention.
• Before working with batteries, turn the starting switch to the OFF
position.
As there is a hazard that sparks will be generated, always do as follows:

• Do not let tools or other metal objects make any contact between the battery terminals. Do not leave tools or other metal
objects lying around near the battery.
• Wait for approximately one minute after turning off the starting switch. Always disconnect the negative (-) terminal
(ground side) first when removing the battery; when installing the battery, connect the positive (+) terminal first, and
connect the ground last. Tighten the battery terminals securely.
• Flammable hydrogen gas is generated when the battery is charged, so remove the battery from the chassis, take it to a
well-ventilated place, and remove the battery caps before charging it.
• Tighten the battery caps securely.
• Install the battery securely to the determined place.
PC200/220LC-8 1-29
SAFETY
Starting Engine with Booster Cables

If any mistake is made in the method of connecting the booster cables, it
may cause the battery to explode, so always do as follows:
• When starting with a booster cable, carry out the starting operation
with two workers (one worker sitting in the operator's seat and the
other working with the battery).
• When starting from another machine, do not allow the two machines
to touch.
• When connecting the booster cables, turn the starting switch OFF
position for both the normal machine and problem machine. There is
a hazard that the machine will move when the power is connected.
• Be sure to connect the positive (+) cable first when installing the
booster cables. Disconnect the negative (-) cable (ground side) first
when removing them.
• When removing the booster cables, be careful not to let the booster
cable clips touch each other or to let the clips touch the machine.
• Always wear safety goggles and rubber gloves when starting the
engine with booster cables.
• When connecting a normal machine to a problem machine with
booster cables, always use a normal machine with the same battery
voltage as the problem machine.
• For details of the starting procedure when using booster cables, See
“Starting Engine with Booster Cables” on page 2-201.
1-30 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
TOWING
Safety Rules for Towing

Serious injury or death could result if a disabled machine is towed incorrectly or if there is a mistake in the selection or
inspection of the wire rope.
For towing, See “Towing the Machine” on page 2-197.
• Always check that the wire rope used for towing has ample strength for the weight of the machine being towed.
• Never use a wire rope which has cut strands (A), reduced diameter
(B), or kinks (C). There is danger that the rope may break during the
towing operation.
• Always wear leather gloves when handling wire rope.
• Never tow a machine on a slope.
• During the towing operation, never stand between the towing
machine and the machine being towed.
• Operate the machine slowly and be careful not to apply any sudden
load to the wire rope.
PC200/220LC-8 1-31
SAFETY
LIFTING OBJECTS WITH BUCKET
Safety Rules for Lifting Objects

• Determine the signals to be used and place a signalman in position.
• To prevent the machine from tipping over or falling, carry out the operation on flat ground.
• To prevent the danger of contact with a raised load or the danger from a falling load, do not allow any worker inside the
area.
• Do not exceed the specified lifting load.
For details of the maximum lifting load permitted for this machine, See “BUCKET WITH HOOK” on page 5-3.
• It is dangerous if the raised load hits any person or structure. When swinging or operating the work equipment, check
carefully that the surrounding area is safe.
• Do not swing or operate the work equipment suddenly. There is danger that this may cause the load to sway and the
machine to tip over.
• Do not leave the operator's seat when there is a raised load.
• Do not use the work equipment or swing to pull the load in any
direction. There is danger that the hook may break and the load come
off, causing the work equipment to move suddenly and cause
personal injury.
1-32 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
SAFETY MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Warning Tag
• Always attach the “DO NOT OPERATE” warning tag to the work
equipment control lever in the operator's cab to alert others that you
are performing service or maintenance on the machine. Attach
additional warning tags around the machine if necessary.
Warning tag Part No. 09963-03001
Keep this warning tag in the tool box while it is not used. If there is
not a tool box, keep the tag in the operation manual pocket.
• If any other person starts the engine, or touches or operates the work
equipment control levers (pedals) while you are performing service
or maintenance, you may suffer serious injury.
Keep Work Place Clean and Tidy

• Do not leave hammers or other tools lying around in the work place.
• Wipe up all grease, oil, or other substances that will cause you to slip.
• Always keep the work place clean and tidy to enable you to carry out operations safely.
• If the work place is not kept clean and tidy, there is the danger that you will trip, slip, or fall over and injure yourself.
• When cleaning the ceiling window which is made of organic glass (polycarbonate), use tap water and avoid use of organic
solvents for cleaning.
• An organic solvent like benzene, toluene or methanol can invite a chemical reaction like dissolution and decomposition on
the window glass, deteriorating polycarbonate in use.
Appoint Leader When Working With Others

• When repairing the machine or when removing and installing the work equipment, appoint a leader and follow his
instructions during the operation.
Precautions When Working at High Places

When working at high places, use a step ladder or other stand to ensure that the work can be carried out safely.
PC200/220LC-8 1-33
SAFETY
Stop Engine Before Carrying Out Maintenance

• Stop the machine on firm, level ground.
• Select a place where there is no hazard of falling rocks or landslides,
or of flooding if the land is low.
• Lower the work equipment completely to the ground and stop the
engine.
• Turn the starting switch to the ON position. Operate the work
equipment control lever back and forth, left and right at the full
stroke 2 to 3 times to eliminate the remaining internal pressure in the
hydraulic circuit, and then push lock lever (1) to the LOCK
position (L).
• Check that the battery relay is off and main power is not conducted.
(Wait for approximately one minute after turning off the engine
starting switch key and press the horn switch. If the horn does not
sound, it is not activated.)
• Put blocks under the track to prevent the machine from moving.
1-34 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Two Workers for Maintenance When Engine Is Running

To prevent injury, do not carry out maintenance with the engine running.
If maintenance must be carried out with the engine running, carry out the
operation with at least two workers and do as follows.
• One worker must always sit in the operator's seat and be ready to
stop the engine at any time. All workers must maintain contact with
the other workers.
• Set lock lever (1) to the LOCK position (L) to prevent the work
equipment from moving.
• When carrying out operations near the fan, fan belt, or other rotating
parts, there is a hazard of being caught in the parts, so be careful not
to come close.
• Do not touch any control levers (pedals). If any control lever (pedal)
must be operated, always give a signal to the other workers to warn
them to move to a safe place.
• Never drop or insert tools or other objects into the fan or fan belt.
Parts may break or be sent flying.
Proper Tools
Use only tools suited to the task and be sure to use the tools correctly.
Using damaged, low quality, faulty, makeshift tools or improper use of
the tools could cause serious personal injury.
Accumulator
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas. When
handling the accumulator, careless procedure may cause an explosion
which could lead to serious injury or property damage. For this reason,
always observe the following precautions.
• Do not disassemble the accumulator.
• Do not bring it near flame or dispose of it in fire.
• Do not make holes in it, weld it, or use a cutting torch.
• Do not hit or roll the accumulator, or subject it to any impact.
• When disposing of the accumulator, the gas must be released. Please
contact your Komatsu distributor to have this work performed.
PC200/220LC-8 1-35
SAFETY
Handling Gas Spring

The gas springs are located at the engine hood (left, right: two places) and the cab roof (left, right: two places). The diagram
below shows the gas spring on the left side of the engine hood.
Precautions when using
• Never disassemble.
The gas springs are charged with pressurized nitrogen gas, so it is
extremely dangerous to disassemble them.
• Never dispose of them in fire.
The nitrogen gas in the gas springs is not flammable, but if a gas
spring is thrown into fire, the high temperatures will cause softening
and breakage of the seals and rod guide and when the gas inside the
tube expands, there is danger that it may burst and spray out oil.
• If there is any leakage of oil or gas, stop use immediately and contact
your Komatsu distributor or place of purchase.
If the gas pressure goes down, there is danger that it will be unable to
hold the hood.
Precautions when discarding

• When disposing of a gas spring, do not throw it into fire.
• Fix the gas spring securely in a horizontal position to a boring
machine.
Drill 2 or 3 mm (0.079 or 0.118 in) diameter holes at a position 20
mm to 30 mm (0.8 in to 1.2 in) from the end face at the tube bracket
end to release the gas before disposing of the gas spring.
When doing this, there is danger that the internal oil, metal filings, or
the internal pressurized gas may cause things to fly, so always wear
safety glasses when carrying out the operation.
Before disposing of the gas spring, retract the rod and check that it
cannot extend, and check also that the internal gas has been
completely released.
Personnel
Only authorized personnel can service and repair the machine. Do not allow unauthorized personnel into the area. If
necessary, employ an observer.
1-36 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Attachments
• Appoint a leader before starting removal or installation operations
for attachments.
• Place attachments that have been removed from the machine in a
stable condition so that they do not fall. Take steps to prevent
unauthorized persons from entering the storage area.
Work Under the Machine

• Make sure the hoists or jacks you use are in good repair and strong
enough to handle the weight of the component. Never use jacks at
places where the machine is damaged, bent, or twisted. Never use
frayed, twisted or pinched wire rope. Never use bent or distorted
hooks.
• It is extremely dangerous to work under the machine if the track
shoes are lifted off the ground and the machine is supported only
with the work equipment. If any of the control levers are touched by
accident, or there is damage occurring to the hydraulic piping, the
work equipment or the machine will suddenly drop. This is
extremely dangerous. Never work under the work equipment or the
machine.
• If it is necessary to raise the work equipment or the machine and then go under it to carry out inspection or maintenance,
support the work equipment and machine securely with blocks and stands strong enough to support the weight of the work
equipment and machine. If the work equipment and machine are not supported, there is a hazard that they may come down
and that this may lead to serious personal injury or death.
• Never use concrete blocks for supports. They can collapse under even light loads.
Noise
When carrying out maintenance of the engine and you are exposed to noise for long periods of time, wear ear covers or ear
plugs while working.
If the noise from the machine is too loud, it may cause temporary or permanent hearing problems.
When using Hammer

When using a hammer, pins may fly out or metal particles may be
scattered. This may lead to serious injury. Always do as follows.
• If hard metal parts such as pins, bucket teeth, cutting edges, or
bearings are hit with a hammer, there is a hazard that pieces might be
scattered and cause injury. Always wear safety goggles and gloves.
• When hitting pins or bucket teeth, there is a hazard that broken
pieces might be sent flying and injure people in the surrounding area.
Always check that there is no one in the surrounding area.
• There is a hazard that the pin hit with strong force may fly out and
injure people in the surrounding area.
PC200/220LC-8 1-37
SAFETY
Welding
Welding operations must always be carried out by a qualified welder and in a place equipped with proper equipment. There is
a hazard of gas, fire, or electrocution when carrying out welding, so never allow any unqualified personnel to carry out
welding.
Removing Battery Terminals

When repairing the electrical system or when carrying out electrical welding, remove the negative (-) terminal of the battery to
prevent the flow of current.
Safety First when using High-pressure Grease to Adjust Track Tension

• Grease is pumped into the track tension adjustment system under
high pressure.
• If the specified procedure for maintenance is not followed when
making adjustment, grease drain plug (1) may fly out and cause
serious injury or property damage.
• When loosening grease drain plug (1) to loosen the track tension,
never loosen it more than one turn. Loosen the grease drain plug
slowly.
• Never put your face, hands, feet, or any other part of your body close
to grease drain plug (1).
Do Not Disassemble Recoil Springs

Never attempt to disassemble the recoils spring assembly. It contains a
spring under high pressure which serves as a shock absorber for the idler.
If it is disassembled by mistake, the spring will fly out and cause serious
injury. When it becomes necessary to disassemble it, ask your Komatsu
distributor to do the work.
1-38 PC200/220LC-8
SAFETY
Safety Rules for High-pressure Oil

The hydraulic system is always under internal pressure. When inspecting or replacing piping or hoses, always check that the
pressure in the hydraulic circuit has been released. If the circuit is still under pressure, it will lead to serious injury, so always
do as follows.
• Release the pressure in the hydraulic circuit. For details, See “Method of Releasing Pressure in Hydraulic Circuit” on
page 3-82. Do not carry out any inspection or replacement work when the hydraulic system is under pressure.
• If there is any leakage from the piping or hoses, the surrounding area will be wet, so check for cracks in the piping and
hoses and for swelling in the hoses.
• When carry out inspection, wear safety glasses and leather gloves.
• There is a hazard that high-pressure oil leaking from small holes may
penetrate your skin or cause blindness if it contacts your eyes
directly. If you are hit by a jet of high-pressure oil and suffer injury
to your skin or eyes, wash the place with clean water, and consult a
doctor immediately for medical attention.
Precaution for High Fuel Pressure

High pressure is generated inside the engine fuel piping when the engine is running. When carrying out inspection or
maintenance of the fuel piping system, wait for at least 30 seconds after stopping the engine to let the internal pressure go
down before starting inspection or maintenance.
Safety Handling High-Pressure Hoses
• If oil or fuel leaks from high-pressure hoses, it may cause fire or defective operation, which may lead to serious injury. If
any loose bolts are found, stop work and tighten to the specified torque. If any damaged hoses are found, stop operations
immediately and contact your Komatsu distributor.
Replace the hose if any of the following problems are found.
• Damaged or leaking hydraulic fitting.
• Frayed or cut covering or exposed reinforcement wire layer.
• Covering swollen in places.
• Twisted or crushed movable portion.
• Foreign material embedded in covering.
PC200/220LC-8 1-39
SAFETY
Precaution for High Voltage

When the engine is running or immediately after it has stopped, high
voltage is generated at the injector terminal and inside the engine
controller, so there is danger of electrocution. Never touch the injector
terminal or the inside of the engine controller.
If it is necessary to touch the injector terminal or the inside of the engine
controller, please contact your Komatsu distributor.
Waste Materials
To prevent pollution, pay careful attention to the method of disposing of
waste materials.
• Always put oil drained from your machine in containers. Never drain
oil directly onto the ground or dump into the sewage system, rivers,
the sea, or lakes.
• Obey appropriate laws and regulations when disposing of harmful
objects such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvent, filters, and batteries.
Mercury Containing Component(s)

The monitor display backlight contains mercury. The machine may be equipped with optional High Intensity Discharge
lighting lamps which also may contain mercury. These components must be reused, recycled or properly disposed of in
accordance with applicable Local, State and Federal Laws.
Air Conditioner Maintenance

If air conditioner refrigerant gets into your eyes, it may cause blindness; if it touches your skin, it may cause frostbite.
Never touch refrigerant.
Compressed Air
When carrying out cleaning with compressed air, there is a hazard of serious injury caused by flying particles.
When using compressed air to clean elements or the radiator, always wear safety goggles, dust mask, gloves, and other
protective equipment.
Periodic Replacement of Safety Critical Parts

• For using the machine safely for an extended period of time, replace safety-critical parts like hoses and seat belts
periodically.
Replacement of safety-critical parts: See “SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS” on page 3-16.
• The material of these components naturally changes over time, and repeated use causes deterioration, wear, and fatigue.
As a result, there is a hazard that these components may fail and cause serious injury or death. It is difficult to judge the
remaining life of these components from external inspection or the feeling when operating, so always replace them at the
specified interval.
• Replace or repair safety-critical parts if any defect is found, even when they have not reached the time specified interval.
1-40 PC200/220LC-8
2OPERATION
PC200/220LC-8 2-1
OPERATION
MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS
Overall Machine View
1. Bucket 6. Boom cylinder

2. Bucket cylinder 7. Sprocket
3. Arm 8. Track frame
4. Arm cylinder 9. Track shoe
5. Boom 10. Idler
2-2 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
CONTROLS AND GAUGES
1. Radio 13. Fuel control dial

2. Lock lever 14. Lamp switch
3. Left work equipment control lever 15. Swing lock switch
4. One-touch power max. switch 16. Revolving warning lamp switch (If equipped)
5. Travel pedals 17. Large capacity airflow conditioner blower switch (If equipped)
6. Travel levers 18. Attachment control pedal (If equipped)
7. Horn switch 19. Attachment control pedal (If equipped)
8. Machine monitor 20. Room lamp switch
9. Cigarette lighter 21. Emergency pump drive switch
10. Right work equipment control lever 22. Swing parking brake release switch
11. Blade control lever (If equipped)
12. Starting switch
PC200/220LC-8 2-3
OPERATION
Machine Monitors
AA: Screen standard

BB: Screen with all lamps lit
CC: Maintenance time warning screen
1. Wiper 16. Window washer switch
2. Buzzer cancel switch 17. Air conditioner control switches
3. Auto-deceleration switch 18. Engine oil pressure monitor
4. Engine coolant temperature monitor 19. Charge level monitor
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge 20. Radiator coolant level monitor
6. Hydraulic oil temperature gauge 21. Air conditioner monitor
7. Service meter, Clock 22. Wiper monitor
8. Hydraulic oil temperature monitor 23. Swing lock monitor
9. Working mode monitor 24. Engine pre-heating monitor or One-touch power max. monitor
10. Travel speed monitor 25. Auto-deceleration monitor
11. Fuel gauge 26. Engine oil level monitor
12. ECO gauge 27. Air cleaner clogging monitor
13. Fuel level monitor 28. Water separator monitor
14. Working mode selector switch 29. Function switches (F1 to F6)
15. Travel speed selector switch 30. Maintenance interval monitor
2-4 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
DETAILED CONTROLS AND GAUGES

The following is an explanation of devices needed for operating the machine.
To perform suitable operations correctly and safely, it is important to completely understand methods of operating the
equipment, and the meanings of the displays.
Monitoring System
AA: Screen for standard

A. Emergency monitors D. Meter display portion, Pilot display
B. Caution monitors E. Monitor switches portion
C. Basic check monitors
Remark
One of the features of liquid crystal display panels is that there may be black spots (spots that do not light up)
or white spots (spots that stay lighted up) on the screen. If there are fewer than ten black or white spots, this is
not a failure or a defect.
PC200/220LC-8 2-5
OPERATION
Basic Operation of Machine Monitor

Starting Engine When Situation is Normal
• When the starting switch is turned to the ON position, the opening screen GG is displayed.
• After the opening screen GG is displayed for twoseconds, the screen switches to the check before starting screen DD.
• After the check before starting screen DD is displayed for two seconds, the screen switches to the working mode/travel
mode display screen HH.
• After the working mode/travel mode display screen HH is displayed for two seconds, the screen switches to standard
screen BB.
• If the working mode when the engine is started is B mode, the opening screen GG is displayed for two seconds, and the
screen then switches to the breaker mode confirmation screen II.
When starting in B mode, press switch F6. If you do not want to start B
mode, press switch F5. In this case, the system starts with E mode.
2-6 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Remark
When the engine is started, the battery voltage may suddenly drop depending on the temperature and the
battery condition. If this happens, the display on the machine monitor may momentarily go out, but this does
not indicate any abnormality.
Stopping Engine When Situation is Normal
• When the starting switch is turned to the ON position, ending screen JJ is displayed for five seconds, then on the display
goes out.
PC200/220LC-8 2-7
OPERATION
If There Is Abnormality When Starting Engine
• If there is any abnormality when starting the engine, the check before starting screen DD changes to the maintenance
interval warning screen CC, warning screen FF, or error screen EE.
• After displaying the check before starting screen DD for two seconds, the screen changes to the maintenance interval
warning screen CC.
• After displaying the maintenance interval warning screen CC for 30 seconds, the screen returns to the normal screen BB.
• After displaying the check before starting screen DD for two seconds, the screen changes to the warning screen FF or
error screen EE.
2-8 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
If Any Abnormality Occurs During Operation
• If any abnormality occurs during operation, the normal operation screen BB changes to warning screen FF-(1) or the error
screen EE.
• After displaying warning screen FF-(1) for two seconds, the screen automatically changes to warning screen FF-(2).
PC200/220LC-8 2-9
OPERATION
Remark
The colors lighting up the monitors related to the emergency stop items, caution items, and basic check items
are as follows.
AA: Screen for standard

Color when monitor lights up

Type of monitor
When normal When abnormal At low temperature
(1) Engine coolant temperature monitor Blue Red White
(2) Hydraulic oil temperature monitor Blue Red White
(3) Fuel level monitor Blue Red -
(4) Radiator coolant level monitor OFF Red -
(5) Charge level monitor OFF Red -
(6) Engine oil pressure monitor OFF Red -
(7) Engine oil level monitor OFF Red -
(8) Air cleaner clogging monitor OFF Red -
(9) Water separator monitor OFF Red -
(10) Maintenance interval monitor OFF Red -
2-10 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Emergency Monitors
If the monitor lights up red, stop the engine immediately or run at low idle, check applicable location, then
perform necessary actions.
These items should be observed while the engine is running. If there is a problem, the monitor for the abnormal location lights
up red and buzzer sounds, perform action immediately.
1. Engine coolant temperature monitor 3. Engine oil pressure monitor

2. Hydraulic oil temperature monitor
Engine Coolant Temperature Monitor

Monitor (1) warns operator that the engine coolant temperature has risen.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes abnormally high, the monitor
shows abnormal display (C). The overheat prevention system is
automatically actuated and the engine speed drops.
Stop operations and run the engine at low idling until monitor (1) shows
normal display (B).
Display (A) at low temperatures: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor background (D) is white
Display (B) at normal temperatures: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor background (D) is blue
Display (C) when condition is abnormal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor background (D) is red
PC200/220LC-8 2-11
OPERATION
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Monitor
This monitor (2) warns the operator that the hydraulic oil temperature has
risen.
If the hydraulic oil temperature becomes abnormally high, abnormality
display (C) is shown.
Stop operations and stop the engine or run it at low idling until the
monitor changes to normal display (B).
Engine Oil Pressure Monitor
Monitor (3) lights up red if the engine lubrication oil pressure goes below
normal level. If monitor lights up red, stop the engine immediately, check
the lubrication system and level of oil in the engine oil pan.
2-12 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Caution Monitors
If the warning monitor lights up red, stop operations as soon as possible and perform inspection and
maintenance of the applicable location. If the warning is ignored, it may lead to failure.
These are items that should be observed while the engine is running. If any abnormality occurs, the screen displays the item
that needs immediate action.
If there is an abnormality, the monitor for the abnormal location lights up red.
1. Charge level monitor 4. Engine coolant temperature monitor

2. Fuel level monitor 5. Water separator monitor
3. Air cleaner clogging monitor 6. Hydraulic oil temperature monitor
Charge Level Monitor

Monitor (1) warns the operator of an abnormality in the charging system
while the engine is running.
If the battery is not being charged properly while the engine is running,
monitor (1) lights up red.
If monitor lights up red, check the V-belt for looseness. If any
abnormality is found, perform the necessary actions. For details, See
“OTHER TROUBLE” on page 2-203.
PC200/220LC-8 2-13
OPERATION
Fuel Level Monitor
Monitor (2) lights up to warn the operator the fuel level in the tank is low.
When the remaining fuel level reaches approximately 41 liters (10.83 US
gal), the monitor lamp lights up red, so add fuel as soon as possible.
Air Cleaner Clogging Monitor

Monitor (3) warns the operator of a clogged air cleaner.
If the monitor lights up red, stop the engine, inspect and clean the air
cleaner.
Engine Coolant Temperature Monitor

If this monitor (4) shows low-temperature display (A), carry out the
warming-up operation. For details, See “Engine Warm Up” on page 2-
139.
Carry out warming-up operation for the engine until monitor (4) shows
normal display (B).
Water Separator Monitor
This monitor (5) lights up red to inform the operator that the water sepa-
rator is full of water. If monitor (5) lights up red, stop the engine and
drain the water from the water separator.
For details of the method of draining the water from the water separator,
See “Check for Water and Sediment in Water Separator, Drain Water” on
page 2-116.
Remark
The water separator forms one unit with the fuel pre-filter. It is
at the bottom of the fuel pre-filter and can be removed.
2-14 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Monitor
If this monitor (6) shows low-temperature display (A), carry out the
warming-up operation. For details, See “Hydraulic System Warm-Up” on
page 2-142.
Carry out the warming-up operation for the hydraulic equipment until
monitor (6) shows normal display (B).

PC200/220LC-8 2-15
OPERATION
Basic Check Monitors
These monitors DO NOT ensure that the machine is in good condition. When performing checks before
starting (daily checks), do not simply rely on the monitors. Always dismount the machine and check each
item directly.
Displays basic items among the check before starting items that must be checked before starting the engine. If there is any
abnormality, monitor for the location of abnormality will light up.
1. Radiator coolant level monitor 3. Maintenance interval monitor

2. Engine oil level monitor
Radiator Coolant Level Monitor

Monitor (1) warns the operator that there has been a drop in the radiator
coolant level.
If the radiator coolant is low, the lamp lights up red, so check coolant
level in the radiator and sub tank, and add coolant.
2-16 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Engine Oil Level Monitor

Monitor (2) warns the operator that the oil level in the engine oil pan has
dropped.
If oil level in the engine oil pan is low, the lamp lights up red, so check
the oil level, and add oil.
Maintenance Interval Monitor

Monitor (3) lights up to warn the operator that the set time has passed
since maintenance was last performed.
• Lit yellow: The maintenance time is due within 30 hours.
• Lit red: The maintenance time has already passed.
This monitor screen goes out after 30 seconds and returns to the normal
operation screen.
• For details of the method of confirming the maintenance interval,
See “Maintenance Selector Switch” on page 2-42.
Remark
If it is desired to change the maintenance interval settings,
have your Komatsu distributor change the interval settings.
PC200/220LC-8 2-17
OPERATION
Meter Display Portion
Pilot display Guage and meter

1. Engine pre-heating monitor 9. Fuel gauge
2. Swing lock monitor 10. Hydraulic oil temperature gauge
3. Wiper monitor 11. Service meter, clock
4. Auto-deceleration monitor 12. Air conditioner monitor
5. Working mode monitor 13. Message monitor (only machines equipped with KOMTRAX)
6. Travel speed monitor 14. ECO gauge
7. One-touch power max. monitor 15. Idle stop guidance
8. Engine coolant temperature gauge
Pilot Display
The pilot display portion consists of the pilot lamps to confirm the actuating condition of each function.
When the starting switch is turned ON, the pilot lamp lights up when the display items are functioning.
Engine Pre-heating Monitor
This monitor (1) displays the preheating time needed when starting the
engine in temperatures below 0°C (32°F).
When the temperature is low (in cold areas) and the preheating function
is automatically actuated, the preheating monitor lights up. When the
preheating is completed, it goes out.
Automatic preheating is for a maximum of approximately 30 seconds.
2-18 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Swing Lock Monitor
This monitor (2) informs the operator that the swing lock has been
actuated.
When actuated: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights up
The monitor lights up when the swing lock switch is turned to the ON
(LOCK) position.
The monitor flashes when the swing holding brake release switch is
turned ON.
• For details of the positions of the swing holding brake release
switch, See “CONTROLS AND GAUGES” on page 2-3.
Remark
The swing motor is equipped with a disc brake that mechanically stops the rotation. When the swing lock
monitor is lit up, the brake remains applied.
Wiper Monitor
Monitor (3) indicates operating status of the wiper.
The monitor display when wiper switch is operated, as follows.
When ON lights up: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wiper moves continuously
When INT lights up: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper moves intermittently
OFF: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper stops
• For details of the positions of the wiper switch, See “CONTROLS
AND GAUGES” on page 2-3.
Auto-deceleration Monitor
Monitor (4) shows if the auto-deceleration is being actuated.
The monitor display when auto-deceleration switch is operated, as
follows.
Auto-deceleration monitor ON: . . . . . Auto-deceleration actuated
Auto-deceleration monitor OFF:. . . . . Auto-deceleration canceled
For details of the positions of the auto-deceleration switch, See “CON-
TROLS AND GAUGES” on page 2-3.
PC200/220LC-8 2-19
OPERATION
Working Mode Monitor
This monitor (5) displays the setting of the working mode.
The monitor display is as follows according to the operation of the
working mode switch.
P: P mode (for heavy-load operations)
E: E mode (for operations with emphasis on fuel consumption)
L: L mode (for fine control operations)
B: B mode (for breaker operations)
ATT: ATT mode (for crusher operations)
• For details of the positions of the working mode switch, See “CON-
TROLS AND GAUGES” on page 2-3.
Travel Speed Monitor
This monitor (6) shows the setting for the travel speed.
The monitor display is as follows according to the operation of the travel
speed selector switch.
Lo: Low-speed travel
Mi: Mid-range speed travel
Hi: High-speed travel
• For details of the positions of the travel speed selector switch, See
“CONTROLS AND GAUGES” on page 2-3.
One-Touch Power Max. Monitor

This monitor (7) shows if the one-touch power max. function is being
actuated.
The monitor display when the knob switch on the left control lever is
operated is as follows. (The actual monitor display is shown at the
position of preheating monitor (1).)
Monitor lights up: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . Digging power is increased while knob switch is kept pressed.
Monitor goes out: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power max function stopped
• For details of the positions of the knob switch, See “CONTROLS

AND GAUGES” on page 2-3.
Remark
Only when the working mode is P or E mode, the power is increased while the knob switch is being pressed.
Even if the knob switch continues to be pressed, the power increase is finished after 8.5 seconds.
2-20 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Gauges and Meter

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
This meter (8) shows the engine coolant temperature.
During normal operations, the indicator should be in the green range. If
the indicator enters the red range during operations, the overheat
prevention system is actuated.
• (A) - (B): Red range
• (A) - (C): Green range
• (C) - (D): White range
The overheat prevention system is actuated as follows.

Red range (A) position: Engine coolant temperature monitor (1)
shows abnormality display
Red range (B) position: Engine speed changes to low idling, engine coolant temperature monitor (1) shows abnormality
display, alarm buzzer sounds at same time
The overheat prevention system continues to work until the indicator enters the green range.
When the engine is started, if the indicator is in the (C) - (D) range, engine coolant temperature monitor (1) shows the
low-temperature display.
If this happens, carry out the warming-up operation. For details, See “AFTER STARTING ENGINE” on page 2-138.
Fuel Gauge
This meter (9) shows the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
During normal operations, the indicator should be in the green range.
If the indicator starts to enter red range (A) during operation, there is less
than 60 liters (15.85 US gal) of fuel remaining, so carry out inspection
and add fuel.
• (A) - (B): Indicates red range
• (A) - (C): Indicates green range
Remark
When the indicator reaches red range (B), there is less than
41 liters (10.83 US gal) of fuel remaining.
When the indicator is in red range (A) - (B), fuel level monitor (1) lights up red.
The correct fuel level may not be displayed for a short time when the starting switch is turned ON, but this is not
an abnormality.
PC200/220LC-8 2-21
OPERATION
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge
This meter (10) shows the hydraulic oil temperature.
During normal operations, the indicator should be in the green range.
If the indicator enters the red range (A) during operations, the hydraulic
oil temperature is 102°C (215.6°F) or more. Run the engine at low idling
or stop it and wait for the hydraulic oil temperature to go down.
• (A) - (B): Red range

• (A) - (D): Green range
• (D) - (C): White range
Remark
When the indicator reaches red range (A), the hydraulic oil temperature is as follows.
Red range (A) position: 102°C (215.6°F) or more
Red range (B) position: 105°C (221°F) or more
When the indicator is in red range (A) - (B), hydraulic oil temperature monitor (1) shows the abnormality display.
When the engine is started, if the indicator is at position (C) and the hydraulic oil temperature is 20°C (68°F), hydraulic oil
temperature monitor (1) shows the low-temperature display. If this happens, carry out the warming-up operation for the
hydraulic equipment. For details, See “Engine Warm Up” on page 2-139.

2-22 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Service Meter, Clock
This meter (11) shows the total hours of operation of the machine or the
present time.
When the starting switch is at the ON position, the service meter
advances even if the machine is not moving. The service meter advances
one for every hour that the machine is working, regardless of the engine
speed.
• When the standard screen is being displayed, if function switch F4 is

pressed, it is possible to switch between the clock display and the
service meter display.
• Clock display (12-hour or 24-hour displays are available)
To set or correct the time, press function switch F6 (user mode
switch).
PC200/220LC-8 2-23
OPERATION
Air Conditioner Monitor
This monitor (12) displays the working status of the air conditioner.
Monitor lit: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner ON

Monitor off: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner OFF
Message Monitor (only machines equipped with KOMTRAX)

This monitor (13) lights up when there is a message from Komatsu.
Press function switch F6 on the user menu to display the message.
Lit green: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . There is unread message

Lit blue: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .There is no unread message
OFF: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .There are no messages
ECO Gauge
This gauge (14) shows the working load status.
When the gauge is in green range (A), the work load is light to medium.
When the gauge is in orange range (B), the load is heavy.
• When the gauge enters the orange range, there is no abnormality on
the machine, but to protect the environment, reduce the engine
output to a point where there is no adverse effect on the operation.
Generally, carry out energy-saving operations in the green range.
Reducing the frequency of travel also helps to save energy. Consider
the best way of saving energy.
Idle Stop Guidance

If the levers are not operated for more than five minutes, and the engine is
idling, the idling stop message is displayed on the monitor. When
waiting for work or stopping work for a short periods, stop the engine to
reduce unnecessary fuel consumption.
• The idling stop message screen returns to the standard screen any
lever is operated again or when function switch F5 (Back) is pressed.
2-24 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Monitor Switches Portion
1. Working mode selector switch 5. Window washer switch

2. Auto-deceleration switch 6. Buzzer cancel switch
3. Travel speed selector switch 7. Function switches
4. Wiper switch 8. Air conditioner switch
Working Mode Selector Switch

Use this switch (1) to set the movement or power of the work equipment.
The operation becomes easier if the mode is selected to match the content
of the operation.
P mode: For heavy-load operations
E mode: For operation with emphasis on fuel consumption
L mode: For fine control operations (arm crane mode)
B mode: For breaker operations
ATT mode: For double-acting circuit attachment, such as crusher
(attachment-ready machines)
• When the monitor first appears, it is automatically set to the mode in

use when it was started the previous time.
• Press switch (1) to display the working mode selection screen. For
each set mode, the pilot monitor at the top right of the monitor
display shows P, E, L, B, ATT.
PC200/220LC-8 2-25
OPERATION
• For machines with an attachment, the attachment mode is added to the display.
For details of the method of handling machines able to install an attachment, see the “ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS”
Section 5.
• When the monitor starts up, if the working mode setting is B mode,
the confirmation message on the right is displayed and the buzzer
sounds.
• When starting up and staying in B mode, always press function
switch F6 (Yes).
• If you press F5 (No), the system starts up in E mode.
• If you want to have automatic setting of the P, E, L, B or ATT mode when starting (optional default setting), please ask
your Komatsu distributor to change the setting.
2-26 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Procedure for operation
1. If working mode selector switch (1) is pressed, the Working Mode
screen is displayed on the monitor.
2. Press function switches F3 or F4 at the bottom of the screen or

working mode selector switch (1) to change the mode selection one
at a time.
• If no switch is touched for more than five seconds, the selected

working mode is automatically set as the working mode and the
screen changes to Item 3 and Item 4.
Remark
To return to the standard screen without changing the working
mode, press function switch F5.
3. After selecting the desired mode, press function switch F6 and the
mode is displayed in the center of the monitor display.
(Example: If power mode is selected: P)
4. After two seconds, the pilot monitor display at the top right of the
screen is highlighted in orange.
PC200/220LC-8 2-27
OPERATION
• After two seconds, the screen returns to the standard screen.
The monitor display highlighted in orange in Item 4 returns to white.
Remark
When setting the working mode to B mode, to ensure safety,
the buzzer sounds and at the same time, the message in the
illustration on the right is displayed. When setting to the
breaker mode, always press function switch F6.
• If function switch F5 is pressed, the breaker mode is not set, and the
screen returns to working mode selection screen (1).
Remark
When using the breaker, set to B mode. If B mode is not used, there is danger that the breaker may fail.
2-28 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Auto-deceleration Switch
If the control levers are at neutral, this switch (2) automatically lowers
the engine speed and turns on the function to reduce fuel consumption.
Pilot monitor on monitor display ON: . . . . . Auto-acceleration ON
Pilot monitor on the monitor display OFF: Auto-acceleration OFF
Each time the switch is pressed, the auto-deceleration is switched

between actuated and canceled.
• Auto-deceleration function
When the auto-deceleration function is ON, if the work equipment and travel levers are returned to the N position, the
engine speed will drop after 4 seconds from the operating speed to idling speed.
This makes it possible to reduce fuel consumption.
If any lever is operated when the machine is in this condition, engine speed will return to the previous operating speed to
make it possible to perform operations.
1. When auto-deceleration switch (2) is pressed and the
auto-deceleration function is turned ON, the mode is displayed in the
center of the monitor display, and after two seconds, the screen
returns to the standard screen.
2. The pilot monitor of the monitor display for the standard screen is lit.
On the standard screen, the pilot monitor lights up.
(When the auto-deceleration is OFF, it does not light up.)
PC200/220LC-8 2-29
OPERATION
Travel Speed Selector Switch
• When loading or unloading from a trailer, always travel at low speed (with travel speed selector switch (3) at the
Lo position). Never operate travel speed selector switch (3) while loading or unloading.
• If the travel speed is switched between Hi and Lo when the machine is traveling, the machine may deviate to one
side, even when traveling in a straight line.
Stop the machine before switching the travel speed.
Switch (3) is used to set the travel speed to three stages.

Lo lights up: Low-speed travel
Mi lights up: Medium-speed travel
Hi lights up: Hi-speed travel
When the engine is started, the speed is automatically set to Lo.
Each time that the switch is pressed, the display changes Lo ➞ Mi ➞ Hi
➞ Lo in turn.
Even if the travel speed is set to high-speed (Hi) or a mid-range speed

(Mi), when traveling on soft ground or uphill, and travel power is needed,
the system automatically shifts down to low speed travel (Lo). There is
no need to operate the switch. In this case, the pilot monitor on the
monitor display stays lit at Hi (high-speed) or Mi (mid-range speed).
Remark
Each time travel speed selector switch (3) is switched, the
mode is displayed on the monitor display, and after two
seconds, the screen returns to the normal operation screen.
2-30 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Wiper Switch
Switch (4) operates the wiper for the front glass.
Each time the switch is pressed, it changes ON ➞ INT ➞ stop (OFF).
Monitor display pilot monitor INT lit: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wiper operates intermittently
Monitor display pilot monitor ON lit: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper operates continuously
Monitor display pilot monitor OFF: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper stops
Remark
Each time wiper switch (4) is pressed, the mode is displayed in
the center of the monitor display, and after two seconds, the
screen returns to the normal operation screen.
PC200/220LC-8 2-31
OPERATION
Window Washer Switch
Switch (5) is kept continuously pressed, window washer fluid is sprayed
onto the front glass. When the switch is released, spray stops.
• If switch (5) is kept pressed when the wiper is stopped, the window
washer fluid will spray, and at the same time, the wiper will be
actuated continuously. When switch (5) is released, the wiper will
continue to operate for two cycles, then stop.
• If the wiper is moving intermittently and switch (5) is kept pressed
continuously, window washer fluid will spray, and at the same time,
the wiper will be actuated continuously. When switch (5) is released,
the wiper will continue to operate for two cycles, then return to
intermittent operation.
Buzzer Cancel Switch

When this switch (6) is pressed, the warning buzzer for the abnormal
warning item stops.
2-32 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Function Switches
Function switches (7) consist of six switches (F1 to F6). The function of
each switch differs according to the content of each screen.
When the monitor display shows the standard screen, the functions are
displayed as follows.
F3: Camera screen selector switch (if equipped)
F4: Service meter/time display selector switch
F5: Maintenance mode switch
F6: User mode switch
F1 and F2 are auxiliary switches for expanded functions.
For explanation of each switch, See “Handling Function Switches” on
page 2-34.
Air Conditioner Switch

The air conditioner switches (8) consist of 9 switches.
For explanation of each switch, See “AIR CONDITIONER CON-

TROLS” on page 2-93.
PC200/220LC-8 2-33
OPERATION
Handling Function Switches

• The function switches (A) at the bottom of the monitor display
consist of six switches (F1 - F6). The function of each switch differs
according to the content of each screen.
• The function of switches (A) on each screen can be confirmed by
guidance icons (B) displayed on top of each switch.
• If there is no display in guidance icon (B), even if switch (A) is
pressed, it will not function.
• Even if guidance icon (B) is pressed, it will not function. Press
switch (A) immediately below the guidance icon display to operate
the function.
The operation of the function switches if the initial screen is the standard screen is as follows.
Camera Screen Selector Mode Switch
• On machines with a camera (if equipped), press switch F3 to switch
to the camera screen display.
• On machines not equipped with a camera, the guidance icon on top
of switch F3 is not displayed.
Even if switch F3 is pressed, the screen will not switch to the camera
screen display.
• A maximum of three cameras can be installed.
• If you want to install a camera, please consult your Komatsu
distributor.
2-34 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Operations on Camera 1 Image Display Screen
• On the standard screen, if switch F3 is pressed, the image display
screen is displayed.
• Press switch F1 to display all the screens for images from the No. 1
camera.
camera.
camera.
• Press switch F4 to display the images from the No. 1 camera and No.
2 camera at the same time.
Remark
If the machine is not equipped with a No. 2 camera or No. 3
camera, guidance icons (a), (b) and (c) are not displayed.
• Press switch F5 to return to the standard screen.
PC200/220LC-8 2-35
OPERATION
Operations on Camera 2 Image Display Screen
• On the No. 1 camera image display screen, if switch F4 is pressed,
No. 1 camera image (c) and No. 2 camera image (d) are displayed.
• Even if three cameras are installed, only the images from the No. 1
camera and No. 2 camera can be displayed at the same time.
• If two images are displayed at the same time, it will take longer for
them be displayed than when only one image is displayed.
• Press switch F4 to return to the single image display.
• Press switch F5 to return to the standard screen.
2-36 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Other Mode Operations When Displaying Camera Image
• Even during the camera display, it is possible to operate other modes.
• The air conditioner can be operated.
If the air conditioner switch is operated, the screen switches to the
control screen. If the screen switches to the air conditioner control
screen, press switch F6 to return to the camera image screen. In
addition, if no operation is carried out for five seconds after the
screen switches to the air conditioner control screen, the screen
automatically returns to the camera image screen.
For details of the operation of the air conditioner, See “AIR CONDI-
TIONER CONTROLS” on page 2-93.
• It is possible to change the working mode by pressing the working

mode selector switch.
For details of the working mode selector switch, See “Working
Mode Selector Switch” on page 2-25.
If the working mode is changed, the screen returns to the standard

screen.
Press switch F3 again to return to the camera image display.
When the working mode is changed, the screen returns automatically
to the camera image screen. When this happens, the pilot monitor
display at the top right of the monitor screen is highlighted in yellow
for two seconds, then returns to blue.
PC200/220LC-8 2-37
OPERATION
• Press the travel speed selector switch to change the travel speed
mode.
For details of the travel speed selector switch, See “Travel Speed
Selector Switch” on page 2-30.
When the travel speed is changed, the pilot monitor display at the top
right of the monitor screen is highlighted in yellow for two seconds,
then returns to blue.
When the travel speed mode is changed, the screen returns to the standard
screen. To display the camera image, press switch F3 again.
• Press the auto-deceleration switch to turn the auto-deceleration

function ON/OFF.
Even if the auto-deceleration switch is pressed, the camera image
display screen does not switch to another screen or return to the
standard screen display.
• It is possible to press the buzzer cancel switch to stop the alarm

buzzer for the warning item where there is an abnormality.
Even if the buzzer cancel switch is pressed, the camera image
display screen does not switch to another screen or return to the
standard screen display.
2-38 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
• Press the wiper switch and washer switch to operate the wipers and
washer.
Even if the wiper switch or washer switch is pressed, the camera
image display screen does not switch to another screen or return to
the standard screen display.
PC200/220LC-8 2-39
OPERATION
Action When Warning is Generated When Displaying Camera Image
• If an error or alarm occurs while the camera image is being
displayed, the error monitor or alarm monitor is displayed at the top
left of the screen and flashes.
• If the error monitor or alarm monitor is displayed, press switch F6,

return to the standard screen, and check the content of the error or
alarm display.
When the error monitor is flashing, if no lever is operated for more
than ten seconds, the screen automatically returns to the standard
screen.
When the screen returns to the standard screen, the error monitor at
the top left of the screen goes out and the error or alarm is displayed
in the center of the screen.
• If an error monitor is displayed, move the machine, set it in a safe
posture, then have inspection carried out immediately.
For details of the content of the warning displays, See “Travel Speed
Selector Switch” on page 2-30, “Basic Check Monitors” on page 2-16,
“Caution Monitors” on page 2-13, “Emergency Monitors” on page 2-11
and “TROUBLES AND ACTIONS” on page 2-196.
2-40 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Service Meter/Clock Display Selector Switch

On the standard screen, it is possible to press switch F4 to switch the
service meter and clock display at the top of the monitor display.
• When the time is being displayed, press switch F4 to switch to the

service meter display.
When the service meter is being displayed, press switch F4 to switch
to the time display.
PC200/220LC-8 2-41
OPERATION
Maintenance Selector Switch

When switch F5 is pressed on the standard screen, the monitor display
screen switches to the maintenance mode screen.
The items on the maintenance display are as follows.
a b c
Engine oil change 500 500
Engine oil filter change 500 500
Fuel main filter change 1000 1000
Fuel pre-filter change 500 500
Hydraulic oil filter change 1000 1000
Hydraulic tank breather change 500 500
Corrosion resistor change 1000 1000
(Option for overseas models)
Damper case service 1000 1000
Final drive oil change 2000 2000
Swing machinery oil change 1000 1000
Hydraulic oil change 5000 5000
a: Maintenance items
b: Default maintenance interval settings (h)
c: Time remaining until maintenance (h)
2-42 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Operations on Maintenance List Screen
On the maintenance list screen, it is possible to carry out the following
operations with switches F1 to F6.
F1: Displays next page. When on the last page, it displays the first page.
F2: Displays previous page. When on the first page, it displays the last
page.
F3: Moves to next item (1 line down). When on the last line, it moves to
the first line on the next page.
F4: Moves to previous item (1 line up). When on the first line, it moves
to the last line on the previous page.
F5: Returns to standard screen.
F6: Resets remaining time for selected item (item highlighted in yellow)
and returns to default setting screen.
Remark
When resetting the remaining time, keep switch F6 pressed for
at least 1.5 seconds. If switch F6 is not kept pressed for at
least 1.5 seconds, the switch operating sound can be heard,
but the screen does not switch to the screen for resetting the
remaining time.
• If no switch is operated for 30 seconds on the maintenance list

screen, the screen automatically returns to the standard screen.
• On the maintenance list screen, if the time remaining until

maintenance for any item is less than 30 hours, the remaining time
display is highlighted in yellow. If the time remaining until
maintenance becomes 0 hours, the remaining time display is
highlighted in red.
• If you want to change the setting for the maintenance interval, please
consult your Komatsu distributor.
PC200/220LC-8 2-43
OPERATION
Operations on Maintenance Interval Reset Screen
On the maintenance list screen, if switch F6 is kept pressed for at least
1.5 seconds, the screen changes to the maintenance time reset screen.
Reset the remaining time on this screen.
1. Press switch F6 when the reset screen is in the condition shown in
the diagram on the right. The screen switches to the reconfirmation
screen.
Remark
• It is desired to cancel the reset, press switch F5. The
screen returns to the maintenance list screen.
• On the reset screen, if no switch is operated for more than
30 seconds, the screen automatically switches to the maintenance list screen.
2. The reconfirmation screen shown on the right is displayed.
3. If switch F6 is pressed again, the remaining time is reset and the

screen switches to the maintenance list screen.
Remark
• It is desired to cancel the reset, press switch F5. The
screen returns to the maintenance list screen.
• On the reconfirmation screen, if no switch is operated for
more than 30 seconds, the screen automatically switches
to the maintenance list screen.
2-44 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
User Mode Selector Switch

When the switch F6 is pressed, the monitor display screen switches to the
setting mode screen for the machine.
• On the User Menu screen, it is possible to carry out the following

operations with switches F3 to F6.
F3: Moves to next item (1 line down). When on the last line, it moves to
the first line on the next page.
F4: Moves to previous item (1 line up). When on the first line, it moves
to the last line on the previous page.
PC200/220LC-8 2-45
OPERATION
F5: Returns to standard screen.
F6: Switches to setting screen for selected item.
• If no switch is operated for 30 seconds on the user menu screen, the

screen automatically returns to the previous screen.
• The following items can be set:
a: Breaker/attachment setting
(machines ready for installation of attachment)
b: Message display
(machines equipped with KOMTRAX)
c: Screen adjustment
d: Clock adjustment
e: Language selection
f: Economy mode adjustment
The operation for setting a to f is as follows.
2-46 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Breaker/Attachment Setting
On machines equipped with an attachment, it is possible on the breaker/
attachment settings menu to adjust the oil flow in B mode and ATT mode
to match the attachment installed.
For machines that have no attachment, the breaker/attachment
setting mode is not displayed.
Changing Breaker Mode Setting

1. On the standard screen, press switch F6.
2. Select Breaker/Attachment Settings on the user menu, then press

switch F6.
PC200/220LC-8 2-47
OPERATION
3. On the working mode selection screen shown on the right, select B
Breaker and press switch F6.
• On the working mode selection screen shown on the right, it is

possible to carry out the following operations with switches F3
to F6.
F3: Moves to next item (1 line down).

F4: Moves to previous item (1 line up).
F5: Returns to user menu screen.
4. The screen switches to the Breaker Select Menu.
• Breaker setting selection menu

In Breaker Select (a), the oil flow to be set in B mode can be set
to one of two set values.
• Breaker flow setting menu
In the breaker flow setting menu (b), the oil flow to be set in B
mode can be changed.
2-48 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
• On the Breaker Select Menu screen, it is possible to carry out
the following operations with switches F3 - F6.

Changing breaker setting selection

1. Select breaker setting selection (a) on the breaker setting menu
screen, then press switch F6.
PC200/220LC-8 2-49
OPERATION
2. On the Breaker Select screen, select one of the two set values for the
oil flow, then press switch F6.
• The default values for the flow setting are both set to 180 liter/
min, as shown in the illustration on the right.
To select the oil flow setting, follow the procedure given in
“Changing breaker flow setting” on page 2-51.
• The present oil flow set for B mode is marked with a B in front
of the item name as shown in the illustration on the right.
• On the Breaker Select Menu and breaker setting selection menu,

it is possible to carry out the following operations with switches
F3 - F6.

2-50 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Changing breaker flow setting
1. Select breaker flow setting (b) on the Breaker Select Menu screen,
then press switch F6.
2. On the Breaker Oil Flow Setting screen, select one of the two set
values for the oil flow, then press switch F6.
• The default values for the oil flow setting are both set to 180 l/
min, as shown in the illustration on the right.
The present oil flow set for B mode is marked with B in front of
the item name as shown in the illustration on the right.
• On the Breaker Select Menu and Breaker Oil Flow Setting

screen, it is possible to carry out the following operations with
switches F3 - F6.

PC200/220LC-8 2-51
OPERATION
3. On the Breaker Oil Flow Setting screen, change the set oil flow.
• After using switches F3 or F4 to change to a suitable oil flow,

press switch F6 to accept the change in the oil flow and return to
the previous screen.
• When switch F5 is pressed, no change is made in the oil flow
and the screen returns to the previous screen.
(X): Present oil flow setting

(Y): Min. adjusted oil flow
(Z): Max. adjusted oil flow
2-52 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Changing Attachment Mode Setting
2. Select Breaker/Attachment Settings on the user menu, then press

switch F6.
PC200/220LC-8 2-53
OPERATION
3. On the working mode selection screen shown on the right, select
ATT 2-Way Attachment, then press switch F6.
• On the working mode selection screen shown on the right, it is

possible to carry out the following operations with switches F3
to F6.

4. The screen switches to the 2-Way Attachment Select menu.
• 2-Way Attachment Select

In 2-Way Attachment Select (a), the oil flow to be set in ATT
mode can be set to one of two set values.
• 2-Way Attachment Oil Flow Setting menu
In 2-Way Attachment Oil Flow Setting (b), it is possible to
change the oil flow set for the ATT mode.
2-54 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
• On the 2-Way Attachment Select Menu screen, it is possible to
carry out the following operations with switches F3 - F6.

Changing attachment setting selection

1. Select attachment setting selection (a) on the attachment setting
menu screen, then press switch F6.
PC200/220LC-8 2-55
OPERATION
2. On the 2-Way Attachment Select Menu, select one of the two set
values for the oil flow, then press switch F6.
• The default values for the oil flow setting are both set to
430 l/min., as shown in the illustration on the right.
• To change the oil flow setting, follow the procedure given in
“Changing attachment flow setting” on page 2-57.
• The present oil flow set for ATT mode is marked with ATT in
front of the item name as shown in the illustration on the right.
• If No 2-Way Attachment is selected, it becomes impossible to

select the attachment mode on the working mode selection
screen.
On the working mode selection screen, it is not possible to select No

2-Way Attachment.
• On the 2-Way Attachment Select Menu screen and 2-way attachment

select menu, it is possible to carry out the following operations with
switches F3 - F6.

F5: Returns to user menu.
2-56 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Changing attachment flow setting

1. Select 2-Way Attachment Oil Flow Setting (b) on the 2-Way
Attachment Select menu screen, then press switch F6.
2. On the 2-Way Attachment Select Oil Flow Setting screen, select one
of the two set values for the oil flow, then press switch F6.
• The default values for the oil flow setting are both set to 430
l/min., as shown in the illustration on the right.
The present oil flow set for ATT mode is marked with ATT in
front of the item.
• “No 2-Way Attachment” cannot be selected
PC200/220LC-8 2-57
OPERATION
• On the 2-Way Attachment Select Menu screen and 2-Way
Attachment Select Menu screen, it is possible to carry out the
following operations with switches F3 - F6.

3. On the 2-Way Attachment Oil Flow Setting menu, it is possible to

change the oil flow setting.
• After using switches F3 or F4 to change to a suitable oil flow,

press switch F6 to accept the change in the oil flow and return to
the previous screen.
• When switch F5 is pressed, no change is made in the oil flow
and the screen returns to the previous screen.
(X): Present oil flow setting
(Y): Min. adjusted oil flow
(Z): Max. adjusted oil flow
2-58 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Message Display
On machines equipped with KOMTRAX, it is possible to see the
messages from your Komatsu distributor on this message display menu.
When there are any messages, the pilot monitor at the top left of the
monitor standard screen lights up.
• It is possible to judge the following from the lit condition of the

message display pilot monitor.
Lighted green: There is unread message

Lighted blue: There is no unread message
OFF: There are no messages
Remark
When the pilot monitor is lit blue, open the message. The
display shows that the reply to the message has not been sent
to your Komatsu distributor.
PC200/220LC-8 2-59
OPERATION
2. Select “User Message” on the User Menu, then press switch F6 to
see the messages that have been received.
• If you press switch F5, the screen returns to the user menu
screen.
2-60 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
3. Any messages with a reply to be sent are displayed on the “10-key
input value: [_]” line on message display screen (a).
Input the number (b) for the selected item on the 10-key input value
line (a).
• Use the switches on the monitor panel when inputting the
number. The numeric value for each switch is given at the
bottom right corner of the switch.
4. After inputting selected item number (b), press switch F6.
5. When “Send input?” is displayed on the message display screen line

(a), press F6 again. The input value is sent.
• The message is deleted when the time limit is reached or when a

new message is received.
• If no message is received, “No message” is displayed on portion
(c)
PC200/220LC-8 2-61
OPERATION
Adjusting Screen
Use this screen adjustment menu to adjust the brightness, contrast, and
back light of the screen.
2. Select screen adjustment on the user menu, then press switch F6. The
screen switches to the selection menu screen for screen adjustment.
• On machines equipped with cameras, it is possible to adjust the

brightness, contrast, and back light of the cameras screen on this
menu.
2-62 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
3. Select item to be adjusted (a) or (b) from the selection menu screen
for screen adjustment, then press switch F6. The screen switches to
the setting screen for the selected item.
(a): Standard screen adjustment

(b): Camera screen adjustment (only machines equipped with
camera)
• On the mode selection screen shown on the right, it is possible
to carry out the following operations with switches F3 to F6.

Remark
If the machine is not equipped with a camera, the selection
menu for screen adjustment is not displayed.
If screen adjustment is selected from the user menu, the
adjustment screen in Step 4 is displayed.
4. Use switches F2 to F6 to adjust the brightness, contrast, and back

light of the selected screen.
5. Adjustment screen for standard screen
• If the light switch is at night mode ON, and the standard screen
is adjusted, it is possible to adjust the brightness of the monitor
screen (night mode).
• If the light switch is at day mode ON or OFF, and the standard
screen is adjusted, it is possible to adjust the brightness of the
monitor screen (day mode).
PC200/220LC-8 2-63
OPERATION
6. Adjusting camera screen
• The background when adjusting the camera image is the image

for the No. 1 camera.
• When displaying the camera screen, the screen may become
dark if the image is on snow. In such cases, we recommend
adjustment of the screen.
On the screen for Items 1 and 2, it is possible to carry out the

following operations with switches F2 to F6.
F2: Resets all adjusted values to default value

F3: Indicator of selected item moves 1 segment to left.
F4: Indicator of selected item moves 1 segment to right.
F6: Accepts change and switches to next item setting.
2-64 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Clock Adjustment
On this clock adjustment menu, it is possible to change the setting of the
clock displayed on the pilot monitor of the standard display.
PC200/220LC-8 2-65
OPERATION
2. Select “Clock Adjustment” on the user menu, then press switch F6.
The screen switches to the time adjustment selection menu screen.
• The following three items can be changed.

(a) Clock setting
(b) 12/24 hour display mode
(c) Daylight saving time
2-66 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
3. On the clock adjustment selection screen, it is possible to carry out
the following operations with switches F3 to F6.
• Time
Adjust the hour setting.
A. If “Time” (a) is not highlighted in yellow, press switch F6 to

highlight “Time” (a) in yellow. When this is done, hour display
(b) changes to orange.
Adjust hour display (b) with the switches as follows. If it is not
necessary to change the hour setting, press switch F6.
F3: Time advances one hour.

F4: Time goes back one hour.
F5: Cancels change and returns to user menu.
F6: Accepts change and goes to setting for minutes.
PC200/220LC-8 2-67
OPERATION
B. When minute display (c) is highlighted in orange, operate the
switches as follows to adjust minute display (c).
If it is not necessary to change the minute setting, press switch
F6. If the time has been changed, always press switch F6.
F3: Time advances one minute.

F4: Time goes back one minute.
F6: Accepts change and goes to setting for 12/24 hour display
mode.
2-68 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
• 12h/24h Mode
Choose either a 12-hour display (am/pm) or a 24-hour display.
(b): 24-hour display

(c): 12-hour display (am/pm)
C. If “12h/24h Mode” (a) is not highlighted in yellow, press switch

F6 to highlight “12h/24h Mode” (a) in yellow.
D. Change the “12h/24h mode” with the switches as follows.
The selected display mode (b) or (c) is highlighted in green.
F3: Moves 1 item to left.

F4: Moves 1 item to right.
F6: Accepts change and goes to setting for “Daylight Saving
Time”.
If the setting has been changed, always press switch F6.
PC200/220LC-8 2-69
OPERATION
• Daylight Saving Time (Summer time)
A. If daylight saving time is turned ON (a), the clock display
becomes one hour earlier. If daylight saving time is turned OFF
(b), the clock display returns to the set time.
The selected display mode is highlighted in green.

B. Change the daylight saving time with the switches as follows.
F3: Moves 1 item to left.

F4: Moves 1 item to right.
F6: Accepts change and goes to setting for “Time”.
If the setting has been changed, always press switch F6.

Remark
Daylight saving time or summer time means moving the clock
forward one hour to take advantage of the fact that the sun
rises early in summer. This system is used in many countries
during the summer.
2-70 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Language Selection
On this language selection menu, it is possible to select the language used on the monitor display.
• The languages that can be selected are as follows.
Japanese, English, Chinese, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, German, Russian, Turkish
2. Select “Language” on the user menu, then press switch F6.

The screen switches to the language selection menu screen.
PC200/220LC-8 2-71
OPERATION
3. Select the language to use for the display, then press switch F6. The
screen display changes to the selected language.
• On the language selection screen, it is possible to carry out the

following operations with switches F3 to F6.
F3: Moves to item below.

F4: Moves to item above.
F5: Cancels change and returns to user menu screen.
F6: Accepts change and returns to user menu screen.
Adjusting Economy Mode

With this economy mode, the engine output can be adjusted to improve
the fuel consumption in E mode.
2-72 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
2. Select “Economy Mode Adjustment” on the user menu, then press
switch F6.
The screen switches to the economy mode adjustment selection
menu screen.
PC200/220LC-8 2-73
OPERATION
3. Select the desired E mode from the economy mode adjustment
selection menu:
The levels that can be set are as follows.
E0: Default
E1: Economy Adjustment 1
• The higher the selection is made from E0 to E3, the better the
fuel consumption becomes, but the production is reduced
accordingly.
• When the machine is shipped, it is set to E0.
• On the Economy Mode Adjustment menu screen, it is possible
to carry out the following operations with switches F3 - F6.
F3: Moves to item below.

F4: Moves to item above.
F5: Cancels change and returns to user menu screen.
F6: Accepts change and returns to user menu screen.
2-74 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
SWITCHES
1. Starting switch 7. One-touch power max. switch

2. Fuel control dial 8. Room lamp switch
3. Cigarette lighter 9. Emergency pump drive switch
4. Swing lock switch 10. Swing brake cancel switch
5. Lamp switch 11. Revolving warning lamp switch
6. Horn switch 12. Large capacity airflow air conditioner blower switch (if
equipped)
Starting Switch
Starting switch (1) is used to start or stop the engine.
(A): OFF position

The key can be inserted or withdrawn. Switches for the electrical
system (except room lamp), are all turned off and the engine is
stopped.
(B): ON position
Electric current flows through the charging and lamp circuits. Keep
starting switch key in the ON position while the engine is running.
(C): START position

This is the engine-start position. Keep the key at this position during cranking. Immediately after starting the engine,
release the key. It will automatically return to the ON position (B).
PC200/220LC-8 2-75
OPERATION
Fuel Control Dial
This dial (2) adjusts the engine speed and output.
(a) Low idle (MIN): Turned fully to the left
(b) Full speed (MAX): Turned fully to the right
Cigarette Lighter
This switch (3) is used when lighting cigarettes.
When the cigarette lighter is pushed in, it will return to its original
position after several seconds, so pull it out to use it.
If the cigarette lighter is removed, the socket can be used as an 85W (24V
x 3.5A) power source.
Remark
This cigarette lighter is for 24V. Do not use it as the power
source for 12V equipment.
Swing Lock Switch
• When not using the swing operation, e.g. when

traveling, put the swing lock switch to the ON position.
• On slopes, even when the swing lock switch is at the ON

position, the weight of the work equipment may cause the
upper structure to swing if the swing control lever is operated
in the downhill direction.
This switch (4) is used to lock the upper structure so that it cannot swing.
(a) ON position:
The swing lock is always applied, and the upper structure will not swing even if the swing is operated. In this condition,
the swing lock lamp lights up.
(b) OFF position:

The swing lock is applied only when the swing control lever is in the neutral position, and released when operating the
swing control lever. The swing lock is actuated in five seconds after putting the swing control lever in the neutral position.
2-76 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Lamp Switch
Switch (5) is used to turn on the front lamps, working lamps, additional
lamps at top front of the cab, and monitor lighting.
(a) Night position: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . Lamps light up and monitor illumination is set to night mode
(b) Day position: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . Lamps light up and monitor illumination is set to day mode
(c) OFF position: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps go out.
(The monitor illumination is set to day mode.)
Horn Switch
Use this switch (6) to sound the horn.
Press the switch on the right work control lever to sound the horn.
One Touch Power Max. Switch

Use this knob switch (7) on the left control lever to actuate the power
max. system
Press it once (single click) and keep it pressed. In P and E modes, the
power max function can be actuated for a maximum of only 8.5 seconds.
Room Lamp Switch

Remark
It is possible to turn on the interior cab room lamp even when
starting switch is in the OFF position, do not forget to turn it off.
Use this switch (8) to light up the room lamp.
(a) ON position: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp lights up
(b) OFF position: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lamp goes out
The room lamp lights up even when the starting switch is at the OFF
position
PC200/220LC-8 2-77
OPERATION
Emergency Pump Drive Switch
Remark
This switch is provided to enable you to carry out operation
temporarily, when any problem occurs on the pump control
system. Do not use it except in emergency. Furthermore,
remove the cause of the problem immediately.
Remark
If this switch is depressed and moved to the EMERGENCY
position by mistake, thereby engaging the machine in the
work, while the machine is in normal condition, an "E02" mark
is shown in the display.
If "E02" is displayed during the work, check that the switch is
in the NORMAL position.
This switch (9) makes it possible to carry out operations for a short time when there is a failure in the pump control system
(when the display is “E02”).
(a) When abnormal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch pushed up
(b) When normal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch pushed down
If the display is “E02”, push this switch up to make it possible to carry out operations.
Swing Brake Cancel Switch

Remark
This switch makes it possible to perform swing operations for
a short even when there is a problem in the swing brake
electric system. DO NOT use this switch except in
emergencies. Repair the problem as soon as possible.
This switch (10) makes it possible to carry out swing operations for a
short time when there is a failure in the swing brake system (when the
display is “E03”).
(a) When abnormal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch pushed up
(b) When normal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch pushed down
• If the display is “E03”, push this switch up to make it possible to
carry out operations.
• When this switch is pushed up, the swing lock monitor flashes.
Revolving Warning Lamp Switch

(If equipped)
Use this switch (11) to light up the yellow rotating lamp on top of the cab.
(a) ON: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps light up
(b) OFF: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps go off
2-78 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Large Capacity Airflow Air Conditioner Blower Switch
(If equipped)
When this switch (12) is pressed, the additional blower motor is actuated
and the air flow from the air conditioner vents increases.
(a) ON: . . . . . . . Large-capacity air conditioner blower is actuated
(b) OFF . . . . . . Large-capacity air conditioner blower is stopped
PC200/220LC-8 2-79
OPERATION
CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS
1. Lock lever 3. Left work equipment control lever

(with auto-deceleration system)
2. Travel levers 4. Right work equipment control lever
(with pedal and auto-deceleration system) (with auto-deceleration system)
Lock Lever
• When standing up from the operator's seat, push lock lever (1)
down securely to set it to LOCK position (L). If lock lever (1) is
not in LOCK position (L) and the control levers are touched by
mistake, it may lead to serious personal injury.
• Check lock lever (1) is placed securely at LOCK position (L).
• Be careful not to touch the work equipment control levers

when pulling lock lever (1) up or pushing it down.
This lever (1) is a device to lock the work equipment, swing, travel, and
attachment (if equipped) control levers.
(L) LOCK position: Even when levers or attachment control pedal (if equipped) are operated, machine does not move
(F) FREE position: Machine moves according to operation of levers or attachment control panel (if equipped)
Remark
This lock lever is of hydraulic lock type. Accordingly, when it is in the lock position (L), the control levers or con-
trol pedals move but the machine does not move.
2-80 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Travel Levers
• Do not rest your foot on the pedal during operations. If the pedal is depressed by mistake, the machine may
suddenly move and cause a serious accident. Be extremely careful when operating the pedal for travel or steering
operations. When you are not using the pedal, do not rest your foot on it.
• If the track frame is facing the rear, the direction of travel operations will be reversed when the travel lever is
operated. (The machine will travel forward when operated in reverse, and in reverse when operated forward; the
left and right directions will also be reversed.)
• When operating the travel levers, check if the track frame is facing the front or the rear. (If the sprocket is at the
rear, the track frame is facing the front.)
This lever (2) is used to switch the direction of travel of the machine.
“(_)” shows the operation of the pedal.
(a) FORWARD:
The lever is pushed forward
(The pedal is angled forward)
(b) REVERSE:
The lever is pulled back
(The pedal is angled back)
N (Neutral): The machine stops

Remark
If the lever is shifted to the FORWARD or REVERSE position
from the Neutral position, the alarm sounds to warn that the
machine is starting to move.
PC200/220LC-8 2-81
OPERATION
Work Equipment Control Lever
Left work equipment control lever (3) is used to operate the arm and
upper structure.
Arm operation
(a) Arm OUT
(b) Arm IN
Swing operation
(c) Swing to right
(d) Swing to left
N (Neutral) : The upper structure and arm are held in position and do not move.
This Right work equipment control lever (4) is used to operate the boom
and bucket.
Boom operation
(a) RAISE
(b) LOWER
Bucket operation
(c) DUMP
(d) CURL
N (Neutral): The boom and bucket are held in position and do not move.
2-82 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
SUN ROOF
When leaving the operator's seat, set the lock lever securely to the
LOCK position (L).
If the lock lever (1) is in the FREE position (F) and the control lever
is touched by mistake, this may lead to a serious accident.
Opening
1. Set lock lever (1) securely to LOCK position (L).
2. Push up lock (A) in the front center of the roof window and check
that the lock is released. Then hold grip (B) and push up the roof
window.
Closing
Grip handle (B), then lower the sun roof and apply lock (A). If the lock
does not click into position, open the sun roof and pull it down again.
WINDSHIELD
• When opening or closing the front window, bottom window, or

door, always set the lock lever (1) in the LOCK position (L).
• If the control levers are not locked and they are touched by
accident, it may lead to a serious accident.
• When opening or closing the window at the front of the cab,

stop the machine on horizontal ground, lower the work
equipment completely to the ground, stop the engine, then
carry out the operation.
• When opening the front window, hold the grip securely with
both hands, pull up, and do not let go until the automatic lock
catch is locked.
• When closing the front window, the window will move quicker
under its own weight. Hold the grips securely with both hands
when closing it.
It is possible to stow (pull up) the front window in the roof of the operator's compartment.
PC200/220LC-8 2-83
OPERATION
Opening
1. Stop the machine on level ground, lower the work equipment
completely to the ground, then stop the engine.
2. Set the lock lever securely in the LOCK position (L).
3. Check that the wiper blade is stowed in the right way.
4. Hold two grips (A) on the left and right top sides of the front win-
dow, and pull the two lock levers (B) to release the locks at the top of
the front window. The top of the front window will come out.
2-84 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
5. Hold lower knob (C) with your left hand from inside the operator's
cab, and with your right hand, grip top knob (D), pull it up, and push
it against lock catch (E) at the rear of the cab securely to lock the
window.
PC200/220LC-8 2-85
OPERATION
6. Check that lock lever (B) is securely in the LOCK position.
• The lock is engaged if the arrow on lock case (F) matches the
position of the arrow on lock lever (B). Check visually.
• If the arrow on lock case (F) does not match the position of the
arrow on lock lever (B), the lock is not engaged. Repeat the
operation in Step 5 to engage the lock.
Closing
When closing the window, lower it slowly and be careful not

to get your hand caught.
1. Stop the machine on level ground, lower the work equipment

completely to the ground, then stop the engine.
2. Set the lock lever securely in the LOCK position (L).
3. Grip left and right handles (A), and pull down lock lever (B) to
release the lock.
2-86 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
4. Grip handle (C) at the bottom of the front window with your left
hand and handle (D) at the top with your right hand, push to the
front, then lower slowly.
5. When the bottom of the window reaches the top of the bottom
window, push the top of the window to the front to push it against
left and right lock catches (G) and engage the lock.
6. Check that lock lever (B) is securely in the LOCK position.
• The lock is engaged if the arrow on lock case (F) matches the
position of the arrow on lock lever (B). Check visually.
• If the arrow on lock case (F) does not match the position of the
arrow on lock lever (B), the lock is not engaged. Repeat the
operation in Step 5 to engage the lock.
PC200/220LC-8 2-87
OPERATION
Removing Lower Windshield
If sand or dust is collected at the bottom of the front window, it will be
difficult to remove the window. In addition, when stowing, the sand and
dust stuck to the glass will be carried inside the cab.
To prevent this, clean area (A) before removing.
1. Open the front window, then hold grip (A), pull up, and remove the
bottom window.
2. After removing the lower windshield, store it at the right rear of the
operator's cab, and set lever (2) to lock position (B) to hold it
securely in position.
3. When removing it, set lever (2) to release position (C), hold the glass
with both hands, and pull it up.
2-88 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
When removing it, set lever (2) to release position (C), hold the glass with both hands, and pull it up.
EMERGENCY ESCAPE HAMMER
• If it is necessary to break the window glass with the hammer, be extremely careful not to injure yourself on the
flying pieces of broken glass.
• To prevent injury, remove the broken pieces of glass remaining in the frame before escaping through the window.
Be careful also not to slip on the broken pieces of glass.
If it should become impossible to open the cab door for any reason, and it
is necessary to make an emergency escape from the operator's
compartment, use hammer (A) to escape.
To escape from the operator's cab, use hammer (A) to break the glass and
escape through the window.
PC200/220LC-8 2-89
OPERATION
DOOR LOCK
• Before the releasing the door lock, always stop the machine on flat ground.
• Never release the door lock on a slope. The door may suddenly close and cause injury.
• When releasing the door lock, do not extend your body or hands outside the machine and do not put your hands
on the door frame. The door may suddenly close and cause injury.
Use the door lock to fix the door in position after opening it.
1. Push the door against catch (1) to lock it in position.
2. When closing the door, push down the lever (2) on the left of the
operator's seat to release the catch.
3. When attaching the door in position, lock it firmly to the catch.
COVER WITH LOCK

Opening the Cover (Locked Cover)
1. Insert the key into the key slot.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise and open the cover by pulling the
cover grip.
(A): Open
(B): Lock
Locking the Cover

1. Close the cover and insert the key into the key slot.
2. Turn the key clockwise and take the key out.
2-90 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
CAP WITH LOCK

Use the starting switch key to open and close the locks on the caps and
covers.
For details of the locations of the caps and covers with locks, See
“LOCKING” on page 2-177.
Insert the key as far as it will go to the shoulder (A). If the key is turned
before it is inserted all the way, it may break.
Opening and Closing Caps with Lock

Opening the Cap
1. Insert the key into the key slot.
2. Turn the key clockwise (type A) (counterclockwise for type B), align
the key groove with counter mark (3) on the cap, then open the cap.
(1): Open
(2): Lock
Locking the Cap

1. Turn the cap until tight, then insert the key into the key slot.
2. Turn the starting switch key counterclockwise (type A) (clockwise for the B type) and remove the key.
PC200/220LC-8 2-91
OPERATION
DRINK BOX
This is on the right side at the rear of the operator's seat. It keeps drinks
and other things hot or cold.
Hot or cold air blows into the box according to the setting of the air
conditioner.
MAGAZINE BOX
(The cup holder is provided separately at the front of the magazine box.)
Located on left side of the operator's seat.
Keep the Operation and Maintenance Manual in this box so that it can be
taken out and read whenever necessary.
ASHTRAY
This is on top of the console box on the left side of the operator's seat.
Always put out your cigarette before putting it in the ashtray and be sure
to close the lid.
2-92 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS
Air Conditioner Control Panel
1. OFF switch 6. FRESH/RECIRC selector switch

2. Fan switch 7. Display monitor
3. Temperature control switch 8. Air conditioner switch
4. Vent selector switch 9. Sunlight sensor
5. Auto switch
OFF Switch
Switch (1) is used to stop the fan and air conditioner.
Remark
Even if this switch (1) is pressed, the monitor screen does not
switch to the air conditioner adjustment screen.
PC200/220LC-8 2-93
OPERATION
Fan Switch
Switch (2) is used to adjust the air flow.
The air flow can be adjusted to six levels.
• Press the Δ switch to increase the air flow; press the ∇ switch to
decrease the air flow.
• During auto operation, the air flow is automatically adjusted.
Monitor display and air flow

A: Liquid crystal display
B: Air flow
a: Air flow “low“

b: Air flow “medium 1“
c: Air flow “medium 2“
d: Air flow “medium 3“
e: Air flow “medium 4“
f: Air flow “high“
Temperature Control Switch

Switch (3) is used to control temperature inside the cab. The temperature
can be set between 18°C (64.4°F) and 32°C (89.6°F).
• Press the Δ switch to raise the set temperature; press the ∇ switch to
lower the set temperature.
• The temperature is generally set at 25°C (77°F).
• The temperature can be set in stages of 0.5°C (0.9°F).
<Monitor display and the function>

Monitor display (°C) Set temperature
18.0 Max. cooling
Adjusts temperature inside cab to set
18.5 to 31.5 temperature
32.0 Max. heating
Remark
If the mode is set to auto mode and the temperature setting is set to 18.0 °C (64.4 °F) and 32.0 °C (89.6 °F),
the air flow from the fan is always set to HIGH and does not change even when the set temperature is reached.
2-94 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Vent Selector Switch
Switch (4) is used to select the vents.
• When switch (4) is pressed, the display on monitor display (7)
switches and air blows out from the vents displayed.
• During automatic operation, the vents are automatically selected.
(A): Rear vent (4 places)

(B1): Face vent (1 place)
(C): Foot vent (1 place)
(D): Front window glass vent (1 place)
(B2): Front window glass vent (1 place)
PC200/220LC-8 2-95
OPERATION
Auto Switch
With switch (5), the air flow, vents, and air source (RECIRC/FRESH) are
automatically selected according to the set temperature.
• Press switch (5), then use temperature control switch (3) to set the
temperature, and run the air conditioner under automatic control.
• When switching from automatic operation to manual operation, it is
possible to use the switches to select the vents and air source
(RECIRC/FRESH).
Remark
When Auto Mode is selected, if the set temperature is set to
18.0°C (64.4°F) and 32.0°C (89.6°F), the air flow is always set
to High, but this is not a problem.
FRESH/RECIRC Selector Switch
Switch (6) is used to switch the air source between recirculation of air
inside the cab and intake of from the outside.
• During automatic operation, the selection of inside air (RECIRC)
and outside air (FRESH) is performed automatically.
Outside air is shut off and only air inside the cab is circulated.
RECIRC Use this setting to perform rapid cooling of the cab or when outside air is dirty.
Outside air is taken into the cab.
FRESH Use this setting to take in fresh air when performing demisting.
Display Monitor
Monitor (7) displays the status of temperature setting (a), air flow (b),
and vents (c).
• When OFF switch (1) is pressed, the display of temperature setting
(a) and air flow (b) goes out, and operation stops.
2-96 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Air Conditioner Switch
Switch (8) is used to turn the air conditioner (cooling, dehumidifying,
heating) ON or OFF.
• Press air conditioner switch (8) when the fan is operating (when
display (b) is shown on the display monitor). The air conditioner is
switched ON and starts to work. Press the switch again to stop the air
conditioner.
• Air conditioner cannot be operated while the fan is off.
Sunlight Sensor
This sensor (9) automatically adjusts the flow of air from the vents to
match the strength of the sun's rays. In addition, it automatically detects
changes in the temperature inside the cab caused by changes in the
strength of the sun's rays beforehand and automatically adjusts the
temperature.
PC200/220LC-8 2-97
OPERATION
Method of Operation
The air conditioner can be operated automatically or manually. Select the
method of operation as desired.
Automatic Operation
1. Turn auto switch (5) ON.
• The monitors for the set temperature (a) and air flow (b) are also
displayed.
2. Use temperature set switch (3) to set to the desired temperature. The
air flow, combination of vents, and selection of fresh or recirculated
air is automatically selected according to the set temperature, and the
air conditioner is operated automatically to provide the set
temperature.
Remark
When vent display monitor (c) displays (d) or (e), and engine
coolant temperature is low, the air flow is automatically limited
to prevent cold air from blowing out.
2-98 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Stopping Automatic Operation

Press OFF switch (1). Operation stops.
Manual Operation
1. Press fan switch (2) and adjust the air flow. When doing this, check
that temperature setting (a) and air flow (b) are displayed on monitor
(7).
2. Turn air conditioner switch (8) ON.
PC200/220LC-8 2-99
OPERATION
3. Press temperature setting switch (3) and adjust temperature inside
the cab.
4. Press vent selector switch (4) and select the desired vents.
When this is done, the display for vent (c) of the display monitor
changes according to the selection.
5. Press RECIRC/FRESH selector switch (6) and select recirculation of

the air inside the cab (RECIRC) or intake of fresh air from outside
(FRESH).
2-100 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Stopping Manual Operation

Press OFF switch (1). Operation stops.
Operation with Cold Air to Face and Warm Air to

Feet
To operate with cold air blowing to the face and warm air blowing to the
feet, set as follows.
(7).
2. Press vent selector switch (4) and set the vent display on the display
monitor to the display shown in the diagram on the right.
PC200/220LC-8 2-101
OPERATION
3. Turn air conditioner switch (8) ON.
4. Adjust fan switch (2), temperature setting switch (3) and RECIRC/
FRESH selector switch (6) to the desired positions.
2-102 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Defroster Operation
(7).
2. Press vent selector switch (4) and set vent display on the display
monitor to (f) or (g) as shown in diagram on the right.
PC200/220LC-8 2-103
OPERATION
3. Press RECIRC/FRESH selector switch (6) and set it to take in fresh
air.
4. Press temperature setting switch (3) and set temperature on the

display (7) monitor to maximum heating.
5. Adjust vents (A), (B1), and (B2) so that the air blows onto the
window glass.
(Vents (C) and (D) are fixed and cannot be adjusted.)
When operating in the rainy season or when it is desired to remove the

mist from the window glass or to dehumidify the air, turn air conditioner
switch (8) ON.
2-104 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Use Air Conditioner with Care

Remark
When running the air conditioner, always start with the engine running at low speed. Never start the air
conditioner when the engine is running at high speed. It will cause failure of the air conditioner.
If water gets into the control panel or sunlight sensor, it may lead to unexpected failure, be careful not to let
water get on these parts. In addition, never bring any flame near these parts.
For the auto function of the air conditioner to work properly, always keep the sunlight sensor clean and do not
leave anything around the sunlight sensor that may interfere with its sensor function.
Ventilation
If you smoke when the air conditioner is on, the smoke may start to hurt your eyes, so open the window and turn the lever to
FRESH for a while to remove the smoke while continuing the cooling.
When running the air conditioner for a long time, turn the lever to the FRESH position once an hour to carry out ventilation
and cooling.
Temperature Control
When the cooler is on, set the temperature so that it feels slightly cool when entering the cab (5 or 6 °C (9 or 10.8 °F) lower
than the outside temperature). This temperature difference is considered to be the most suitable for your health, so always be
careful to adjust the temperature properly.
Air Conditioner Maintenance

• When carrying out inspection and maintenance on machines equipped with an air conditioner, carry out the inspection and
maintenance according to the chart. For details, See “Check and Maintenance Air Conditioner” on page 3-43, “Check Air
Conditioner Compressor Belt Tension, Adjust” on page 3-56, “Clean Air Conditioner Fresh/Recirc Filters” on page 3-68.
• When the air conditioner is not being used every day, to prevent loss
of the film of oil at various parts, run at the engine at low speed from
time to time and carry out cooling or dehumidifying heating for
several minutes.
• If the temperature inside the cab is low, the air conditioner may not
work. In this case, circulate fresh air to warm the inside of the cab.
When the air conditioner switch is turned ON, the air conditioner
will work.
• If any abnormality is detected in any equipment or sensor used on
the air conditioner, “A/C Controller Error” is displayed on the air
conditioner monitor screen. If “A/C Controller Error” is displayed,
please ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out inspection and
repair.
PC200/220LC-8 2-105
OPERATION
RADIO
Control Panel
1. Power switch, Volume control knob, Balance control 6. Preset station buttons (1,2,3,4,5,6)
knob
2. SEL button 7. Display
3. FM/AM selection button 8. Time reset button
4. Display selection button 9. Tuning button
5. AS/PS button
Power switch, Volume control knob, Balance control knob

Press this knob (1) to turn the power for the radio on. The frequency is displayed on display (7). Press the knob again to turn
the power off.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase the volume; press counterclockwise to reduce the volume. The range for the volume is
VOL 0 - VOL 40.
SEL button
Each time this button (2) is pressed, the mode changes as follows: VOL (volume) ➡ BAS (bass) ➡ TRE (treble) ➡ BAL
(balance). The mode is displayed on display (7). For details of each mode, See “Controls of Radio” on page 2-108.
FM/AM Selection Button (AM/FM)
Press this button (3) to select the desired band.
Each time the button is pressed, the band changes FM ➡ AM ➡ FM . . .
Display Selection Button (TIME)
On this machine, priority is given to the frequency display. When the frequency is being displayed, press button (4) and the
display will show the present time for five seconds. After five seconds pass, the display returns automatically to the frequency
display. If any button other than TIME ADJ (H, M, ADJ) is pressed within five seconds, the display returns to the frequency
display. For details of the method of adjusting the time, See “Controls of Radio” on page 2-108.
2-106 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
AS/PS button
This button (5) actuates the auto store and preset scan functions.
• Auto store
If this button is pressed for more than two seconds during radio reception, a search is made automatically of the six station
settings to find an unused preset number, and that frequency is stored in the preset memory.
• Preset scan
If this button is pressed within two seconds, it is possible to select one of the already preset stations. Wait for six sec. after
pressing the button and then press the button again to select the next preset station. If it is impossible to receive the preset
frequency, the selection advances after one second to the next preset station.
Preset Station Buttons (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

If this button (6) has been used to decide which stations to preset, it is possible to select the desired station at a touch. It is
possible to preset six stations each for both AM and FM.
For details of the method of presetting the stations, See “Controls of Radio” on page 2-108.
Remark
The preset button can be used to save the frequency manually. To save the frequency automatically, use the
Auto store button.
Display
In this display (7), receiving band, frequency, preset No. and time are shown.
Time Reset Button

Use this button (8) when adjusting the time. For details of the method of adjusting the time, See “Controls of Radio” on
page 2-108.
H: Hour
M: Minute
ADJ: Sets to 00 minutes
Tuning Button
Use this button (9) to change the frequency.
For further details, See “Controls of Radio” on page 2-108.
PC200/220LC-8 2-107
OPERATION
Controls of Radio
Preset Station Buttons
1. Press power switch (1) and display the frequency on display (7).
2. Use tuning button (9) to set to the desired frequency. There are two
methods for tuning: auto tuning and manual tuning.
3. With the display (7) showing the desired frequency, keep the desired
Preset button No pressed for at least 1.5 seconds. The reception
sound will disappear, but when the presetting operation (saving to
memory) is completed, the sound will appear again and the Preset
No and frequency will be shown on the display to show that the pre-
setting operation has been completed.
After completing the presetting, press Preset button (6) and release it within approximately 1.5 seconds. This will make it
possible to receive the channel preset to that button. One channel each for AM and FM can be preset to each Preset button
(7).
Remark
It is also possible to save to the Preset button by using the auto store button.
Manual tuning
Press tuning button (9) until the frequency is displayed on display (7).
< button: Frequency moves down
> button: Frequency moves up
When the frequency reaches the top or bottom frequency, it automatically continues as follows: Top ➡ Bottom, or Bottom ➡
Top.
Auto tuning
Press tuning button (9) for at least three seconds. When a station is picked up, the tuning automatically stops. To search for the
next station, press the tuning button again for at least three seconds.
< button: Frequency moves down
> button: Frequency moves up
If this button is pressed during auto tuning, the auto tuning will be cancelled and the setting will return to the frequency in use
before the button was pressed.
2-108 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Method of Operating Mode

• (BAS) Bass adjustment button:
When button (2) is pressed, BAS is displayed on display (7). If knob (1) is turned clockwise within five seconds, the bass
sound is emphasized. If the knob is turned counterclockwise, the bass sound is reduced.
• (TRE) Treble adjustment button:
When button (2) pressed, TRE is displayed on display (7). If knob (1) is turned clockwise within five seconds, the treble
sound is emphasized. If the knob is turned counterclockwise, the treble sound is reduced.
• (BAL) Balance adjustment button:
When button (2) is pressed, BAL is displayed on display (7). If knob (1) is turned clockwise within five seconds, the
sound from the right speaker is increased. If the knob is turned counterclockwise, the sound from the left speaker is
increased. When it is set to BAL 0, the sound from the left and right speakers is balanced.
Remark
With each mode, the display is returned automatically to its original setting after 5 seconds.
Setting Correct Time

1. Press display selector button (4) to display the time.
After five seconds, the display will return to the frequency display
and the time cannot be corrected. If this happens, press display
selector button (4) again.
2. Press time adjustment button (8) to set to Hour or Minute.
H button:
Adjusts the hour (each time the button is pressed, the time advances
by one hour)
M button:
Adjusts the minute (each time the button is pressed, the time advances by one minute)
If the H or M button is kept pressed, the time will advance continuously until the button is released.
ADJ button: When the ADJ button is pressed, the time is reset as follows.
When display is 00 - 05 minutes, time is returned to 00 min. 00 sec. (No change in hour)
When display is 55 - 59 minutes, time is advanced to 00 min. 00 sec. (Hour advances)
When display is 06 - 54 minutes, time cannot be reset. (Time stays same)
Example
10:05 ➡ 10:00
10:59 ➡ 11:00
10:26 ➡ 10:26
Use the H, M, and ADJ buttons to set to the correct time.
PC200/220LC-8 2-109
OPERATION
Antenna
Before transporting the machine or putting it inside a building, store the antenna to prevent any interference.
Stow the antenna as follows.
1. Loosen antenna mounting bolt (1) and store the antenna at position
(A).
2. After storing the antenna, tighten bolt (1).
Use Radio with Care

• To ensure safety, always keep the sound to a level where it is possible to hear outside sounds during operation.
• If water gets into the speaker case or radio, it may lead to an unexpected failure, so be careful not to get water on the
equipment.
• Do not wipe the scales or buttons with benzene, thinner, or any other solvent. Wipe with a soft dry cloth. Use a cloth
soaked in alcohol if the equipment is extremely dirty.
• When the battery is replaced, the settings for the preset buttons are all cleared, so set them again.
2-110 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
AUXILIARY ELECTRIC POWER
24 V power source
Remark
Do not use this as the power source for 12 V equipment.
Pull out the connector plug for taking out electric power from the rear
side of the panel.
Maximum usable electric power is 85 W (24 V x 3.5 A).
12 V power source
(if equipped)
This power source can be used up to a capacity of 60 W (12 V x 5 A).
PC200/220LC-8 2-111
OPERATION
FUSE
Remark
Before replacing a fuse, be sure to turn off the starting switch.
• The fuse holder is at the rear right of the operator's seat.
• The fuses protect the electrical equipment and wiring from burning
out.
• If the fuse becomes corroded, or white powder can be seen, or the
fuse is loose in the fuse holder, replace the fuse.
• Replace the fuse with another of the same capacity.
Fuse Capacities and Circuit Names
No. Fuse Name of circuit

capacity
(1) 10 A Relay for lamp
(2) 30 A Solenoid valve
(3) 10 A PPC lock solenoid
(4) 10 A Window washer, cigarette lighter
(5) 10 A Horn
(6) 10 A Auto preheater
(7) 10 A Beacon
(8) 20 A Lamp
(9) 10 A Radio, speaker, left knob switch
(10) 10 A Spare
(11) 20 A A/C unit
(12) 10 A Spare
(13) 10 A OPT lamp
(14) 10 A OPT power source (1)
OPT power source (2), travel alarm,
(15) 10 A 12V power port
(16) 10 A Radio backup, room lamp
(17) 20 A Monitor, controller, starter switch
(18) 10 A Spare
(19) 30 A Engine controller
(20) 5A Engine controller
2-112 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
FUSIBLE LINK
If the starting motor is not cranked when the starting switch is turned
START, there is probably a disconnection in fusible link (1) (two places).
Open the battery box cover on the right side of the machine and carry out
inspection and replacement.
Remark
A fusible link refers to the large-sized fuse wiring installed in
the high current flow portion of the circuit to protect electrical
components and wiring from burning, in the same way as an
ordinary fuse.
CONTROLLER
Controller installed.
Remark
Be careful not to get water, mud, or juice on the controller. This
will cause failure.
If any problem occurs in the controller, do not disassemble it
yourself. Contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
TOOL BOX
This is used for keeping the tools.
GREASE GUN HOLDER

This is inside the battery room door on the left side of the machine.
When not using the grease gun, fit it in this holder.
PC200/220LC-8 2-113
OPERATION
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
(If equipped)
A fire extinguisher is located at the rear part inside the operator's cab.
The directions are described on the nameplate affixed to it. Just in case,
carefully read and understand them beforehand.
2-114 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
MACHINE OPERATIONS AND CONTROLS
Before Starting Engine
Walk-Around Checks
Before starting the engine, look around and under the machine to check for loose nuts and bolts, or leakage of oil, fuel, or
coolant, and check condition of the work equipment and hydraulic system. Also check for loose wiring, play, and
accumulation of dust at places with high temperatures.
Remove any flammable materials from around the battery, engine, muffler, turbocharger, or other high temperature
engine parts.
Leakage of fuel or oil will cause the machine to catch fire. Check carefully, be sure to repair any problem, or contact
your Komatsu distributor.
Perform the following inspections and cleaning every day before starting engine for the day's work.
1. Check for damage, wear, play in work equipment, cylinders, linkage, hoses. Check for cracks, excessive wear, play in
work equipment, cylinders, linkage, and hoses. If any problem is found, repair it.
2. Remove dirt and debris from around the engine, battery, and radiator. Check for dirt accumulated around the engine and
radiator. Also check for flammable material (dry leaves, twigs, etc.) around the battery, engine muffler, turbocharger, or
other high temperature engine parts. If any dirt or flammable materials are found, remove them.
For the method of removing dirt from the radiator, see “Clean and Inspect Radiator Fins, Oil Cooler Fins, Aftercooler
Fins, Fuel Cooler Fins, and Condenser Fins (Only Machines Equipped With Air Conditioner)” on page 3-65.
3. When using high-pressure steam (high-pressure machine washing) to remove dirt or flammable material and clean the
heat exchange equipment (radiator, oil cooler, aftercooler, fuel cooler, air conditioner condenser), always keep the proper
distance when washing. If steam washing is carried out from close range, there is danger that the internal fins of the heat
exchange equipment may be deformed, leading to premature clogging or damage to the equipment.
4. Check for coolant and oil leakage around the engine. Check for oil leakage from the engine and coolant leaks from the
cooling system. If any problem is found, repair it.
5. Check for leakage from fuel line. Check that there is no leakage of fuel or damage to the hoses and tubes. If any problem
is found, carry out repairs.
6. Check for oil leakage from hydraulic equipment, hydraulic tank, hoses, and joints.
Check for oil leakage. If any problem is found, repair the area where oil is leaking.
7. Check the undercarriage (track, sprocket, idler, guard) for damage, wear, loose bolts, or leakage of oil from rollers.
If any problem is found, repair it.
8. Check for problems in handrails, steps, loose bolts. If any problem is found, repair it. Tighten any loose bolts.
9. Check for problem in gauges, monitor. Check that there is no problem in the gauges and monitor in the operator's cab. If
any problem is found, replace the parts. Clean off any dirt on the surface.
10. Clean, check rear view mirror. Check for damage to the rear view mirror. If damaged, replace it with a new mirror. Clean
surface of the mirror and adjust angle so area at the rear can be seen from the operator's seat.
11. Seat belt and mounting clamps. Check for damage or wear to the seat belt and mounting clamps. If there is any damage,
replace with new parts.
12. Check bucket with hook (if equipped) for damage. Check for damage to the hook, guide, and hook mount. If any problem
is found, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
13. Inspection and cleaning of rear view camera. Check the rear view camera for any abnormality. If it is found defective, call
your Komatsu distributor for repair.
PC200/220LC-8 2-115
OPERATION
Checks Before Starting

Always check the items in this section before starting the engine each
day.
Drain Water And Sediment from Fuel Tank
1. Open the pump room door on the right side of the machine.
2. Set a container under drain hose (1) to catch the drained fuel.
3. Open drain valve (2) at the rear of the fuel tank and drain the water
and sediment accumulated at the bottom of the tank together with the
fuel.
4. When only clean fuel comes out, close drain valve (2).
5. Close the pump room door on the right side of the machine.
Check for Water and Sediment in Water Separator, Drain

Water
1. Open the pump room door on the right side of the machine.
The water separator forms one unit with fuel pre-filter (1).
2. It is possible to judge the water level and amount of sediment by

looking through transparent cap (2). If there is any water or
sediment collected at the bottom, set a container to catch the drain
water under drain hose (3).
3. Loosen drain valve (4) and drain the water.
4. When fuel starts to drain from drain hose (3), tighten drain valve (4)
immediately.
On this machine, a sensor is installed to detect if water is accumulated in

transparent cap (2).
When the water separator monitor (5) lights up red on the machine
monitor, it indicates that water is accumulated in transparent cap (2).
In this case also, use the procedure above to drain the water.
Remark
When only the water separator monitor lights up, it lights up in
the position shown in the diagram on the right.
If other monitors also light up the same time, the water
separator monitor lights up at a different position.
Remark
If the water accumulated in transparent cap (2) freezes, the
water separator monitor may not light up. After the engine is started, as the temperature around fuel pre-filter
(1) increases, the frozen water will melt and the water separator monitor may suddenly light up. In cold areas,
even if the water separator monitor does not light up, drain the water frequently.
If the water inside transparent cap (2) freezes, check that the frozen water has melted completely, then use the
procedure above to drain the water.
2-116 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Remark
If transparent cap (2) is dirty or it is difficult to see the inside, clean transparent cap (2) when replacing fuel
pre-filter cartridge (1).
When the drain valve (4) has been removed during the cleaning operation, coat the O-ring with grease and
tighten until it contacts the bottom.
Adjustment of Drain Valve
If drain valve (4) is stiff, coat the O-ring portion of the drain valve with
grease to make the movement smooth.
1. Turn the valve (6) at the bottom of the fuel tank to the CLOSE
position (S).
2. Set the container to catch the fuel under the pre-filter cartridge.
3. Loosen drain valve (4), then drain all the water and sediment in the
transparent cap (2) and also the fuel accumulated in filter cartridge
(1).
4. Check that nothing more comes out from drain hose (3), then remove
drain valve (4).
5. Coat O-ring portion (7) with a suitable amount of grease. When

doing this, be careful not to let the grease get stuck to the drain valve
water drain port (8) or drain valve thread (9).
6. Tighten drain valve (4) by hand until it contacts the bottom of transparent cap (2).
7. Remove the fuel container.
8. Turn the valve (6) at the bottom of the fuel tank to the OPEN position (O).
Remark
When bleeding air, see “Replace Fuel Pre-Filter Cartridge” on page 3-62 or “Replace Fuel Main Filter Car-
tridge” on page 3-75.
PC200/220LC-8 2-117
OPERATION
Check Oil Level in Hydraulic Tank, Add Oil
• The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause burns. Wait for
the temperature to go down before starting the work.
• When removing the oil filler cap, turn it slowly to release the internal pressure, then remove it.
1. Set the work equipment in the posture shown in the diagram on the
right, then check the oil level and add oil if necessary.
2. If the work equipment is not in the condition shown in the diagram

on the right, start the engine, run the engine at low speed, retract the
arm and bucket cylinder rods fully, then lower the boom, set the
bucket teeth in contact with the ground, and stop the engine.
3. Within 15 seconds after stopping the engine, move each control lever
(for work equipment and travel) to the full stroke in all directions to
release the internal pressure.
4. Check sight gauge (G), open door on pump compartment and the oil
level should be between the H and L lines.
Remark
Do not add oil above the H line. This will damage the hydraulic
equipment and may cause oil to spurt out. If oil is added above
the H line, stop the engine, wait for the oil temperature to cool
down, put a container to catch the oil under drain plug (P) at
the bottom of the hydraulic tank, then drain the excess oil from
the drain plug.
5. If the oil level is below the L line, add oil through oil filler (F) at the
top of the hydraulic tank.
Remark
The oil level will vary depending upon the oil temperature.
Accordingly, use the following as a guide:
• Before starting operation: Between H and L levels (Oil temperature 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F))
• Normal operation: Around H level (Oil temperature 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F))
2-118 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Check Coolant Level, Add Coolant
• Do not open the radiator cap unless necessary. Wait for the engine to cool down before checking the coolant in
the sub-tank.
• Immediately after the engine is stopped, the coolant is at a high temperature and the radiator is under high
internal pressure. If the cap is removed to check the coolant level in this condition, there is a hazard of burns.
Wait for the temperature to go down, then turn the cap slowly to release the pressure before removing it.
1. Open the door at the rear left of the machine, and check if the coolant
in sub-tank (1) (shown in the diagram on the right) is between the
FULL and LOW marks. If the coolant level is low, add coolant to the
FULL level through the filler port of sub-tank (1).
2. After adding coolant, tighten the cap securely.
3. If the sub-tank (1) is empty, there is probably leakage of coolant.

After inspecting, repair any problem immediately. If there is no
problem, check the coolant level in the radiator. If the coolant level is
low, add coolant to the radiator, then fill the sub-tank (1).
4. If the inside of sub-tank (1) is dirty and the water level cannot be
seen, use the procedure in “Clean Inside of Cooling System” on
page 3-29.
PC200/220LC-8 2-119
OPERATION
Check Oil Level in Engine Oil Pan, Add Oil
Parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped and may cause serious
burns. Wait for the oil temperature to go down before performing this operation.
1. Open the engine hood on the machine.
2. Remove dipstick (G), and wipe the oil off with a cloth.
3. Fully insert dipstick (G) into filler pipe (F), then remove it.
4. The oil level should be between the H and L marks on dipstick (G).
If the oil level is below the L mark, add oil through oil filler (F).
5. If the oil is above the H line, open drain valve (P) at the bottom of
the engine oil pan, drain the excess engine oil, then check the oil
level again.
6. If oil level is correct, securely tighten the oil filler cap and close the
engine hood.
Remark
When checking the oil level after the engine has been
operated, wait for at least 15 minutes after stopping the engine
before checking.
If the machine is at an angle, make it to a horizontal position
before checking.
2-120 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Check Electric Wiring
• If fuses are frequently blown or if there are traces of short-circuiting on the electrical wiring, promptly ask your
Komatsu distributor to locate the cause and make the repair.
• Keep the top surface of the battery clean and check the breather hole in the battery cap. If it is clogged with dirt or
dust, wash the battery cap to clear the breather hole.
Check that there is no damage to the fuses; that fuses of the specified capacity are used; that there is no disconnection or trace
of short-circuiting in the electric wiring and no damage to the covering. Check also that there is no loosened terminals. If any,
tighten them.
Moreover, pay particular attention to the electric wiring when checking the battery, engine starting motor and alternator.
Be sure to check that there is no flammable material accumulated around the battery. If any is found, remove immediately.
PC200/220LC-8 2-121
OPERATION
Check Fuel Level, Add Fuel
• When adding fuel, never spill the fuel or let it overflow. It will
cause fire.
• If any fuel has spilled, wipe it up completely. If fuel has spilled

over soil or sand, remove that soil or sand.
• Fuel is highly flammable and dangerous. Never bring flames

near fuel.
1. Turn the engine starting switch to the ON position and check the fuel
level gauge (1) on the monitor panel for fuel level.
After checking, turn the switch back to the OFF position.
2. If fuel is found to be low, unscrew fuel filler cap (F) on the fuel tank
and add fuel through the filler port until float gauge (G) comes up to
the highest point.
Fuel tank capacity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 liters (105.68 US gal)

Position of tip (a) of float gauge (G) when fuel tank is full: . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approximately 50 mm (2 in)
3. After adding fuel, push float gauge (G) straight down with fuel filler
cap (F). Be careful not to get float gauge (G) caught in the tab of fuel
filler cap (2), and tighten fuel filler cap (F) securely.
Remark
If breather hole (3) in the cap is clogged, the pressure inside
the tank will go down and no fuel will be supplied, so clean the
breather hole periodically.
The diagram on the right shows the rear surface of the cap.
2-122 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Check Working Lamp Switch
Turn the lamp switch ON (night mode (a), and day mode (b)) and check
that the working lamp lights up.
If it does not light up, there is probably a blown bulb or a disconnection,
so contact your Komatsu distributor to have repairs carried out.
1. Turn the starting switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the lamp switch ON (night mode (a), and day mode (b)) and
check that the working lamp lights up.
Check Function of Horn

1. Turn the starting switch to the ON position.
2. Confirm that the horn sounds immediately when the horn button is
pressed.
If the horn does not sound, contact your Komatsu distributor for
repair.
PC200/220LC-8 2-123
OPERATION
Adjustment
Seat Adjustment
When adjusting the position of the operator's seat, always set lock lever (1) to LOCK position (L) to prevent
the machine or work equipment from moving if there is accidental contact with the control levers.
• Always adjust the operator's seat before starting each operation or

when the operators change shift.
• Adjust the operator's seat so control levers and switches can be
operated freely and easily with the operator's back against the
backrest.
(A) Fore-and-aft adjustment

Pull lever (1) up, set the seat to the desired position, then release the
lever.
Fore-and-aft adjustment: . . . . . . . . . 160 mm (6.3 in) (16 stages)
(B) Adjusting reclining

Remark
The operator's seat can be reclined to a large angle when the
seat is completely pushed forward, but the reclining angle is
reduced when the seat is moved backward. So return the seat
to its upright position before moving the seat to the rear.
Pull up lever (2) and set the backrest to a position that is comfortable
for operation, then release the lever.
Sit with your back against the seat backrest when adjusting. If your
back is not against the backrest, the backrest may suddenly move
forward.
(C) Adjusting seat tilt

• Forward tilt
Push lever (3) down to adjust angle of the front of seat. (four stages)
• To raise the angle at front of the seat, keep the lever pushed down and apply your weight to the rear of seat.
• To lower the angle at front of the seat, keep the lever pushed down and apply your weight to the front of seat.
• Rear tilt
Pull lever (4) up to adjust angle of the rear of seat. (four stages)
• To raise the angle at rear of the seat, keep lever (3) pulled up, and stand up slightly to remove your weight from the
seat.
• To lower the angle at rear of the seat, keep lever (3) pulled up, and apply your weight to the seat.
Amount of tilt: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up 13°, down 13°
2-124 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
• Adjusting seat height
It is possible to move the seat up or down by combining adjustments
forward tilt and rear tilt.
After setting the forward tilt or rear tilt to the desired height, operate
the opposite part to set the seat horizontal then secure in position.
Height adjustment: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 mm (2.4 in)
(D) Adjusting armrest height

The height of armrest (5) can be adjusted up or down by changing
the position of adjustment bolt (6) at the rear of the armrest.
Armrest height adjustment: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 mm (1.3 in)
(E) Overall fore-and-aft adjustment of seat

Move lever (7) to right, set to the desired position, then release the
lever. In this case, the operator's seat, left and right control levers,
and lock lever all slide together.
Fore-and-aft adjustment: . . . . . . . . . . 180 mm (7.1 in) (9 stages)
(F) Adjusting suspension (if equipped)

Turn knob (8) to the right to make the suspension harder, or to the left to make the suspension softer. Adjust the reading of
the dial to match the operator's weight and select the optimum suspension.
Remark
To obtain the optimum adjustment, turn the knob (8) so that the indicator of the weight display (kg) in the
transparent portion of knob (8) is the same as the operator's weight.
PC200/220LC-8 2-125
OPERATION
Rearview Mirrors
Always adjust the mirrors before starting operations. If the mirrors

are not properly adjusted, it will be impossible to see properly, and
there is danger that this may lead to serious personal injury.
Mirror (A)
Adjust the mirror mount so that it is possible to see people at the rear left
of the machine.
• Install the side view mirror in the location indicated in the figure at
right.
(L): 120 mm (4.7 in)
• Fix mirror securing stay (1) the way the side view mirror stretches
outward to the maximum.
• If the side view mirror does not move smoothly when adjusting its
angle, loosen mirror securing bolt (2) and mirror securing stay bolt
(3).
Torque of bolt (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 - 5.4 N•m (3 - 4 lb/ft)
• When adjusting the side view mirror angle, make an adjustment so
that the side of the machine comes into view on the mirror as shown
in the figure at right.
2-126 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Mirror (B)
Adjust the mirror mount so that it is possible to see people at the rear
right of the machine.
• Install the side view mirror in the location indicated in the figure at
right.
(M): 100 mm (3.9 in)
• If the side view mirror does not move smoothly when adjusting its
angle, loosen mirror securing bolt (4) and mirror securing stay bolt
(5).
Torque of bolt (4): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 - 5.4 N•m (3 - 4 lb/ft)
• When adjusting the side view mirror angle, make an adjustment so
that the side of the machine comes into view on the mirror as shown
in the figure at right.
Mirrors (C), (D)

Adjust the side view mirrors so that people around 1 m away from the
machine can be seen.
(W): 1 m (3 ft 3 in)
• If side view mirror (C), (D) does not move smoothly when adjusting
its angle, loosen mirror securing screw (6).
Torque of screw (6): . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 - 3.5 N•m (2.2 - 2.6 lb/ft)
PC200/220LC-8 2-127
OPERATION
• When installing mirrors (C) and (D), make sure to leave clearance
(V) to prevent contact between the mirror and mirror stay.
(V): Min. 10 mm (0.4 in)
Adjusting Angle of Rear View Camera

If the image on the monitor is not aligned correctly, remove cover (1) and
adjust the mounting angle (A) of the rear view camera.
Amount of adjustment of angle (A): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Within a range of 35°-80°
1. When removing cover (1), insert a flat-headed screwdriver into the

hole of cover (2), push the tooth on the inside, and remove the cover.
2. Remove two bolts (3).
3. Remove cover (1).
2-128 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
4. Loosen mounting bolt (4) of the camera and adjust mounting angle
(A) of the camera so that the center line of mounting bolt (4) is
aligned with fourth-from-bottom scale (B).
Remark
Part of the machine is shown on the monitor screen.
5. After adjusting, tighten bolt (4).
Torque: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 N•m (2.2-3.6 lb/ft)
PC200/220LC-8 2-129
OPERATION
Seat Belt Inspection
Seat belts must be replaced immediately if there are any signs of wear or damafe, no matter how recently
they were last replaced.
A thorough inspection of the entire seat belt system should occur before
starting the engine.
• Inspect the full length and both sides of the seat belt webbing for
wear, abrasion, dirt, oil, mildew, paint or other damage. Replace
immediately if worn or damaged.
• If the webbing is cut, fraying, snagging, kinking, or roping, the
seat belt must be replaced. Any of these conditions may limit
belt retraction.
• There may be internal and/or external tethers mounted on the

suspension mechanism. Inspect these for fatigue as well as the
integrity of the mounting hardware.
• Inspect the seat belt attachment and adjustment hardware for wear or
damage.
• Retractable and non-retractable buckle housings with damage
from abrasions, rubbing, forceful impacts and age, must be
replaced. These conditions may weaken the strength of the
buckle.
• Examine the seat belt buckle and retractor housing(s) for proper
function.
• Dirt, debris, lint, leaves, etc. may become encased inside of the
retractor housing. With time, this condition may cause a seat
belt malfunction.
• Check the mounting structure integrity. Verify that the mounting
bolts are secure. Tighten to specified torque, if necessary.
• Check your records or the seat belt “Date of Installation” label (if equipped). Even if there are no signs of damage, the seat
belt must be replaced either five years after the date of manufacture, or every three years after the start of usage, which-
ever comes first.
• The manufactured date and “Install By” (if equipped) date may be found on the back of the buckle housing and/or on
the seat belt webbing.
• The location of the “Date of Installation” label (if equipped) may vary slightly, but most frequently it will be found on
the plastic molding of the seat belt.
2-130 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
If your machine is equipped with a shoulder harness also, inspect the webbing, the shoulder loop web guide and the height
adjuster for wear, damage and proper function capabilities
Seat Belt
• Before fitting the seat belt, check that there is no problem in the belt mount bracket or mounting belt. If it is worn
or damaged, replace the seat belt.
• Even if no problem can be seen in the belt, replace the seat belt every three years. The date of manufacture of the
belt is shown on the back of the belt.
• Always wear the seat belt during operations.
• Fit the seat belt so that it is not twisted.
Fastening and Removing

This seat belt has a wind-in device, so it is not necessary to adjust the
length.
Fastening Seat Belt
Hold grip (2) and pull the belt out from wind-in device (1), check that the
belt is not twisted, then insert tongue (3) into buckle (4) securely.
When doing this, pull the belt lightly to check that it is properly locked.
Removing Belt
Press button (5) in buckle (4), and remove tongue (3) from buckle (4).
The belt is automatically wound in, hold grip (2) and return the belt
slowly to wind-in device (1).
PC200/220LC-8 2-131
OPERATION
Operations Before Starting Engine
When starting the engine, check that the lock lever is

securely at the LOCK position.
If the lock lever is not locked securely and the control levers
or control pedal are touched when the engine is started, the
machine may move unexpectedly, and this may lead to
serious personal injury.
1. Check that lock lever (1) is at the LOCK position (L).
2. Check that each control lever and control pedal is at the Neutral
position.
If the control levers and control pedal are not being touched, they
will be at the Neutral position.
3. Insert the key in starting switch (2), turn the key to the ON position
(B), then carry out the following checks.
★ If a password has been set, the input display screen will be displayed
on the monitor screen.
After inputting the password, press Enter switch F6 (3).
Remark
For details of the method of setting, changing, or canceling the
password, see separate “PROCEDURE FOR SETTING,
CHANGING OR CANCELING PASSWORD”.
2-132 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
A. The buzzer sounds for approximately two seconds, then the
monitor or meter lights up for approximately two seconds.
• Radiator coolant level monitor (4)

• Charge level monitor (5)
• Engine oil pressure monitor (6)
• Engine oil level monitor (7)
• Air cleaner clogging monitor (8)
• Water separator monitor (9)
• Engine coolant temperature gauge (10)
• Fuel level monitor (13)
If any monitor does not light up or the buzzer does not sound,
there is probably a failure in the monitor, so please contact your
Komatsu distributor for repairs.
B. After approximately two seconds, the screen will change to the
working mode/travel speed display monitor. Next, it will switch
to the standard screen.
• Engine coolant temperature gauge (10)

• Engine coolant temperature monitor (11)
• Fuel gauge (12)
• Fuel level monitor (13)
• Hydraulic oil temperature gauge (14)
• Hydraulic oil temperature monitor (15)
C. If the hydraulic oil temperature gauge is out or caution lamp

(16) stays lit red, immediately check the item that lights up red.
D. If the maintenance interval has passed, maintenance interval

monitor (17) lights up for 30 seconds. Press maintenance switch
F5 (18), check the item, and carry out maintenance immediately.
For details of the method of checking the maintenance interval,

See “Maintenance Selector Switch” on page 2-42 in the
explanation for each component.
PC200/220LC-8 2-133
OPERATION
STARTING ENGINE
• Start the engine only after sitting down in the operator's seat.
• Do not attempt to start the engine by short-circuiting the engine starting circuit. Such an act may cause a serious
bodily injury or fire.
• Check that there are no persons or obstacles in the surrounding area, then sound the horn and start the engine.
• Never use starting aid fluids as they may cause explosions.
• Exhaust gas is toxic. When starting the engine in confined spaces, be particularly careful to ensure good
ventilation.
Remark
Before starting the engine, check that fuel control dial (2) is at
the low idling (MIN) position. If the fuel control dial is at the full
speed (MAX) position, the engine will accelerate suddenly and
cause damage to the engine parts.
Do not keep the key in starting switch (3) at the START
position continuously for more than 20 seconds.
If the engine does not start, wait for at least two minutes, then
start again from the beginning.
After the engine starts, wait for the engine oil pressure monitor
to go out. Do not touch the control levers or control pedal while
the engine oil pressure monitor is lit.
This machine is equipped with an engine automatic preheating device that functions to start the engine preheating
automatically.
If the ambient temperature is low, the preheating monitor will light up when the key in starting switch (3) is turned to the ON
position to inform the operator that preheating has been started automatically.
1. Check the lock lever (1) is in the LOCK position (L). If the lock
lever is in the FREE position (F), the engine does not start.
2-134 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
2. Set fuel control dial (2) to the low idling (MIN) position.
3. Turn the key in starting switch (3) to ON position (B).

If the ambient temperature is low, the preheating monitor lights up
and automatic preheating is carried out. Keep the key in starting
switch (3) at the ON position until the preheating monitor goes out.
The time that the preheating monitor stays lit depends on the ambient
temperature as shown in the table on the right.
Ambient temperature Lighting time

-4 °C to -15 °C 5 seconds to 30 seconds
-15 °C or less 30 seconds
4. If the preheating monitor does not light up, or it lights up and then
goes out to inform that the engine preheating has been completed,
turn the key in starting switch (3) to the START position (C) and
start the engine.
Remark
If the ambient temperature is low, the engine may not start
even when the key in the starting switch (3) is kept at the
START position for 20 seconds. If this happens, wait for at
least two minutes, then start again from the beginning.
5. After the engine starts, release the key in starting switch (3). The key
will automatically return to the ON position (B).
Remark
When the engine is started, depending on the ambient
temperature or the condition of the battery, the battery voltage
may suddenly drop.
If this happens, the display on the machine monitor will
momentarily disappear, but this does not indicate any
abnormality.
PC200/220LC-8 2-135
OPERATION
6. Even if the engine starts, wait for the engine oil pressure monitor to
go out. Do not touch the control levers or control pedal while the
engine oil pressure monitor is lighted up.
Remark
If the engine oil pressure monitor does not go out even after 4
to five seconds have passed, stop the engine immediately.
Check the oil level, check for leakage of oil, and take the
necessary action.
Remark
Regardless of the ambient temperature, it is possible to start
the engine preheating manually.
1. Turn the key in starting switch (3) to the left from OFF position (A).
The preheating monitor lights up and engine preheating starts.
(Preheating continues while the key in starting switch (3) is held at
the left position.)
During the preheating operation, the preheating monitor lights up to
show that preheating is taking place.
2. The preheating monitor starts lighting about 30 seconds after

preheating starts and then goes off in about ten seconds..
3. Turn the key in starting switch (3) to the START position. The
engine will start.
If the engine cannot be started with the above procedure, wait for at least
two minutes, then start again from Step 1.
2-136 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Turbo Protect Function

The turbo protect function is a function to protect the turbocharger by keeping the engine speed at less than 1000 rpm
immediately after the engine is started.
When the turbo protect function is actuated, the engine speed is held at less than 1000 rpm, regardless of the position of the
fuel control dial.
When the turbo protect function is canceled, the engine speed is set to the speed for the position of the fuel control dial.
The relationship between the length of time of actuating the turbo protect function and the temperature of the engine coolant is
as shown in the table.
Coolant temperature Turbo protect time (sec.)

Above 10 C (50 F) 0
10 to -30 C (50 to -22 F) Change 0 to 20
below -30 C (22 F) 20
PC200/220LC-8 2-137
OPERATION
AFTER STARTING ENGINE
• To stop the engine in emergencies or when the actuation of the

engine is abnormal or there is any other trouble, turn the key
in the starting switch to the OFF position.
• Do not carry out operations or operate the levers or pedal

suddenly while the hydraulic oil is at low temperature. Always
carry out the warm-up operation for the hydraulic system until
the hydraulic oil temperature monitor indicates that the
hydraulic oil has reached the operating temperature range.
Hydraulic oil temperature indicator
(A) Display when temperature is within operating range:
Monitor background (C) is blue
(B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background (C)
is white
• Hydraulically activated equipment may be effected if the

warm-up process is not carried out completely. The effect may
result in delayed control functions causing sluggish and/or
jerky operation of the boom, arm, bucket, swing, and travel
operations. Do not attempt normal machine operations until
the hydraulic temperature indicator shows a blue background
(described above as item (A)).
There are two types of warm-up operation:

Warm up the engine and Warm up the hydraulic equipment. In addition, depending on the environment, the method of carrying
out the warm-up operation may differ, so carry out the warm-up operation according to the items given in the appropriate
section.
(When only the engine is warmed up, the hydraulic equipment is not warmed up, so always carry out the warm-up operation
for the hydraulic equipment separately from the warm-up operation for the engine. Warm up the hydraulic equipment
thoroughly ensures that the hydraulic oil is warmed up and that warm hydraulic oil circulates in all the control circuits.)
Checking of Engine Startability and Noise
When starting the engine, check that the engine causes no abnormal noise and that it starts up easily and smoothly. Check also
that there is no abnormal noise when the engine is idling or when the revolution rises slightly. When there is an abnormal noise
at the engine startup and if that condition continues, the engine may be damaged. In that case, ask your Komatsu distributor to
check the engine as soon as possible.
Checking of Engine Acceleration and Deceleration
When stopping the machine during the operation, check that there is no irregular engine revolution or that the engine does not
stop suddenly.
Check also that the engine speed rises smoothly when the fuel control dial is turned to the full (Max).
• Carry out these checks in a safe place, watching out for danger in the surroundings.
• When the engine performs very badly at low idling and in the acceleration and if that condition continues, the engine may
be damaged or confuse the operator's sense of driving or lower the braking efficiency, and as a result lead to an
unexpected accident. In that case, ask your Komatsu distributor to check the engine as soon as possible.
2-138 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Breaking-in the New Machine

Remark
Your Komatsu machine has been thoroughly adjusted and tested before shipment from the factory. However,
operating the machine under full load before breaking the machine in can adversely affect the performance
and shorten the machine life. Be sure to break in the machine for the initial 100 hours (as indicated on the
service meter).
Make sure that you fully understand the content of this manual, and pay careful attention to the following points when
breaking in the machine.
• Run the engine at idle for 15 seconds after starting it. During this time, do not operate the control levers or fuel control
dial.
• Idle the engine for five minutes after starting it up.
• Avoid operation with heavy loads or at high speeds.
• Immediately after starting the engine, avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration, unnecessary sudden stops, and sudden
changes in direction.
Engine Warm Up
Remark
Do not accelerate the engine suddenly until the warm-up
operation has been completed.
Do not run the engine at low idling or high idling under no load
for more than 20 minutes. This will have an adverse effect on
the environment, and will also have an adverse effect on the
internal structure of the engine. If it is necessary to run the
engine at idling for more than 20 minutes, apply a load from
time to time or run at a mid-range speed.
After the engine starts, do not start operating the machine immediately.
First, carry out the following operations and checks.
1. This machine is equipped with an automatic engine warm-up system, so if the engine water temperature is below 30°C
(86°F) after the engine is started, the engine warm-up operation starts automatically. When the engine automatic warm-up
operation starts, the engine speed is maintained at a speed higher than the normal low idling speed.
If the engine water temperature goes above 30°C (86°F) or if the warm-up operation has been continued for more than ten
minutes, the automatic warm-up operation is cancelled and the engine speed drops to the normal low idling speed.
2. Check that engine coolant temperature monitor (1) displays the

operating temperature range.
If it displays low temperature, use the procedure in Step 3 to carry
out additional warm-up of the engine until the monitor displays that
the coolant is in the operating temperature range.
Coolant temperature indicator

(A) Display when temperature is in operating range: Monitor
background (C) is blue
(B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background (C) is
white
PC200/220LC-8 2-139
OPERATION
3. Turn fuel control dial (2) to a point midway between low idling
(MIN) and full speed (MAX), run the engine under no load at a
mid-range speed until engine coolant temperature monitor (1)
displays operating temperature range.
(A) Display when temperature is correct: Monitor background (C) is blue

(B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background (C) is white
If the engine coolant temperature monitor displays a blue background,

the engine warm-up operation is completed.
With the engine warm-up complete, proceed to carry out the warm-up
operation for the hydraulic system.
2-140 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Remark
Canceling automatic warm-up operation
If it becomes necessary in an emergency to cancel the automatic warm-up operation or to lower the engine
speed to low idle, do as follows.
1. Turn fuel control dial (2) to the full speed (MAX) position and hold
it for three seconds.
2. When fuel control dial (2) is returned to the low idle (MIN) position,
the engine speed will drop.
PC200/220LC-8 2-141
OPERATION
Hydraulic System Warm-Up
• Before carrying out the warm-up operation for the hydraulic

equipment, turn the swing lock switch ON, check on the
monitor that the swing lock monitor lights up to show that the
swing lock is actuated, then start the warm-up operation.
• When warming up the hydraulic system, check that there is no

person or obstacle in the surrounding area, then sound the
horn and start the operation.
• Carry out the warm-up operation for the hydraulic system until
the hydraulic oil temperature monitor indicates that the
hydraulic oil has reached the operating temperature range.
Hydraulic oil temperature indicator
(A) Display when temperature is within operating range:
(B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background (C)
is white
• The warm-up operation for the hydraulic system is necessary

not only for the circuit between the pump and cylinders and
between the pump and motor, but also for all the control
circuits. Do not carry out the operation just for one cylinder or
motor, or the operation just in one direction. Carry out the
operation in both directions for the work equipment (boom,
arm, bucket), swing, travel, and attachment (if equipped).
1. Check that engine coolant temperature monitor (1) displays the

operating temperature range.
(A) Display when temperature is in operating range: Monitor

white
If it displays low temperature, carry out additional warm-up of the

engine until engine coolant temperature monitor (1) displays a blue
background.
For details of the procedure, See “Engine Warm Up” on page 2-139.
2-142 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
2. Turn swing lock switch (2) ON and check that the swing lock
monitor lights up.
3. To complete the warm-up operation of the hydraulic equipment more

quickly, set the working mode to P mode (heavy-duty mode).
For details of the procedure for setting the working mode, See
“Working Mode Selector Switch” on page 2-25.
4. Move lock lever (3) slowly to the FREE position (F), then raise the
bucket from the ground.
5. Turn fuel control dial (4) to a point midway between low idling
(MIN) and full speed (MAX).
PC200/220LC-8 2-143
OPERATION
Remark
When the work equipment is retracted, take care that it does
not interfere with the machine body or ground.
6. Move right work equipment control lever (5) slowly in the L.H.
direction to pull in the bucket (D). Operate the lever to the end of its
travel and hold it in position for 30 seconds.
7. Move right work equipment control lever (5) slowly in the R.H.
direction to push out the bucket (C). Operate the lever to the end of
its travel and hold it in position for 30 seconds.
8. Next, move left work equipment control lever (6) slowly in the
machine rear direction to pull in the arm (B). Operate the lever to the
end of its travel and hold it in position for 30 seconds.
9. Move left work equipment control lever (6) slowly in the machine forward direction to push out the arm (A). Operate the
lever to the end of its travel and hold it in position for 30 seconds.
10. Repeat the operation in Steps 6 to 9 for five minutes.
11. Check that hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7) indicates that the
temperature, is within operating range (blue background).
If it is not, repeat Steps 6 to 10 until the blue background is

displayed.
(A) Display when temperature is within operating range: Monitor

white
12. Check that engine coolant temperature monitor (1) indicates that the
temperature is within operating range (blue background).

white
If it displays low temperature, carry out additional warm-up of the

engine until engine coolant temperature monitor (1) displays the blue
background.
For details of the procedure, See “Engine Warm Up” on page 2-139.
2-144 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
13. Check that the hydraulic oil temperature monitor and engine coolant
temperature monitor indicate a working range temperature, then
check that all the gauges and caution monitors on the machine
monitor are in the following status.
• Radiator coolant level monitor (8): OFF

• Charge level monitor (9): OFF
• Engine oil pressure monitor (10): ON
• Engine oil level monitor (11): OFF
• Air cleaner clogging monitor (12): OFF
• Water separator monitor (13): OFF
• Engine pre-heating monitor (14): OFF
• Engine coolant temperature gauge (15): Indicator in green range
• Engine coolant temperature monitor (1): Displays correct
temperature
• Hydraulic oil temperature gauge (16): Indicator in green range
• Hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7): Displays correct
temperature
• Fuel gauge (17): Indicator in green range
• Fuel level monitor (18): Displays appropriate level
14. Check for abnormal exhaust gas color, noise, or vibration. If any problem is found, contact your Komatsu distributor.
In cold temperatures (ambient temperature below 0°C (32°F)), even when the hydraulic oil temperature monitor displays a
blue background, carry out additional Step 15 to warm up all the hydraulic equipment.
15. Turn fuel control dial (4) to the full speed (MAX) position, repeat
Steps 6 to 9 for three to five minutes, then check again that the
hydraulic oil temperature monitor is displaying correct temperature.
If it is not, repeat Steps 6 to 9 for yhree to five minutes until

hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7) displays correct temperature.

background (C) is blue.
white.
PC200/220LC-8 2-145
OPERATION
For both normal temperatures and cold temperatures, carry out the following operation.
16. Check that fuel control dial (4) is at a point midway between low
idling (MIN) and full speed (MAX).
If it is not at the midway position, set it to the midway position and
run the engine at a mid-range speed before operating.
17. Before starting operations, repeat the following operations slowly

three to five times to circulate warm oil through the control circuits.
• Boom operation RAISE (E) ←→ LOWER (F)

• Arm operation IN (B) ←→ OUT (A)
• Bucket operation CURL (D) ←→ DUMP (C)
When carrying out swing operations, release swing lock switch (2),
check that swing lock monitor (19) goes out, then operate the swing.
• Swing operation Left (G) ←→ Right (H)
• Travel (Lo) operation FORWARD (A) ←→ REVERSE (B)
2-146 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
For attachment operations (if equipped), change the working mode to the
attachment mode.
• Attachment operation One way (A) ←→ Other way (B)
18. Check that hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7) is displaying a blue
background.
If it is not, repeat Steps 6 to 10 until the blue background is

displayed.
(A) Display when temperature is in operating range:

(B) Display when temperature is low:

Monitor background (C) is white
If the hydraulic oil temperature monitor displays the blue background, the hydraulic system warm-up operation is completed.
After confirming that the hydraulic oil temperature monitor displays the blue background, carry out the following procedure.
PC200/220LC-8 2-147
OPERATION
Operation after Completion of Warming-Up

Operation
1. Check that hydraulic oil temperature monitor displays a blue back-
ground.
• (A) Display when temperature is correct: Monitor background

(C) is blue
• (B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background (C)
is white
2. Push working mode selector switch (20) of the machine monitor to

select the working mode to be used.
For details of the procedure for selecting the working mode, See
“Working Mode Selector Switch” on page 2-25.
• Working mode monitor display

A. P mode
For heavy-duty operations
B. E mode
For operations with emphasis on fuel economy
2-148 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
C. L mode
For operations requiring fine control
D. B mode
For breaker operations
E. ATT mode
For operations with crusher or other double-acting action
attachment
PC200/220LC-8 2-149
OPERATION
STOPPING THE ENGINE

Remark
If the engine is stopped abruptly, service life of component
parts of the engine may be considerably reduced. Do not stop
the engine abruptly except in an emergency. If the engine has
overheated, do not try to stop it abruptly but run it at medium
speed to allow it to cool down gradually, and then stop it.
1. Run the engine at low idle for about five minutes to cool down
gradually.
2. Turn the key in starting switch (1) to the OFF position (A) and stop
the engine.
3. Remove the key from starting switch (1).
2-150 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
MACHINE OPERATION
• Before operating the control levers and control pedals, check the direction that the track frame is facing. When
the track frame is facing the rear (when the sprocket is at the front), the direction of operation of the travel levers
and control pedals is the opposite from the direction of movement of the machine (forward/reverse, steering to
left/right).
• When moving the machine, check that the area around the machine is safe, and always sound the horn before
moving.
• Do not allow anyone in the area around the machine.
• Remove all obstacles from the travel path of the machine.
• The rear of the machine is a blind spot, be extremely careful when traveling in reverse.
• If the lever is moved inside the deceleration range, engine speed will rise suddenly. Operate the levers carefully.
• For machines equipped with a travel alarm, check that the warning equipment works properly.
Preparations for Moving the Machine

1. Set swing lock switch (1) to the ON (actuated) position and confirm
that swing lock monitor lamp (2) lights up.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
2. Turn fuel control dial (3) towards the full speed position to increase
the engine speed.
PC200/220LC-8 2-151
OPERATION
Moving Machine Forward

1. Set lock lever (4) in the FREE position (F), fold the work equipment,
and raise it 40 to 50 cm (16 to 20 in) from the ground.
• If the view to the right side is poor, raise the boom to ensure
better visibility.
2. Operate the right and left travel levers (5), or the right or left travel pedals (6) as follows:
• When sprocket (A) is at the rear of the machine:

Slowly push the levers forward, or slowly depress the front part
of the pedals to move the machine forward.
• When sprocket (A) is at the front of the machine:

Slowly pull the levers backward, or slowly depress the rear part
of the pedals to move the machine forward.
3. For machines equipped with a travel alarm (if equipped), check that the alarm sounds. If the alarm does not sound, please
contact your Komatsu distributor for repair.
Remark
In cold temperatures, if the machine travel speed is not normal, thoroughly perform the warming-up operation.
In addition, if the undercarriage is clogged with mud and the machine travel speed is not normal, remove the
soil and mud from the undercarriage.
2-152 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Moving Machine Backward

1. Set lock lever (4) in the FREE position (F), fold the work equipment,
and raise it 40 to 50 cm (16 to 20 in) from the ground.
• If the view to the right side is poor, raise the boom to ensure
better visibility.
2. Operate the right and left travel levers (5), or the right or left travel pedals (6) as follows:
• When sprocket (A) is at the rear of the machine:

Slowly pull the levers backward, or slowly depress the rear part
of the pedals to move the machine backward.
• When sprocket (A) is at the front of the machine:

Slowly push the levers forward, or slowly depress the front part
of the pedals to move the machine backward.
3. For machines equipped with a travel alarm (if equipped), check that the alarm sounds. If the alarm does not sound, please
contact your Komatsu distributor for repair.
Remark
In cold temperatures, if the machine travel speed is not normal, thoroughly perform the warming-up operation.
In addition, if the undercarriage is clogged with mud and the machine travel speed is not normal, remove the
soil and mud from the undercarriage.
PC200/220LC-8 2-153
OPERATION
Stopping Machine
Avoid stopping suddenly. Give yourself ample room when stopping.
1. Put the left and right travel levers (1) in the neutral position, then
stop the machine.
2-154 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
STEERING THE MACHINE
Steering
Before operating the travel levers, check the direction of the track frame (the position of the sprocket). If
the sprocket is at the rear, the machine moves in the reverse direction to the operation of the travel levers.
Use the travel levers to change direction.

Avoid sudden changes of direction as much as possible. Especially when
performing counter-rotation (spin turn), stop the machine before turning.
Operate two travel levers (1) as follows.
Steering the Machine when Stopped

When turning to the left:
Push the right travel lever forward to turn to the left when traveling
forward; and pull it back to turn left when traveling in reverse.
(A): Forward left turn
(B): Reverse left turn
Remark
When turning to the right, operate the left travel lever in the
same way.
PC200/220LC-8 2-155
OPERATION
Changing Direction of the Machine

When turning to the left:
If the left travel lever is returned to the neutral position, the machine will
turn to the left.
(A): Forward left turn
(B): Reverse left turn
Remark
When turning to the right, operate the right travel lever in the
same way.
Counter-Rotation Turn (Spin Turn)

When using counter-rotation (spin turn) to turn left, pull the left travel
lever back and push the right travel lever forward.
Remark
When using counter-rotation to turn right, pull the right travel
lever back and push the left travel lever forward.
2-156 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
SWINGING
• The tail of the machine extends outside the tracks. Before

operating the swing, check that the area around the machine is
safe.
• If the lever is operated when the engine speed has been

lowered by the auto-deceleration function, the engine speed
will suddenly rise, operate the levers carefully.
1. Before starting the swing operation, turn swing lock switch (1) OFF
and check that swing lock monitor (2) has gone out.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
2. Operate left work equipment control lever (3) to swing the upper
structure.
(A): Left swing

(B): Right swing
3. When not using the swing, turn swing lock switch (1) ON. Check
that swing lock monitor (2) lights up.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
PC200/220LC-8 2-157
OPERATION
WORK EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND OPERATIONS
If the lever is operated when the engine speed has been lowered by the auto-deceleration function, the
engine speed will suddenly rise, operate the levers carefully.
Use the control levers to operate the work equipment.

Note that when the levers are released, they return to the HOLD position and the work equipment is held in that position.
The work equipment is operated by the left and right work equipment control levers. The left work equipment control lever
operates the arm and swing, and the right work equipment control lever operates the boom and bucket.
The movements of the lever and work equipment are as shown in the diagrams on the right. When the levers are released, they
automatically return to the neutral position and the work equipment is held in place.
• If the work equipment control levers are returned to the neutral position when the machine is stopped, even if the fuel
control dial is set to FULL, the auto-deceleration mechanism will act to reduce the engine speed to a mid-range speed.
Remark
With this machine, an accumulator is installed in the operating circuit, if less than 15 seconds has passed since
the engine was stopped, when the starting switch is turned to the ON position even with the engine stopped, it
is possible to operate the levers to lower work equipment to the ground.
In addition, this operation can also be used to release the remaining pressure in the hydraulic cylinder circuit or
to lower the boom after the machine has been loaded onto a trailer.
Arm operation
Move the left work equipment control lever to the front or rear to operate
the arm.
Swing operation
Move the left work equipment control lever to the left or right to swing
the upper structure.
2-158 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Boom operation
Move the right work equipment control lever to the front or rear to
operate the boom.
Bucket operation
Move the right work equipment control lever to the left or right to operate
the bucket.
PC200/220LC-8 2-159
OPERATION
WORKING MODE
Working Mode Switch

Use working mode selector switch (1) to select the working mode that matches the operating conditions or purpose. This will
make it possible to carry out operations efficiently.
Use the following procedure to select the most efficient working mode.
When the starting switch is turned ON, the working mode is set to the mode that was in operation when the starting switch was
last turned OFF.
Use the working mode switch to set the mode to the most efficient mode
to match the type of work.
Working Applicable operations

mode
Normal digging or loading operations
P mode
(operations with emphasis on production)
Normal digging or loading operations
E mode (operations with emphasis on fuel consumption)
L mode Aligning position (fine control operations)
B mode Breaker operations
Operations with the crusher or other
ATT mode double-acting action attachment
Remark
If breaker operations are carried out in a mode other than the breaker mode, there is danger of breakage of the
hydraulic equipment. Do not carry out breaker operations in any mode except the breaker mode.
1. If working mode selector switch (1) is pressed, the working mode
selection screen is displayed on the monitor.
2-160 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
2. Press switches F3 or F4 at the bottom of the screen or the working
mode selector switch to select the appropriate mode.
3. After selecting the desired mode, press switch F6 to accept the

change. The screen returns to the standard screen.
If switch F5 is pressed, the screen returns to the standard screen
without changing the mode.
• If a working mode is selected, and nothing is done for five

seconds, the selected working mode is automatically accepted
and the screen returns to the standard screen.
• If a working mode is selected and working mode switch (1) is
kept pressed, the selected mode is accepted and the screen
returns to the standard screen.
• If the breaker mode is selected, “Really Set Breaker Mode?” is

displayed on the screen.
To set to the breaker mode, press switch F6.
If switch F5 is pressed, the screen returns to the working mode
selection screen.
One-Touch Power Max. Switch

The one-touch power max. switch can be used during operations to
increase the power. Make effective use of this function whenever
necessary in combination with the working mode.
• Press the left knob switch and keep it pressed. The power is
increased as long as the switch is being pressed. However, the
increased power is automatically canceled after 8.5 seconds.
• This function is not actuated when the working mode is set to L
mode, B mode, or ATT mode.
PC200/220LC-8 2-161
OPERATION
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS
If it is necessary to operate the work equipment control lever when the machine is traveling, stop the
machine, then operate the control lever.
If any lever is operated when the auto-deceleration is being actuated, the engine speed will suddenly
increase, so be careful when operating.
Operations Using Swing Force

Do not use the swing force to compact soil or break objects. This is not
only dangerous, but will also drastically reduce the life of the machine.
Operations Using Travel Force

Do not dig the bucket into the ground and use the travel force to carry out
excavation. This will damage the machine or work equipment.
Prohibition of Operations Using Hydraulic Cylinders to Stroke

Ends
If the work equipment is used with the cylinder rod operated to its stroke
end, and given impact by some external force, the hydraulic cylinders
will be damaged, causing personal injury. Avoid operations with the
hydraulic cylinder fully retracted or fully extended.
2-162 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Operations Using Bucket Dropping Force
Do not use the dropping force of the machine for digging, or use the
dropping force of the bucket as a pickaxe, breaker, or pile driver. This
will drastically reduce the life of the machine.
Operations Using Machine Dropping Force

Do not use the dropping force of the machine for digging.
Digging Hard Rocky Ground

Do not attempt to directly excavate hard rocky ground with the work
equipment. It is better to excavate it after breaking up by some other
means. This will not only save the machine from damage but will make
for better economy.
Sudden Lever Shifting High Speed Travel
1. Never carry out sudden lever shifting as this may cause sudden
starting.
2. Avoid sudden lever shifting from forward (A) to reverse (B) (or from
reverse (B) to forward (A)).
3. Avoid sudden lever shifting change such as sudden stopping from

near top speed (lever release operation).
Long-Time Continuous Travel Operations

Do not travel continuously at high speed for 1.5 hours or more. The
lubricating oil inside the track rollers and final drive will rise to a high
temperature, and there is danger that this will cause damage to the oil seal
or leakage of oil.
When traveling continuously for a long time, stop the machine for 30
minutes every 1.5 hours to allow the lubricating oil inside the track
rollers and final drive to cool down.
PC200/220LC-8 2-163
OPERATION
GENERAL OPERATION INFORMATION
Traveling
Traveling over boulders, tree stumps, or other obstacles will cause a big
shock to the chassis (and in particular to the tracks), and this will cause
damage to the machine. For this reason, always remove any obstacles or
travel around them, or take other steps to avoid traveling over such
obstacles as far as possible.
If there is no way to avoid traveling over an obstacle, reduce the travel
speed, keep the work equipment close to the ground, and try to travel so
that the center of the track passes over the obstacle.
High Speed Travel

On uneven roadbeds such as rock beds or uneven roads with large rocks,
travel at Lo speed. When traveling at high speed, set the idler in the
forward direction.
Press travel speed selector switch (1) to switch the travel speed. The
travel speed (Lo, Mi, Hi) is displayed on pilot monitor display portion
(2).
2-164 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Permissible Water Depth

Do not drive the machine in water deeper than the center of carrier roller
(1).
Supply grease to the parts which have been under water for a long time
until the used grease is projected out of the bearings (around the bucket
pin, in particular).
Remark
When driving the machine out of water, if the angle of the
slope is more than 15°, the rear of the upper structure will go
under water. If this happens, the engine fan may scoop up
water and this may lead to breakage of the fan. Be extremely
careful when driving the machine out of water.
PC200/220LC-8 2-165
OPERATION
TRAVELING ON SLOPES
• Turning or operating the work equipment when working on

slopes may cause the machine to lose it balance and turn over,
so avoid such operations.
It is particularly dangerous to swing downhill when the bucket
is loaded.
If such operations have to be performed, pile soil to make a
platform (A) on the slope so the machine is kept horizontal
during operation.
• Do not travel up or down steep slopes. There is a danger that

the machine may turn over.
• When traveling, raise the bucket approximately 20 to 30 cm

(8 to 12 in) from the ground.
Do not travel downhill in reverse.
• Never turn on slopes or travel across slopes.

Always go down to a flat place to perform these operations. It
may be longer, but it will ensure safety.
• Always operate or travel in such a way that it is possible to

stop safely at any time if the machine slips or becomes
unstable.
• When traveling uphill, if the shoes slip or it is impossible to

travel uphill using only the force of the tracks, do not use the
pulling force of the arm to help the machine travel uphill. There
is danger that the machine may turn over.
1. When traveling down steep hills, use the travel lever and fuel control
dial to keep the travel speed low. When traveling down a steep hill of
more than 15°, set the work equipment to the posture shown in the
diagram on the right, and lower the engine speed.
2-166 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
2. When traveling up a steep hill of more than 15°, set the work
equipment to the posture shown in the diagram on the right.
• When traveling up a steep slope, extend the work equipment to

the front to improve the balance, keep the work equipment
approximately 20 to 30 cm (8 to 12 in) above the ground, and
travel at low speed.
Traveling Downhill
Put the travel lever in the neutral position. This will cause the brake to be automatically applied.
Engine Stopped on Slope
If the engine stops when traveling uphill, move the travel levers to the neutral position, lower the bucket to the ground, stop the
machine, then start the engine again.
Cab Doors on Slope
• If the engine stops when the machine is on a slope, never use the left work equipment control lever to carry out swing
operations. The upper structure will swing under its own weight.
• Do not open or close the door when the machine is on a slope. The operating effort may suddenly change. Always keep
the door locked in position when it is open and when it is closed.
PC200/220LC-8 2-167
OPERATION
ESCAPE FROM MUD

Always operate carefully to avoid getting stuck in mud. If the machine does get stuck in mud, do as follows to get the machine
out.
Track on One Side Stuck

Remark
When using the boom or arm to raise the machine, always
have the bottom of the bucket in contact with the ground. The
angle between the boom and arm should be 90° to 110°.
The same applies when using the bucket installed in the
reverse direction.
When only one side is stuck in mud, use the bucket to raise the track, then
lay boards or logs and drive the machine out.
Tracks on Both Sides Stuck

When the tracks on both sides are stuck in mud and they slip, making it
impossible for the machine to move, lay boards or logs as explained
above, and dig the bucket into the ground in front. Then pull in the arm as
in normal digging operations and put the travel levers in the
FORWARD position to pull the machine out.
2-168 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS
In addition to the following, it is possible to further increase the range of applications by using various attachments.
Backhoe Work
A backhoe is suitable for excavating areas that are lower than the
machine.
When the condition of the machine is as shown in the diagram on the
right (angle between [bucket cylinder and link] and [arm cylinder and
arm] is 90°), the maximum excavation force is obtained from the pushing
force of each cylinder.
When excavating, use this angle effectively to optimize your working
efficiency.
The range for excavating with the arm is from a 45° angle away from the
machine to a 30° angle towards the machine.
There may be some differences depending on the excavation depth, but
try to stay within the above range rather than operating the cylinder to the
end of its stroke.
Shovel Work
A shovel is suitable for excavating at a position higher than the machine.
Shovel work is performed by attaching the bucket in the reverse
direction.
Ditching Work
Ditching work can be performed efficiently by attaching a bucket which
matches the digging operation and then setting the tracks parallel to the
line of the ditch to be excavated.
To excavate a wide ditch, first dig both sides and then finally remove the
center portion.
PC200/220LC-8 2-169
OPERATION
Loading Work
In places where the swing angle is narrow, work efficiency can be
enhanced by locating the dump truck in a place easily visible to the
operator.
Loading is easier and capacity greater if you begin from the front of the
dump truck body than if loading is done from the side.
2-170 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
BUCKET REPLACEMENT AND INVERSION
• When pins are knocked in with a hammer, pieces of metal may fly and cause serious injury.
When carrying out this operation, always wear goggles, hard hat, gloves, and other protective equipment.
• When the bucket is removed, place it in a stable condition.
• If pins are hit with a strong force, there is a hazard that the pin may fly out and injure people in the surrounding
area. Make sure that there is no one in the surrounding area before starting the operation.
• When removing the pins, do not stand behind the bucket. In addition, be extremely careful not to put your foot
under the bucket while standing at the side for the work.
• When removing or inserting pins, be extremely careful not to get your fingers caught.
• Never insert your fingers into the pin holes when aligning the holes.
Stop the machine on a firm and flat surface and do the work. When performing joint work, appoint a lead and follow that
person's instructions and signals.
Replacement
1. Place the bucket in contact with a flat surface.
Remark
When removing the pins, place the bucket so that it is in light
contact with the ground.
If the bucket is lowered strongly to the ground, the resistance
will be increased and it will be difficult to remove the pins.
Remark
After removing the pins, make sure that mud or sand does not
get on them. Dust seals are fitted at both ends of the bushings,
be careful not to damage them.
2. Remove the double nut on the stopper bolt for arm pin (A) and link
pin (B), remove the bolt, pull out arm pin (A) and link pin (B), and
then remove the bucket.
3. Align the arm (5) with holes (1) of the replacement bucket and the
link (6) with holes (2), then insert grease-coated pins (A) and (B)
into hole (1) and hole (2) respectively.
PC200/220LC-8 2-171
OPERATION
Remark
When installing the bucket, for arm pin portion (A), fit O-ring
(3) to bucket (4) in the position shown in the diagram on the
right. After inserting the pin, fit it in the standard groove.
For link pin portion (B), install the bucket with O-ring (3) fitted
in the standard groove.
4. Install the stopper bolts and nuts for each pin, then grease the pin.
Remark
Lubricate with grease thoroughly until the grease comes out
from the end face.
When replacing the bucket, replace the dust seal if it has been
damaged. If a damaged seal is used without being replaced,
sand and dirt may enter the pin portion and cause abnormal
wear of the pin.
2-172 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Inversion
1. Place the bucket in contact with a flat surface.
Remark
When removing the pins, place the bucket so that it is in light
contact with the ground.
If the bucket is lowered strongly to the ground, the resistance
will be increased and it will be difficult to remove the pins.
Remark
After removing the pins, make sure that mud or sand does not
get on them. Dust seals are fitted at both ends of the
bushings, be careful not to damage them.
2. Remove the double nut on the stopper bolt for arm pin (A) and link
pin (B), remove the bolt, pull out arm pin (A) and link pin (B), and
then remove the bucket.
3. Turn the removed bucket. After turning the bucket, align the arm (5)
with link mounting hole (1), then align the link with arm mounting
hole (2) and install.
4. Align the arm with holes (1) of the replacement bucket and the link
with holes (2), then insert grease-coated pins (A) and (B) into hole
(1) and hole (2) respectively.
Remark
When reversing, do not install an O-ring. Keep the O-ring in a
safe place until using it next.
5. Install the stopper bolts and nuts for each pin, then grease the pin.
PC200/220LC-8 2-173
OPERATION
Remark
Lubricate with grease thoroughly until the grease comes out
from the end face.
When replacing the bucket, replace the dust seal if it has been
damaged. If a damaged seal is used without being replaced,
sand and dirt may enter the pin portion and cause abnormal
wear of the pin.
2-174 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
PARKING MACHINE
• Avoid stopping suddenly. Give yourself ample room when

stopping.
• When stopping the machine, select flat hard ground and avoid
dangerous places.
If it is unavoidably necessary to park the machine on a slope,
insert blocks underneath the track shoes. As an additional
safety measure, thrust the bucket into the ground.
• If the control lever is touched by accident, the machine may

move suddenly, and this may lead to a serious accident.
Before leaving the operator's compartment, always set the
lock lever (3) securely to LOCK position.
1. Put left and right travel levers (1) in the neutral position.
The machine stops.
PC200/220LC-8 2-175
OPERATION
2. Turn fuel control dial (2) to lower the engine speed to low idle.
3. Lower the bucket horizontally until the bottom touches the ground.
4. Set lock lever (3) in the LOCK position (L).
5. Check the engine cooling water temperature and engine oil pressure
with the machine monitor.
• If the coolant temperature gauge is in the red range, allow it to

cool until the indicator enters the green range, then stop the
engine. For details of the inspection and action to take, See
“TROUBLES AND ACTIONS” on page 2-196.
• If the engine oil pressure monitor lights up, stop the engine
immediately. For details of the inspection and action to take, See
“TROUBLES AND ACTIONS” on page 2-196.
6. Stop the engine. For details on the procedure for stopping the engine, See “STOPPING THE ENGINE” on page 2-150.
2-176 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
MACHINE INSPECTION AFTER DAILY WORK

1. Walk around the machine and check the work equipment, machine exterior, and undercarriage, also check for any leakage
of oil or coolant. If any problems are found, repair them.
2. Fill the fuel tank.
3. Check the engine compartment for paper and debris. Clean out any paper and debris to avoid a fire hazard.
4. Remove any mud affixed to the undercarriage.
LOCKING
Always lock the following places.
1. Operator's cab door (1)
Always close the window.
2. Fuel tank filler port (2)
3. Engine hood (3)
4. Battery box cover (4)
5. Left side door of the machine (5)
6. Right side door of the machine (6)
7. Hydraulic tank filler port (7)
8. Air conditioner FRESH filter intake port (8)
Remark
Use the starting switch key to lock and unlock all these places.
TRANSPORTATION
When transporting the machine, observe all related laws and regulations,
and be careful to assure safety.
Transportation Procedure
Select the method of transportation to match the weight and dimensions given in “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 4-2.
Note that the weight and dimensions given in “SPECIFICATIONS” may differ according to the type of shoe or arm, or other
attachments.
Please consult your Komatsu distributor for details of the procedure for transporting machines with a protective guard installed
for the operator's cab.
PC200/220LC-8 2-177
OPERATION
Loading and Unloading with Trailer
Always obey the following when loading or unloading the machine from a trailer.
• Select firm, level ground when loading or unloading the machine.
Maintain a safe distance from the edge of the road.
• Always turn the auto-deceleration switch OFF (cancel).

If the auto-deceleration switch is left ON, the machine may suddenly start moving.
• Always set the travel speed switch to low speed (Lo), run the engine at low idling, and operate the machine slowly
when loading or unloading.
• In cold areas, carry out the warming-up operation thoroughly and make sure that the engine speed is stable
before carrying out the loading or unloading operation.
• Never correct your steering on the ramps. There is danger that the machine may tip over.
If necessary, drive off the ramps or back on to the trailer and correct the direction.
• It is dangerous to use the work equipment for loading and unloading operations. Always use ramps.
• When on the ramps, do not operate any lever except the travel lever.
• The center of gravity of the machine will change suddenly at the joint between the ramps and the trailer, and there
is danger of the machine losing its balance.
Travel slowly over this point.
• If it is necessary to swing the work equipment on the trailer platform, the footing is unstable, so be extremely
careful that the machine does not tip over.
If the work equipment is installed to the machine, pull the work equipment in, and operate slowly to prevent the
machine from losing its balance.
• Position a flagman to give guidance to prevent the machine from coming off the ramps and to ensure safety in the
operation.
Always observe the following regarding the ramps and trailer platform.
• Use ramps with ample width, length, thickness, and strength and install them at a maximum slope of 15°.
When using piled soil, compact the piled soil fully to prevent the slope face from collapsing.
• Clean the machine tracks and ramps before starting in order to prevent the machine from slipping on the ramps.
There is danger of the machine slipping if there is water, snow, grease, oil, or ice on the ramp surface.
2-178 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
When loading or unloading, always use ramps or a platform. Proceed as follows:
Loading
1. Load and unload on firm level ground only.
Maintain a safe distance from the edge of a road.
2. Apply the trailer brakes securely, then put blocks (1) under the tires
to prevent the trailer from moving.
• Set left and right ramps (2) parallel to each other and equally
spaced to the left and right of center (3) of the trailer. Make
angle of installation (4) a maximum of 15°. If the ramps bend a
large amount under the weight of the machine, put blocks under
the ramps to prevent them from bending.
3. Turn the travel speed selector switch to low speed travel (Lo lamp
lights up).
• Press travel speed selector switch (5) to switch the travel speed.
The travel speed (Lo, Mi, Hi) is displayed on pilot monitor
display portion (6).
4. Turn auto-deceleration switch (7) OFF and set the fuel control dial to
run the engine at low speed.
• Each time auto-deceleration switch (7) is pressed, it switches

OFF → ON → OFF.
• When auto-deceleration switch (7) is turned OFF, pilot monitor
display (8) goes out.
5. Turn the swing lock switch ON to apply the swing lock.
• When the swing lock switch is turned to the ON position, pilot

monitor display (9) lights up.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
PC200/220LC-8 2-179
OPERATION
6. If the machine is equipped with work equipment, set the work
equipment at the front, and travel forward to load it; if it has no work
equipment, travel in reverse to load it.
Follow instructions and signals of a conductor particularly when
traveling in reverse.
7. Before moving onto the ramps, make sure that the machine is
positioned in a straight line with the ramps and that the centerline of
the machine matches that of the trailer.
Align the direction of travel with the ramps and travel slowly.
Lower the work equipment as far as possible without causing
interference.
When on the ramps, operate only the travel lever. Do not operate any
other lever.
8. When loading or unloading a machine with the work equipment

installed, at the point where the tracks are on both the ramps and the
ground surface, turn the swing lock switch OFF, then swing the
upper structure slowly 180°.
After doing that, drive slowly in reverse and load the machine onto
the trailer.
9. Turn the swing lock switch ON to lock the swing lock.
• When the swing lock switch is turned to the ON position, pilot

monitor display (9) lights up.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
2-180 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
10. When the machine travels over the rear wheels of the trailer, it
becomes unstable, drive slowly and carefully. (Never operate the
steering.)
11. At the moment the machine passes the rear wheels, it tilts forward,
be careful not to let the work equipment hit the trailer body. Drive
the machine forward to the specified position, then stop the machine.
12. Lower the work equipment on top of wooden blocks.
PC200/220LC-8 2-181
OPERATION
Securing Machine
Remark
Stow the radio antenna. Reassemble the mirrors so that they
are within the width of the machine.
To prevent damage to the bucket cylinder during
transportation, put a wooden block under the tip of the bucket
link to prevent the bucket cylinder from touching the floor.
Check that the engine hood catch is locked. Hold the grip of
the engine hood and raise it slightly. If it does not open, the
catch is locked.
If the engine hood catch is not locked, there is danger that the
engine hood may open during transportation.
Load the machine onto a trailer as follows:
1. Extend the bucket and arm cylinders fully, then lower the boom slowly.
2. Set the lock lever securely to the LOCK position (L).
3. Stop the engine, then remove the key from the starting switch.
4. Close all doors, windows, and covers.

Lock the covers, caps, and doors fitted with locks.
5. Place blocks under both ends of the tracks to prevent the machine
from moving during transportation, and secure the machine with
chains or wire rope of suitable strength.
Be particularly careful to secure the machine in position so it does
not slip to the side.
2-182 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Stowing Radio Antenna

• Loosen bolt (2) of radio antenna (1) at the rear of the cab, lower the
antenna, then tighten bolt (2) again to secure radio antenna (1) in
position.
• When unloading the machine from the trailer and operating it, follow
the opposite procedure from stowing to set radio antenna (1) vertical,
then secure it in position with bolt (2).
Rearview Mirrors
The mirrors are at the positions shown in the diagram on the right.
After installing the mirrors, be sure to adjust them, referring to “Rear-

view Mirrors” on page 2-183.
If they are damaged, or are to be removed for shipment, or are to be

installed again, use the following procedure.
PC200/220LC-8 2-183
OPERATION
Removal
• Mirrors A, B
1. Loosen mounting bolt (2), then remove mirror (1) from support (3).
2. Loosen bolt (4) and remove support (3) and clamp (5) from the
handrail.
• Mirrors C, D
3. Loosen locknut (2), then remove mirror (1) from support (3).
4. Remove bolt (4), then remove support (3) from the machine.
Installation
• Mirrors A, B
1. Install support (3) and clamp (5) to the handrail, then tighten with
bolt (4).
2. Install mirror (1) to support (3), then tighten lock bolt (2).
• Mirrors C, D
3. Install support (3) to the machine with bolt (4).
4. Install mirror (1) to support (3),then tighten locknut (2).
2-184 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Unloading
1. Load and unload on firm level ground only. Maintain a safe distance
from the edge of a road.
2. Apply the trailer brakes securely, then put blocks (1) under the tires
to prevent the trailer from moving.
• Set left and right ramps (2) parallel to each other and equally
spaced to the left and right of center (3) of the trailer. Make
angle of installation (4) a maximum of 15°. If the ramps bend a
large amount under the weight of the machine, put blocks under
the ramps to prevent them from bending.
3. Remove the chains and wire ropes fastening the machine.
4. Start the engine.

Warm the engine up.
5. Set the lock lever to FREE position (F).
6. Turn the travel speed selector switch to low speed travel (Lo lamp
lights up).
• Press travel speed selector switch (5) to switch the travel speed.
The travel speed (Lo, Mi, Hi) is displayed on pilot monitor
display portion (6).
7. Turn auto-deceleration switch (7) OFF and operate the fuel control
dial to set the engine speed to low idling.
• Each time auto-deceleration switch (7) is pressed, it switches

OFF ➡ ON ➡ OFF in turn.
• When auto-deceleration switch (7) is turned OFF, pilot monitor
display (8) goes out.
PC200/220LC-8 2-185
OPERATION
8. Raise the work equipment, pull in the arm under the boom, then
move the machine slowly.
9. When the machine is horizontal on top of the rear wheels of the

trailer, stop the machine.
Remark
When unloading the machine, always keep the arm and boom
at an angle of 90° - 110°.
If the machine is unloaded with the arm pulled in, it will cause
damage to the machine.
When moving onto the ramps, do not thrust the bucket into the
ground. This will cause damage to the hydraulic cylinders.
10. When moving from the rear of the trailer on to the ramps, set the angle of the arm and boom to 90° to 110°, lower the
bucket to the ground, then move the machine slowly.
11. When moving down the ramps, operate the boom and arm slowly to
lower the machine carefully until it is completely off the ramps.
2-186 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
LONG DISTANCE TRANSPORT MODE
Normal Mode Display
Long Distance Transport Mode Display
The Long Distance Transport Mode must be turned off before connection
to KOMTRAX. Do this with the following steps.
1. Operation of switches.
While pressing [4], preform the operation in order.
[4] + [1] -> [3]
PC200/220LC-8 2-187
OPERATION
2. Select “KOMTRAX” setting on the service screen.
3. Select “04 Exit Shipping Mode”.
4. Exit Shipping Mode.

Do you want to exit shipping mode?
Select F6.
5. Exit Shipping Mode.

Do you really want to exit?
Select F6.
6. Since Long Distance Transport mode was cancelled, the display

disappears.
2-188 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
LIFTING MACHINE
• The operator carrying out the lifting operation using a crane must be a properly qualified crane operator.
• Never raise the machine with any worker on it.
• Always make sure that the wire rope is of ample strength for the weight of this machine.
• When lifting, keep the machine horizontal.
• When carrying out lifting operations, set the lock lever to the LOCK position to prevent the machine from moving
unexpectedly.
• Never enter the area under or around a raised machine.
Never try to lift the machine in any posture other than the posture given in the procedure below or using
lifting equipment other than in the procedure below.
There is a hazard that the machine may lose its balance.
Remark
The lifting procedure applies to machines with standard specifications.
The method of lifting differs according to attachments and options actually installed on the machine. For the
proper lifting procedures, contact your Komatsu distributor.
Standard Specification Machine

For details of the weight, See “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 4-2.
When lifting the machine, carry out the operation on flat ground as
follows.
1. Start the engine, then the swing the upper structure so that the work
equipment will be on the side of sprocket (1).
2. Extend the bucket cylinder and arm cylinder fully, then lower the
work equipment to the ground as shown in the diagram on the right
using the boom cylinder.
3. Set the lock lever securely to the LOCK position (L).
4. Stop the engine, check that there is nothing around the operator's
compartment, then get off the machine.
Close the cab door and front glass securely.
PC200/220LC-8 2-189
OPERATION
5. Pass wire ropes between the 1st and 2nd track rollers from the front
and between the 1st and 2nd track rollers from the rear.
However, for machines equipped with a full roller guard for the track
roller, pass the wire rope under the track.
6. Set the lifting angle (A) of the wire rope to 30° to 40°, then lift the
machine slowly.
7. After the machine comes off the ground, check the hook condition
and the lifting posture, and then lift slowly.
2-190 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
Cold Weather Operation Information

If the temperature becomes low, it becomes difficult to start the engine, and the coolant may freeze, so do as follows.
Fuel and Lubricants
Remark
Be aware that when shipping new machines during winter months that changing engine oil to a winter oil, from
the factory filled oil, is necessary. (Factory fill is 15W-40) Winter oils such as 0W-30, 5W-40 or 10W-30
viscosity grade should be used. Changing oil to a lower viscosity in extremely cold temperatures will prevent
error code “B@BAZG: Engine Oil Pressure, Low - Error”.
Change to fuel and oil with low viscosity for all components. For details of the specified viscosity, See “RECOMMENDED
FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT” on page 3-9.
Cooling System Coolant
• Antifreeze is toxic. Be careful not to get it into your eyes or on your skin. If it should get into your eyes or on your
skin, wash it off with large amounts of fresh water and see a doctor at once.
• When changing the coolant or when handling coolant containing antifreeze that has been drained when repairing
the radiator, please contact your Komatsu distributor or request a specialist company to carry out the operation.
Antifreeze is toxic. Do not let it flow into drainage ditches or spray it onto the ground surface.
• Antifreeze is flammable. Do not bring any flame close. Do not smoke when handling antifreeze.
Remark
Use Komatsu Supercoolant wherever available, or use permanent type antifreeze coolant.
Never use methanol, ethanol, or propanol-based antifreeze.
Do not use any water leakage prevention agent, either alone, or in combination with antifreeze.
Do not mix one brand of antifreeze with a different brand.
When using Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC), there is no need to use a corrosion resistor.
For details of the antifreeze mixture when changing the coolant, See “Clean Inside of Cooling System” on page 3-29.
PC200/220LC-8 2-191
OPERATION
Battery
• The battery generates flammable gas. Do not bring fire or sparks near the battery.
• Battery electrolyte is dangerous. If it gets in your eyes or on your skin, wash it off with a large amount of water
and consult a doctor.
• Battery electrolyte dissolves paint. If it gets on the bodywork, wash it off immediately with water.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source.
There is danger that the battery may explode.
• Battery electrolyte is toxic. Do not let it flow into drainage ditches or spray it on to the ground surface.
When the ambient temperature drops, the capacity of the battery will also drop. If the battery charge ratio is low, the battery
electrolyte may freeze. Maintain the battery charge as close as possible to 100%. Insulate it against cold temperature to ensure
the machine can be started easily the next morning.
Remark
Measure the specific gravity and calculate the charging rate from the following conversion table.
• As the battery capacity drastically drops in low temperatures, cover or remove the battery from the machine, store the
battery in a warm place, and install it again the next morning.
• If the electrolyte level is low, add distilled water in the morning before beginning work. Do not add water after the day's
work to prevent diluted electrolyte in the battery from freezing during the night.
2-192 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
AFTER DAILY WORK COMPLETION
Performing idle-running of the tracks is dangerous, stay well away from the tracks.
To prevent mud, water, or the undercarriage from freezing and making it impossible for the machine to move on the following
morning, observe the following precautions.
• Remove all the mud and water from the machine body. In particular, wipe the hydraulic cylinder rods clean to prevent
damage to the seal caused by mud, dirt, or drops of water on the rod from getting inside the seal.
• Park the machine on hard, dry ground.
If this is impossible, park the machine on boards.
The boards prevent the tracks from freezing to the ground, and allow the machine to be moved the next morning.
• Open the drain valve and drain any water collected in the fuel system to prevent it from freezing.
• Fill the fuel tank to capacity. This minimizes moisture condensation in the tank when the temperature drops.
• After operation in water or mud, remove water from undercarriage as described below to extend undercarriage service
life.
1. Swing 90° with engine at low idle and bring the work equipment to
the side of the track.
2. Jack up the machine until the track is raised slightly from the ground.
Rotate the track under no load. Repeat this procedure on both the left
and right sides.
AFTER COLD WEATHER SEASON

When the season changes and the weather becomes warmer, do as follows.
• Replace the fuel and oil for all parts with oil of the viscosity specified.
For details, See “RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT” on page 3-9.
PC200/220LC-8 2-193
OPERATION
LONG TERM STORAGE
Before Storage
Remark
When storing the machine (one month or more), set the
machine in the posture shown in the diagram on the right to
protect the cylinder rod (To prevent rusting of the cylinder rod).
When putting the machine in storage for a long time (more than one month), do as follows.
• Clean and wash all parts, then store the machine indoors. If the machine has to be stored outdoors, select level ground and
cover the machine with canvas.
• Completely fill the fuel tank. This prevents moisture from collecting.
• Lubricate and change the oil before storage.
• Coat the exposed portion of the hydraulic cylinder piston rod with grease.
• Disconnect the negative terminals of the battery and cover it or remove it from the machine and store it separately.
• Set the attachment control pedal to the lock position on machines ready for attachments.
• Set the stop valve to the LOCK position on machines ready for attachments. Install the blind plugs to the elbows.
For details of the LOCK and FREE positions of the stop valve, see“Attachment Removal” on page 5-17, “Attachment
Installation” on page 5-19
• To prevent corrosion, be sure to fill the cooling system with Supercoolant (AF-NAC) or permanent type antifreeze
(density between 30% and 68%).
During Storage
If it is necessary to perform the rust-prevention operation while the machine is indoors, open the doors
and windows to improve ventilation and prevent gas poisoning.
• During storage, operate and move the machine for a short distance once a month so that a new film of oil will coat moving
parts. At the same time, also charge the battery.
• When operating the work equipment, wipe off all the grease from the hydraulic cylinder rods.
• If the machine is equipped with an air conditioner, operate the air conditioner for three to five minutes once a month to
lubricate all parts of the air conditioner compressor. Always run the engine at low idle when doing this. In addition, check
the refrigerant level twice a year.
2-194 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
After Storage
Remark
If the machine has been stored without carrying out the monthly rust-prevention operation, consult your
Komatsu distributor before using it.
When using the machine after long-term storage, do as follows before using it.
• Wipe off the grease from the hydraulic cylinder rods.
• Add oil and grease at all lubrication points.
• When the machine is stored for a long period, moisture in the air will mix with the oil. Check the oil before and after
starting the engine. If there is water in the oil, change all the oil.
Starting Machine after Long-Term Storage

When starting the engine after long-term storage, carry out the warming-up operation thoroughly. For details, See “Engine
Warm Up” on page 2-139.
PC200/220LC-8 2-195
OPERATION
TROUBLES AND ACTIONS
Running out of Fuel

When starting after running out of fuel, fill with fuel and bleed the air from the fuel system before stating.
For details on bleeding the air, see “Replace Fuel Pre-Filter Cartridge” on page 3-62, “Replace Fuel Main Filter Cartridge” on
page 3-75.
Procedure for Bleeding Air

1. Loosen the knob of feed pump (1), pull it out, then pump it in and out
until the movement becomes heavy.
Remark
It is not necessary to remove the plug at the top of the fuel
pre-filter and fuel main filter.
2. Push in the knob of feed pump (1) and tighten it.
3. Turn the key in the starting switch to the START position and start
the engine.
When doing this, do not crank the starting motor continuously for
more than 20 seconds. If the engine does not start, wait for at least
two minutes, then try again. Perform this operation a maximum of four times.
Phenomena that are Not Failures

Note that the following phenomena are not failures:
• When the arm control lever is operated to the IN position and the
work equipment is lowered under no load from a high position, the
arm speed will drop momentarily when the arm is more or less at the
vertical position.
• When the bucket is empty and digging operations are carried out
from above, the movement will momentarily become slow when the
bucket teeth are almost perpendicular.
• The bucket or arm will fluctuate by itself during heavy-duty digging
operations.
• When starting or stopping the swing, noise will be emitted from the
brake valve.
• When going down a steep slope at low speed, a noise will be emitted
from the travel motor brake valve.
2-196 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Towing the Machine
Serious injury or death could result if a disabled machine is

towed incorrectly or if there is a mistake in the selection or
inspection of the wire rope.
• Always check that the wire rope used for towing has ample
strength for the weight of the machine being towed.
• Never use a wire rope which has cut strands (A), reduced
diameter (B), or kinks (C). There is danger that the rope may
break during the towing operation.
• Always wear leather gloves when handling wire rope.
• Never tow a machine on a slope.
• During the towing operation, never stand between the towing

machine and the machine being towed.
• Operate the machine slowly and be careful not to apply any

sudden load to the wire rope.
Remark
The permissible pulling power of this machine is as follows.
PC200: 142,000 N (14,600 kgf)
PC220: 168,000 N (17,100 kgf)
Always carry out towing operations within the maximum towing capacity.
• If the machine sinks in mud and cannot get out under its own power,
or if the drawbar pull of the excavator is being used to tow a heavy
object, use a wire rope as shown in the diagram on the right.
• Place pieces of wood between wire ropes and body to prevent
damage to ropes and body.
• Hold the wire rope level and direct it straight to the track frame.
• When towing a machine, travel at a speed of less than 1 km/h for a
distance of only a few meters to a place that is suitable for carrying
out repairs.
This is for use only in emergencies.
PC200/220LC-8 2-197
OPERATION
Lightweight Towing Hole
• Always use shackles.
• Set so that the wire rope is horizontal and facing directly to the front from the track frame.
• Move the machine slowly. Do not apply a sudden load to the wire rope.
There is a hole in the track frame to fit the shackle when towing light
objects.
Permissible towing load: . . . . . PC200 Max. 58,800 N (6,000 kgf)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC220 Max. 78,400 N (8,000 kgf)
Severe Job Condition

When carrying out digging operations in water, if the work equipment mounting pin goes into the water, carry out greasing
every time the operation is carried out.
For heavy-duty operations and deep digging, carry out greasing of the work equipment mounting pins every time before
operation.
After greasing, operate the boom, arm and bucket several times, then grease again.
2-198 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Discharged Battery
• It is dangerous to charge a battery when mounted on a

machine. Make sure that it is removed before charging.
• When checking or handling the battery, stop the engine and

turn the starting switch key to the OFF position.
• The battery generates hydrogen gas, so there is a hazard of

explosion. Do not bring lighted cigarettes near the battery, or
do anything that will cause sparks.
• Battery electrolyte is dilute sulfuric acid, and it will attack your

clothes and skin. If it gets on your clothes or on your skin,
immediately wash it off with a large amount of water. If it gets
in your eyes, wash it out with fresh water and consult a doctor.
• When handling batteries, always wear protective goggles and

rubber gloves.
• When removing the battery, first disconnect the cable from the
ground (normally the negative (-) terminal). When installing,
install the positive (+) terminal first.
If a tool touches the positive terminal and the chassis, there is
danger that it will cause a spark, so be extremely careful.
• If the terminals are loose, there is danger that the defective

contact may generate sparks that will cause an explosion.
• When removing or installing the terminals, check which is the

positive (+) terminal and which is the negative (-) terminal.
Battery Removal and Installation

• Before removing the battery, remove the ground cable (normally connected to the negative (-) terminal).
If any tool touches between the positive terminal and the chassis, there is a hazard of sparks being generated.
• When installing the battery, connect the ground cable last.
• When replacing the battery, secure it with battery hold-down.
Torque battery terminal: . . . . . .9.8 to 14.7 N•m (7.2 to 10.8 lb/ft)
PC200/220LC-8 2-199
OPERATION
Battery Charges
When charging the battery, if the battery is not handled correctly, there is
a hazard that the battery may explode. Always follow the instructions of
“Discharged Battery” on page 2-199 and the instruction manual
accompanying the charger, and do as follows.
• Set the voltage of the charger to match the voltage of the battery to
be charged. If the correct voltage is not selected, the charger may
overheat and cause an explosion.
• Connect the positive (+) charger clip of the charger to the positive
(+) terminal of the battery, then connect the negative (-) charger clip
of the charger to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Be sure to
attach the clips securely.
• Set the charging current to 1/10 of the value of the rated battery capacity; when carrying out rapid charging, set it to less
than the rated battery capacity.
If the charger current is too high, the electrolyte will leak or dry up, and this may cause the battery to catch fire and
explode.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source. There is a
danger that this will ignite the battery electrolyte and cause the battery to explode.
• Do not use or charge the battery if the battery electrolyte level is below the LOWER LEVEL line. This may cause an
explosion. Check the battery electrolyte level periodically and add distilled water to bring the electrolyte level to the
UPPER LEVEL line.
2-200 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Starting Engine with Booster Cables

When starting the engine with a booster cable, do as follows:
Connecting and Disconnecting Booster Cables
• When connecting the cables, never contact the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminals.
• When starting the engine with a booster cable, always wear

safety glasses.
• Be careful not to let the normal machine and problem machine

contact each other. This prevents sparks from generating near
the battery which could ignite the hydrogen gas given off by
the battery. If hydrogen gas explodes, it could cause serious
injury.
• Be careful not to make a mistake when connecting a booster

cable. In the last connection (to the upper structure frame), a
spark will be caused, connect the cable to a spot as far away
from the battery as possible. (Avoid the work equipment,
however, because it is not a good conductor)
• When removing the booster cable, exercise good care so that

the booster cable clips may not contact each other, or they
contact the chassis.
Remark
The starting system for this machine uses 24V. For the normal machine, also use a 24V battery.
The size of the booster cable and clip should be suitable for the battery size.
The battery of the normal machine must be the same capacity as that of the engine to be started.
Check the cables and clips for damage or corrosion.
Make sure that the cables and clips are firmly connected.
Check that the lock levers and parking brake levers of both machine are in the LOCK position.
Check that each lever is in the NEUTRAL position.
PC200/220LC-8 2-201
OPERATION
Booster Cable Connection
Keep the starting switch of the normal machine and problem machine in the OFF position.
Connect the booster cable as follows, in the order of the numbers marked in the diagram.
1. Connect the clip of booster cable (A) to the positive (+) terminal of
battery (C) on the problem machine.
2. Connect the clip at the other end of booster cable (A) to the positive
(+) terminal of battery (D) on the normal machine.
3. Connect the clip of booster cable (B) to the negative (-) terminal of
battery (D) on the normal machine.
4. Connect the other clip of booster cable (B) to the revolving frame (E)
of the problem machine.
Starting the Engine
Always check that the lock lever is set to the LOCK position, regardless of whether the machine is working
normally or has failed. Check also that all the control levers are in the HOLD or neutral position.
1. Make sure the clips are firmly connected to the battery terminals.
2. Start engine of the normal machine and run it at high idle speed.
3. Turn the starting switch of the problem machine to the START position and start the engine.
If the engine doesn't start at first, try again after two minutes or so.
Booster Cable Disconnection

After the engine has started, disconnect booster cables in the reverse order in which they were connected.
1. Remove one clip of booster cable (B) from the revolving frame (E)
of the problem machine.
2. Remove the clip of booster cable (B) from the negative (-) terminal
of battery (D) on the normal machine.
3. Remove the clip of booster cable (A) from the positive (+) terminal
of battery (D) on the normal machine.
4. Remove the clip of booster cable (A) from the positive (+) terminal
of battery (C) on the problem machine.
2-202 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
OTHER TROUBLE
Electrical System
• (_): Always contact your Komatsu distributor when dealing with these items.
• In cases of problems or causes which are not listed below, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
Problem Main causes Remedy

Lamp does not glow brightly even when the • Defective wiring, deterioration • (Check, repair loose terminals,
engine runs at high speed of battery disconnections, replace battery)
Lamp flickers while engine is running • Loose fan belt • (Replace fan belt, Check tension)
Charge level monitor does not go out even • Defective alternator • (Replace)
when engine is running • Defective wiring • (Check, repair)
Abnormal noise is generated from alternator • Defective alternator • (Replace)
• Defective wiring • (Check, repair)
Starting motor does not turn when starting
switch is turned to ON • Defective starting motor • (Replace)
• Insufficient battery charge • Charge
Pinion of starting motor keeps going and out
• Defective safety relay • (Replace)
Starting motor turns engine sluggishly
• Defective starting motor • (Replace)
• Defective wiring, defective ring • (Check, repair)
Starting motor disengages before engine gear pinion
starts
• Defective wiring • (Check, repair)
Engine pre-heating monitor does not light • Defective heater relay • (Replace)
• Defective monitor • (Replace)
Oil pressure monitor does not light up when • Defective monitor • (Replace)
engine is stopped (starting switch at ON
position) • Defective caution lamp switch • (Replace)
• Defective wiring
• (Check, repair)
Outside of electrical heater is not warm • Disconnection in electric
when touched by hand • (Replace)
heater
• (Replace)
• Defective operation of heater
PC200/220LC-8 2-203
OPERATION
Chassis

Speed of travel, swing, boom, arm, bucket • • Add oil to specified level, see CHECK
Lack of hydraulic oil
is slow BEFORE STARTING
• Clogged element in
Pump generates abnormal noise (sucking • Clean, see EVERY 2000 HOURS
hydraulic tank strainer, lack
in air) SERVICE
of oil
• (Check fan belt tension, replace)
• Loose fan belt
• Clean, see EVERY 500 HOURS
• Dirty oil cooler
Excessive rise in hydraulic oil temperature SERVICE
• Add oil to specified level, see CHECK
• Lack of hydraulic oil
BEFORE STARTING
Track comes off • Adjust track tension, see WHEN
• Track too loose
Abnormal wear of sprocket REQUIRED
• Add oil to specified level, CHECK
Boom rises slowly, does not rise • Lack of hydraulic oil
BEFORE STARTING
Does not swing • Swing lock switch still applied • Turn swing lock switch OFF
2-204 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Engine

• Engine oil pan oil level is low
• Add oil to specified level, see CHECK
(sucking in air)
BEFORE STARTING
• Clogged oil filter cartridge
• Replace cartridge, see EVERY 500
• Defective tightening of oil pipe, HOURS SERVICE
Engine oil pressure monitor lights up pipe joint, oil leakage from
• (Check, repair)
damaged point
• Defective engine oil pressure
• (Replace sensor)
sensor
• (Replace monitor)
• Defective monitor
Steam spurts out from top of radiator • Coolant level low, leakage of
(pressure valve) • Check, add coolant, repair, see CHECK
water
BEFORE STARTING
• Loose fan belt
• (Check fan belt tension, replace)
• Dirt or scale accumulated in
• Change coolant, flush inside of cooling
cooling system
system, see WHEN REQUIRED
• Clogged radiator fins or
• Clean or repair, see EVERY 500
damaged fins
Radiator coolant level monitor lights up • HOURS SERVICE
Defective thermostat
• (Replace thermostat)
• Loose radiator filler cap
• Tighten cap or replace packing
(high-altitude operations)
• (Replace sensor)
• Defective coolant level sensor
• (Replace monitor)
• Defective monitor
• Lack of fuel
• Air in fuel system • Add fuel, see CHECK BEFORE
• Defective fuel injection pump or STARTING
defective nozzle • Repair place where air is sucked in, see
Engine does not start when starting • Starting motor cranks engine EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE
motor is turned sluggishly • (Replace pump or nozzle)
• Engine pre-heating monitor does • See ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
not light up • See ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
• Defective compression • (Adjust valve clearance)
• (Defective valve clearance)
• Set oil to specified level, see CHECK
• Too much oil in oil pan
Exhaust gas is white or blue BEFORE STARTING
• Improper fuel
• Change to specified fuel
• Clean or replace, see WHEN
• Clogged air cleaner element
REQUIRED
• Defective nozzle
Exhaust gas occasionally turns black • (Replace nozzle)
• Defective compression
• (See defective compression above)
• Defective turbocharger
• Clean or replace turbocharger
Combustion noise occasionally make • Defective nozzle • (Replace nozzle)
breathing sound
• Change to specified fuel
• Low-grade fuel being used
• Refer to “Radiator coolant level monitor
Abnormal noise generated • Overheating
lights up” as above
(combustion or mechanical) • Damage inside muffler
• Replace muffler
• Excessive valve clearance
• (Adjust valve clearance)
PC200/220LC-8 2-205
OPERATION
Electronic Control System

If an error code appears on the machine monitor display, follow the
countermeasure table as shown below in the self-diagnosis.
Machine Monitoring System
Monitor display Failure mode Action

When emergency pump drive switch is at the up (emergency) position,
E02 Pump control system error normal operations become possible, but have inspection carried out
immediately. (*1)
Have inspection carried out immediately.
E03 Swing brake system error
Engine controller power source

error
E10 Have inspection carried out immediately.
Engine controller drive system
circuit error (engine stopped)
Engine controller system error Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried out
E11 Output reduced to protect engine immediately.
Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried out
E14 Abnormality in throttle system immediately.
If a display of "CA2249" or "CA559" appears in the user code screen and
yet the machine has not run out of fuel, replace both fuel main filter
element and fuel pre-filter element immediately. (*2)
If the display of "CA2249" or "CA559" still does not disappear after the
Engine sensor (coolant replacement, ask your Komatsu distributor for an inspection immediately,
E15 temperature, fuel pressure, oil even though normal operation of the machine is still possible.
pressure) system error
On the other hand, if any other code than "CA2249" and "CA559" appears
in the user code screen, again ask your Komatsu distributor for an
inspection immediately, even though normal operation of the machine is
still possible.
Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried out
E0E Network error immediately.
(*1): For details of handling the emergency pump drive switch, see “Emergency Pump Drive Switch” on page 2-78.
(*2): For the replacement of the fuel main filter element, see “Replace Fuel Main Filter Cartridge” on page 3-75 and for the
replacement of the fuel pre-filter element, see “Replace Fuel Pre-Filter Cartridge” on page 3-62 respectively.
2-206 PC200/220LC-8
OPERATION
Point of Contact to Telephone when Error Occurs
If an error screen is displayed on the monitor, the telephone number for
the point of contact is displayed at the bottom of the error screen.
Remark
If no point of contact telephone number has been registered,
no telephone number is displayed.
It is necessary to register the telephone number, please ask
your Komatsu distributor to carry out the registration.
PC200/220LC-8 2-207
OPERATION
MEMORANDUM
2-208 PC200/220LC-8
3MAINTENANCE
PC200/220LC-8 3-1
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Do not perform any inspection and maintenance operation that is not found in this manual.
Service Meter Reading
Check the service meter reading every day to see if the time has come for any necessary maintenance to be performed.
Komatsu Genuine Replacement Parts
Use Komatsu genuine parts specified in the Parts Book as replacement parts.
Komatsu Genuine Lubricants
Use Komatsu genuine oils and grease. Choose oils and grease with proper viscosities specified for ambient temperature.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Use automobile window washer fluid, and be careful not to let any dirt get into it.
Fresh and Clean Lubricants
Use clean oil and grease. Also, keep the containers of the oil and grease clean. Keep foreign materials away from oil and
grease.
Check Drained Oil and Used Filter
After oil is changed or filters are replaced, check the old oil and filters for metal particles and foreign materials. If large
quantity of metal particles or foreign materials are found, always report to the person in charge, and carry out suitable action.
Fuel Strainer
If your machine is equipped with a fuel strainer, do not remove it while fueling.
Welding Instructions
• Turn off the engine starting switch.
• Do not apply more than 200 V continuously.
• Connect grounding cable within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the area to be welded. If grounding cable is connected near instruments,
connectors, etc., the instruments may malfunction.
• If a seal or bearing happens to come between the part being welded and grounding point, change the grounding point to
avoid such parts.
• Do not use the area around the work equipment pins or the hydraulic cylinders as the grounding point.
Do not Drop Things Inside Machine
• When opening inspection windows or the oil filler port of the tank to carry out inspection, be careful not to drop nuts,
bolts, or tools inside the machine.
If such things are dropped inside the machine, it may cause damage and/or malfunction of the machine, and will lead to
failure. If you drop anything inside the machine, always remove it immediately.
• Do not put unnecessary things in your pockets. Carry only things which are necessary for inspection.
Dusty Jobsite
When working at dusty worksites, do as follows:
• Clean the radiator core, oil cooler core, aftercooler core, fuel cooler core, and condenser core frequently to avoid clogging.
• Replace the fuel filter more frequently.
• Clean electrical components, especially the starting motor and alternator, to avoid accumulation of dust.
• When checking and replacing the oil or filters, move the machine to a place where there is no dust and take care to prevent
dust from entering the system.
Avoid Mixing Lubricants
If a different brand or grade of oil has to be added, drain the old oil and replace all the oil with the new brand or grade of oil.
Never mix different brand or grade of oil.
3-2 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Locking the Inspection Covers
Lock inspection cover securely into position with the lock bar. If inspection or maintenance is performed with inspection cover
not locked in position, there is a danger that it may be suddenly blowing shut by the wind and cause injury to the worker.
Hydraulic System - Air Bleeding
When hydraulic equipment has been repaired or replaced, or the hydraulic piping has been removed and installed again, the air
must be bled from the circuit. For details, See “Bleeding Air from Hydraulic System” on page 3-49.
Hydraulic Hose Installation
• When removing parts at locations where there are O-rings or gasket seals, clean the mounting surface, and replace with
new parts.
When doing this, be careful not to forget to assemble the O-rings and gaskets.
• When installing the hoses, do not twist them or bend them sharply. If they are installed so, their service life will be
extremely shortened and they may be damaged.
Checks After Inspection and Maintenance Works
If you forget to perform the checks after inspection and maintenance, unexpected problems may occur, and this may lead to
serious injury or property damage. Always do the following:
• Checks after operation (with engine stopped)
• Have any inspection and maintenance points been forgotten?
• Have all inspection and maintenance items been performed correctly?
• Have any tools or parts been dropped inside the machine? It is particularly dangerous if parts are dropped inside the
machine and get caught in the lever linkage mechanism.
• Are there any leakage of coolant or oil? Have all nuts and bolts been tightened?
• Checks when operating engine
• For details of the checks when operating the engine, See “Two Workers for Maintenance When Engine Is Running”
on page 1-35 and pay careful attention to safety.
• Are the inspection and maintenance items working properly?
• Is there any leakage of fuel or oil when the engine speed is raised?
Close engine hood securely
When closing the engine hood after inspection or maintenance, make sure that the catch is securely locked. Hold the grip of
the engine hood and raise it slightly. If it does not open, the catch is locked.
If the engine hood catch is not locked, there is danger that the engine hood may open.
PC200/220LC-8 3-3
MAINTENANCE
OUTLINE OF SERVICE
• Always use Komatsu genuine parts for replacement parts, grease or oil.
• When changing the oil or adding oil, do not mix different types of oil. When changing the type of oil, drain all the old oil
and fill completely with the new oil. Always replace the filter at the same time. (There is no problem if the small amount
of oil remaining in the piping mixes with the new oil.)
• Unless otherwise specified, when the machine is shipped from the factory, it is filled with the oil and coolant listed in the
table below.
Item Type
Engine oil pan Engine oil EO15W40DH (Komatsu genuine parts)
Damper case
Swing machinery case Power train oil TO30 (Komatsu genuine parts)
Final drive case
Hydraulic system Hydraulic oil HO46-HM (Komatsu genuine parts)
Radiator Supercoolant AF-NAC (density: 30% or above) (Komatsu genuine parts)
Handling Oil, Fuel, Coolant, and Performing Oil Clinic

Oil
• Oil is used in the engine and hydraulic equipment under extremely severe conditions (high temperature, high pressure),
and deteriorates with use.
Always use oil that matches the grade and maximum and minimum ambient temperatures recommended in the Operation
and Maintenance Manual. Even if the oil is not dirty, always change the oil at the specified interval.
• Oil corresponds to blood in the human body, always be careful when handling it to prevent any impurities (water, metal
particles, dirt, etc.) from getting in.
The majority of problems with the machine are caused by the entry of such impurities.
Take particular care not to let any impurities get in when storing or adding oil.
• Never mix oils of different grades or brands.
• Always add the specified amount of oil.
Having too much oil or too little oil are both causes of problems.
• If the oil in the work equipment is not clear, there is probably water or air getting into the circuit. In such cases, please
contact your Komatsu distributor.
• When changing the oil, always replace the related filters at the same time.
• We recommend you have an analysis made of the oil periodically to check the condition of the machine. For those who
wish to use this service, please contact your Komatsu distributor.
• When using commercially available oil, it may be necessary to reduce the oil change interval.
• We recommend that you use the Komatsu oil clinic to carry out a detailed checks of the characteristics of the oil.
3-4 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Fuel
• To prevent the moisture in the air from condensing and forming water inside the fuel tank, always fill the fuel tank after
completing the day's work.
• The fuel pump is a precision instrument, and if fuel containing water or dirt is used, it cannot work properly.
• Be extremely careful not to let impurities get in when storing or adding fuel.
• Always use the fuel specified in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Fuel may congeal depending on the temperature when it is used (particularly in low temperature below -15°C (5°F)). It is
necessary to use the fuel that is suitable for the temperature.
• Before starting the engine, or when ten minutes have passed after adding fuel, drain the sediment and water from the fuel
tank.
• If the engine runs out of fuel, or if the filters have been replaced, it is necessary to bleed the air from the circuit.
• If there is any foreign material in the fuel tank, wash the tank and fuel system.
Remark
Always use diesel oil for the fuel.
To ensure good fuel consumption characteristics and exhaust gas characteristics, the engine mounted on this
machine uses an electronically controlled high-pressure fuel injection device. This device requires high
precision parts and lubrication, so if low viscosity fuel with low lubricating ability is used, the durability may drop
markedly.
Coolant and Water for Dilution
• The coolant has the important function of preventing corrosion as well as preventing freezing.
Even in the areas where freezing is not an issue, the use of antifreeze coolant is essential.
Komatsu machines are supplied with Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC). Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) has excellent
anticorrosion, antifreeze and cooling properties and can be used continuously for two years or 4000 hours.
Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) is strongly recommended wherever available.
• When diluting the antifreeze coolant, use distilled water or tap water (soft water).
Natural water, such as a river water or well water (hard water), contains large amounts of minerals (calcium, magnesium,
etc.), and this makes it easier for scale to form inside the engine or radiator. Once scale is deposited inside the engine or
radiator, it is extremely difficult to remove. It also causes overheating due to poor heat exchange, so when you dilute the
coolant, we recommend that you use water with an overall hardness of less than 100 PPM.
• When using antifreeze, always observe the precautions given in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
• Antifreeze coolant is flammable, so be sure to keep it away from flame.
• The ratio of Supercoolant (AF-NAC) to water differs according to the ambient temperature.
For details of the ratio when mixing, See “Clean Inside of Cooling System” on page 3-29.
Supercoolant (AF-NAC) may be supplied in premix. In this case, never add diluting water.
• If the engine overheats, wait for the engine to cool before adding coolant.
• If the coolant level is low, it will cause overheating, and will also cause problems with corrosion due to air entering the
coolant.
PC200/220LC-8 3-5
MAINTENANCE
Grease
• Grease is used to prevent seizure and noises at the joints.
• This construction equipment is used under heavy-duty conditions. Always use the recommended grease and follow the
change intervals and recommended ambient temperatures given in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
• The nipples not included in the maintenance section are nipples for overhaul, so they do not need grease.
• If any part becomes stiff after being used for long time, add grease.
• Always wipe off all of the old grease that is pushed out when greasing.
Be particularly careful to wipe off the old grease in places where sand or dirt sticking in the grease would cause wear of
the rotating parts.
Carrying Out KOWA (Komatsu Oil Wear Analysis)
KOWA is a maintenance service that makes it possible to prevent machine failures and downtime. With KOWA, the oil is
periodically sampled and analyzed. This enables early detection of wear of the machine drive parts and other problems.
We strongly recommend you to use this service. The oil analysis is carried out at actual cost, so the cost is low, and the results
of the analysis are reported together with recommendations which will reduce repair costs and machine downtime.
KOWA Analysis Items
• Measurement of density of metal wear particles
This uses an ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) analyzer to measure
the density of iron, copper, and other metal wear particles in the oil.
• Measurement of quantity of particles

This uses a particle quantifier index measurement machine to
measure the quantity of iron particles of 5 m or more, enabling early
detection of failures.
• Others
Measurements are made of items such as the ratio of water in the oil, density of the antifreeze coolant, ratio of fuel in the
oil, and dynamic viscosity, enabling a highly precise diagnosis of the machine's health.
3-6 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Oil Sampling
• Sampling interval
250 hours: Engine
500 hours: Other components
• Precautions when sampling

• Make sure that the oil is well mixed before sampling.
• Perform sampling at regular fixed intervals.
• Do not perform sampling on rainy or windy days when water or dust can get into the oil.
For further details of KOWA, please contact your Komatsu distributor.

Storing Oil and Fuel
• Keep indoors to prevent any water, dirt, or other impurities from getting in.
• When keeping drum cans for a long period, put the drum on its side so that the filler port of the drums is at the side to
prevent moisture from being sucked in.
If drums have to be stored outside, cover them with a waterproof sheet or take other measures to protect them.
• To prevent any change in quality during long-term storage, be sure to use in the order of first in - first out (use the oldest
oil or fuel first).
Filters
• Filters are extremely important safety parts. They prevent impurities in the fuel and air circuits from entering important
equipment and causing problems.
Replace all filters periodically. For details, see the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
However, when working in severe conditions, replace the filters at shorter intervals according to the oil and fuel
(sulfur content) being used.
• Never try to clean the filters (cartridge type) and use them again. Always replace with new filters.
• When replacing oil filters, check if any metal particles are attached to the old filter. If any metal particles are found,
contact your Komatsu distributor.
• Do not open packs of spare filters until just before they are to be used.
• Always use Komatsu genuine filters.
Electric System Maintenance

• It is extremely dangerous if the electrical equipment becomes wet or the covering of the wiring is damaged. This will
cause an electrical short circuit and may lead to malfunction of the machine. Do not wash the inside of the operator's cab
with water. When washing the machine, be careful not to let water get into the electrical components.
• Service relating to the electric system is checking fan belt tension, checking damage or wear to the fan belt and checking
battery fluid level.
• Never install any electric components other than those specified by Komatsu.
• External electro-magnetic interference may cause malfunction of the control system controller, before installing a radio
receiver or other wireless equipment, contact your Komatsu distributor.
• When working at the seashore, carefully clean the electric system to prevent corrosion.
• When installing electrical equipment, connect it to the special power source connector.
Do not connect the optional power source to the fuse, starting switch, or battery relay.
PC200/220LC-8 3-7
MAINTENANCE
WEAR PARTS
Replace wear parts such as the filter element or air cleaner element at the time of periodic maintenance or before they reach the
wear limit. The wear parts should be replaced correctly in order to ensure more economic use of the machine. When replacing
parts, always use Komatsu genuine parts.
As a result of our continuous efforts to improve product quality, the part number may change, so inform your Komatsu
distributor of the machine serial number and check for the latest part number when ordering parts.
Wear Parts List

The parts in parentheses are to be replaced at the same time.
Item Part Name Q'ty Change interval
Engine oil filter Cartridge 1 Every 500 hours
Fuel pre-filter Cartridge 1 Every 500 hours
Hydraulic tank breather Element 1 Every 500 hours
Element 1
Hydraulic oil filter Every 1000 hours
(O-ring) (1)
Fuel main filter Cartridge 1 Every 1000 hours
Corrosion resistor Cartridge 1 Every 1000 hours
(if equipped)
A/C RECIRC filter Filter 1 Annually
A/C FRESH filter Element 1 Annually
Air cleaner Element assembly 1 -
Element 1
Additional filter for breaker (O-ring) (1) -
(if equipped) (O-ring) (1)
Electric heater Gasket 2 -
Vertical pin type
Tooth 5
(Pin) (5)
(Lock) (5)
Horizontal pin type
Bucket Tooth 5 -
(PC200) (Pin) (5)
Side cutter (left) 1
Side cutter (right) 1
(Bolt) (8)
(Nut) (8)
Vertical pin type
Tooth 4
(Pin) (4)
(Lock) (4)
Horizontal pin type
Bucket Tooth 4 -
(PC220) (Pin) (4)
Side cutter (left) 1
Side cutter (right) 1
(Bolt) (8)
(Nut) (8)
Side shroud 2
Side shroud (Bolt) (6) -
(Bolt) (6)
Pilot filter Element 1 -
(if equipped) (O-ring) (1)
Every 3 years after the start of usage or
Seat belt 1 5 years after the date of manufacture or
at first sign of wear or damage
3-8 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT
• Komatsu genuine oils are adjusted to maintain the reliability and durability of Komatsu construction equipment and
components.
In order to keep your machine in the best conditioner for long periods of time, it is essential to follow the instructions in
this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
• Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened life or excess wear of the engine, power train, cooling
system, and/or other components.
• Commercially available lubricant additives may be good for the machine, but they may also cause harm. Komatsu does
not recommend any commercially available lubricant additive.
• Use the oil recommended according to the ambient temperature in the chart below.
• Specified capacity means the total amount of oil including the oil in the tank and the piping. Refill capacity means the
amount of oil needed to refill the system during inspection and maintenance.
• When starting the engine in ambient temperatures below 0°C (50°F), do not use SAE30, even if the daytime temperature
rises to 10°C (32°F). Always use multigrade oil such as the recommended SAE10W30 or SAE15W40.
• If the machine is operated at a temperature below -20°C (-4°F), a separate device is needed, so consult your Komatsu
distributor.
• When the fuel sulfur content is less than 0.5%, change the engine oil according to the period inspection table given in this
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
If the fuel sulfur content is more than 0.5%, change the oil according to the following table.
Sulfur content (%) Oil change interval
Less than 0.5 500 hours
0.5 - 1.0 250 hours
1.0 and up Not recommendable (*)
* If these fuels are used, there is danger that serious trouble may occur because of early deterioration of the engine oil or
early wear of the internal parts of the engine. If the local situation makes it necessary to use these fuels, always remember
the following.
A. Be sure to check Total Basic Number (TBN) of oil frequently by TBN handy checker etc., and change oil based on
the result.
B. Always be aware that oil change interval is extremely shorter than standard.
C. Be sure to carry out periodic engine inspection by distributor's expert since change interval of periodic replacement
parts and overhaul interval are also shorter.
PC200/220LC-8 3-9
MAINTENANCE
Swing
Engine oil Final drive Damper Hydraulic Cooling
machinery Fuel tank
pan case (each) case system system
case
7.1 (PC200) 3.5 (PC200) 232 (PC200) 21.0 (PC200)
liter 25.4 0.65 400
Specified 8.2 (PC220) 5.4 (PC220) 239 (PC220) 20.4 (PC220)
capacity 1.88 (PC200) 0.92 (PC200) 61.29 (PC200) 5.55 (PC200)
US gal 6.71 0.17 105.68
2.17 (PC220) 1.43 (PC220) 63.14 (PC220) 5.39 (PC220)
7.1 (PC200) 3.3 (PC200) 21.0 (PC200)
liter 23.1 0.65 135 --
Refill 8.2 (PC220) 5.2 (PC220) 20.4 (PC220)
capacity 1.88 (PC200) 0.87 (PC200) 5.55 (PC200)
US gal 6.10 0.17 35.67 -
2.17 (PC220) 1.37 (PC220) 5.39 (PC220)
3-10 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Remark
Always use diesel oil for the fuel.
To ensure good fuel consumption characteristics and exhaust gas characteristics, the engine mounted on this
machine uses an electronically controlled high-pressure fuel injection device. This device requires high
precision parts and lubrication, so if low viscosity fuel with low lubricating ability is used, the durability may drop
markedly.
Note 1: HTHS ( High-Temperature High-Shear Viscosity 150°C), specified by ASTM D4741 must be equal to or higher than
3.5 mPa-S. Komatsu EOS0W30 and EOS5W40 are the most suitable oils.
Note 2: Powertrain oil has different properties from engine oil. Be sure to use the recommended oils.
Note 3: Hyper grease (G2-T, G2-TE) has a high performance.

When it is necessary to improve the lubricating ability of the grease in order to prevent squeaking of pins and
bushings, the use of G2-T or G2-TE is recommended.
Note 4: Supercoolant (AF-NAC)

1. Coolant has the important function of anticorrosion as well as antifreeze.
Komatsu machines are supplied with Komatsu Supercoolant AF-NAC. Komatsu Supercoolant AF-NAC has excellent
Komatsu Supercoolant AF-NAC is strongly recommended wherever available.
2. For details of the ratio when diluting super coolant with water, see “Clean Inside of Cooling System” on page 3-29.
Supercoolant AF-NAC may be supplied in premix. In this case, always top off with premix solution. (never dilute with
water)
3. To maintain the anticorrosion properties of Supercoolant AF-NAC, always keep the density of Supercoolant between 30%
and 68%.
Recommended Brands, Recommended Quality for products other than

Komatsu Genuine Oil
When using commercially available oils other than Komatsu genuine oil, or when checking the latest specifications, refer to
the Komatsu web page or consult your Komatsu distributor.
PC200/220LC-8 3-11
MAINTENANCE
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Torque List
If nuts, bolts, or other parts are not tightened to the specified torque, it will cause looseness or damage to the
tightened parts, and this will cause failure of the machine or problems with operation.
Always pay careful attention when tightening parts.
Unless otherwise specified, tighten the metric nuts and bolts to the torque shown in the table below.
If it is necessary to replace any nut or bolt, always use a Komatsu genuine part of the same size as the part that was replaced.
Torque of Bolts
Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats
mm mm N•m lbf ft
6 10 11.8 - 14.7 8.70 - 10.84
8 13 27 - 34 19.91 - 25.07
10 17 59 - 74 43.51 - 54.57
12 19 98 - 123 72.28 - 90.72
14 22 153 - 190 112.84 - 140.13
16 24 235 - 285 173.32 - 210.20
18 27 320 - 400 236.02 - 295.02
20 30 455 - 565 335.59 - 416.72
22 32 610 - 765 449.91 - 564.23
24 36 785 - 980 578.98 - 722.81
27 41 1150 - 1440 848.19 - 1062.09
30 46 1520 - 1910 1121.09 - 1408.74
33 50 1960 - 2450 1445.62 - 1807.02
36 55 2450 - 3040 1807.02 - 2242.19
39 60 2890 - 3630 2131.55 - 2677.35
3-12 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats
mm mm N•m lbf ft
6 10 5.9 - 9.8 4.35 - 7.22
8 13 13.7 - 23.5 10.10 - 17.33
10 14 34.3 - 46.1 25.29 - 34.00
12 27 74.5 - 90.2 54.94 - 66.52
Torque of Hose Nuts

Use these torques for hose nuts.
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque
Nominal No.
mm mm N•m lbf ft
02 14 19 19.6 - 29.4 14.5 - 21.7
03 18 24 29.4 - 68.6 21.7 - 50.6
04 22 27 58.9 - 98.1 44.4 - 72.4
05 24 32 107.9 - 166.7 79.6 - 123.0
06 30 36 147.1 - 205.9 108.5 - 151.9
10 33 41 147.1 - 245.1 108.5 - 180.8
12 36 46 196.2 - 294.2 144.7 - 217.0
14 42 55 245.2 - 343.2 180.9 - 253.1
Torque of Split Flange Bolts

Use these torques for split flange bolts.
mm mm N•m lbf ft
10 14 59 - 74 43.51 - 54.57
12 17 98 - 123 72.28 - 90.72
16 22 235 - 285 173.32 - 210.20
PC200/220LC-8 3-13
MAINTENANCE
Torque for Flared Nuts

Use these torques for flared part of nut.

mm mm N•m lbf ft
14 19 24.5 ± 4.9 18.0 ± 3.6
18 24 49 ± 19.6 36.1 ± 14.4
22 27 78.5 ± 19.6 57.8 ± 14.4
24 32 137.3 ± 29.4 101.2 ± 21.6
30 36 176.5 ± 29.4 130.1 ± 21.6
33 41 196.1 ± 49 144.6 ± 36.1
36 46 245.2 ± 49 180.8 ± 36.1
42 55 294.2 ± 49 216.9 ± 36.1
Torque for O-ring Boss Piping Joints

★ Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss piping joints to the torque below.
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque (N•m {lbf ft})
Norminal No.
mm mm Range Target
02 14 35 - 63 {25.81 - 46.46} 44 {32.45}
03, 04 20 84 - 132 {61.95 - 97.35} 103 {75.96}
Varies depending on
05, 06 24 128 - 186 {94.40 - 137.18} 157 {115.79}
type of connector.
10, 12 33 363 - 480 {267.73 - 354.02} 422 {311.25}
14 42 746 - 1010 {550.22 - 744.93} 883 {651.26}
3-14 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Torque for O-ring Boss Plugs

★ Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss plugs to the torque below.
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque (N•m {lbf lb})
Norminal No.
mm mm Range Target
08 08 14 5.88 - 8.82 {4.33 - 6.50} 7.35 {5.42}
10 10 17 9.8 - 12.74 {7.22 - 9.39} 11.27 {8.31}
12 12 19 14.7 - 19.6 {10.84 - 14.45} 17.64 {13.01}
14 14 22 19.6 - 24.5 {14.45 - 18.07} 22.54 {16.62}
16 16 24 24.5 - 34.3 {18.07 - 25.29} 29.4 {21.68}
18 18 27 34.3 - 44.1 {25.29 - 32.52} 39.2 {28.91}
20 20 30 44.1 - 53.9 {32.52 - 39.75} 49.0 {36.14}
24 24 32 58.8 - 78.4 {43.36 - 57.82} 68.6 {50.59}
30 30 32 93.1 - 122.5 {68.66 - 90.35} 107.8 {79.50}
33 33 _ 107.8 - 147.0 {79.50 - 108.42} 124.4 {91.75}
36 36 36 127.4 - 176.4 {93.96 - 130.10} 151.9 {112.03}
42 42 _ 181.3 - 240.1 {133.72 - 177.08} 210.7 {155.40}
52 52 _ 274.4 - 367.5 {202.38 - 271.05} 323.4 {238.52}
Torque for Hoses (Taper Seal Type and Face Seal Type)
★ Tighten the hoses (taper seal type and face seal type) to the following torque, unless otherwise specified.
★ Apply the following torque when the threads are coated (wet) with engine oil.
Taper seal
Tightening torque (N•m {lbf ft}) Face seal type
type
Nominal Width
size of hose across flats Nominal thread
Thread size Root diameter (mm)
Range Target size - Threads per
(mm) (Reference)
inch, Thread series
34 - 54 {25.0 - 39.8} 44 {32.4} - 9/16 - 18UN 14.3
02 19
34 - 63 {25.0 - 46.4} 44 {32.4} 14 - -
22 54 - 93 {39.8 - 68.5} 74 {54.5} - 11/16 -16UN 17.5
03
24 59 - 98 {43.5 - 72.2} 78 57.5} 18 - -
04 27 84 - 132 {61.9 - 97.3} 103 {75.9} 22 13/16 - 16UN 20.6
05 32 128 - 186 {94.4 - 137.1} 157 {115.7} 24 1 - 14UNS 25.4
06 36 177 - 245 {130.5 - 180.7} 216 {159.3} 30 1 3/16 - 12UN 30.2
(10) 41 177 - 245 {130.5 - 180.7} 216 {159.3} 33 - -
(12) 46 197 - 294 {145.3 - 216.8} 245 {180.7} 36 - -
(14) 55 246 - 343 {181.4 - 252.9} 294 {216.8} 42 - -
PC200/220LC-8 3-15
MAINTENANCE
SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS

For using the machine safely for an extended period of time, you must periodically replace the safety critical and fire
prevention-related parts listed in the table of important parts.
Material quality of these parts can change as time passes and they are likely to wear out or deteriorate. However, it is difficult
to determine the extent of wear or deterioration at the time of periodic maintenance. Hence, it is required to replace them with
new ones regardless of their condition after a certain period of usage. This is important to ensure that these parts maintain their
full performance at all times.
Furthermore, should anything abnormal be found on any of these parts, replace it with a new one even if the periodic
replacement time for the part has not yet arrived.
If any of the hose clamps show deterioration like deformation or cracking, replace the clamps at the same time as the hoses.
Also perform the following checks with hydraulic hoses which need to be replaced periodically. Tighten all loose clamps and
replace defective hoses, as required.
When replacing hoses, always replace O-rings, gaskets, and other such parts at the same time.
Have your Komatsu distributor replace the critical parts.
3-16 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Safety Critical Parts List

No. Safety critical parts for periodic replacement Q'ty Replacement interval
1 Fuel hose (fuel tank - fuel pre-fillter) 1
2 Fuel hose (fuel pre-fillter - supply pump) 1
3 Fuel return hose, cooler (engine - fuel cooler) 1
4 Fuel return hose (fuel cooler - fuel tank) 1
5 Fuel hose (supply pump - fuel main fillter) 2
Fuel return tube
6 1
(injector, supply pump, fuel return merge tube from common rail)
7 Pump outlet hose (pump - control valve) 2
8 Work equipment hose (boom cylinder inlet port) 4
9 Work equipment hose (bucket cylinder line, boom foot) 2
10 Work equipment hose (bucket cylinder inlet port 2
11 Work equipment hose (arm cylinder line, boom foot) 2
12 Work equipment hose (arm cylinder inlet port) 2 Every two years or 4000
hours, whichever
13 Attachment additional line hose (boom foot) 2 comes sooner
14 Attachment additional line hose (boom top) 2
15 Swing line hose (swing motor inlet port) 2
16 Main suction hose 1
17 Heater hose 2
18 Travel line hose (control valve - swivel joint) 4
19 Travel line hose (swivel joint - travel motor) 4
20 Pump branch hose 2
21 Pump LS hose 2
22 Pump pressure hose 1
23 Accumulator (for control circuit ) 1
Accumulator each
24 (For additional attachment low pressure, high pressure) 1
25 High-pressure piping clamp 1set
Every 8000 hours
26 Fuel spray prevention cap 1set
Every three years after the
start of usage or five years
27 Seat belt 1 after the date of manufacture
or at first sign of wear or
damage
PC200/220LC-8 3-17
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
If the machine is equipped with a hydraulic breaker, the maintenance schedule for some parts will be different. For details, See
“Maintenance Interval for Hydraulic Breaker” on page 3-20 to confirm the correct maintenance schedule when carrying out
maintenance.
Maintenance Schedule Chart

Initial 10 Hours Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Initial 250 Hours Maintenance (Only After The First 250 Hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Initial 500 Hours Maintenance (Only After The First 500 Hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
When Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Check, Clean And Replace Air Cleaner Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Clean Inside Of Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Check And Tighten Track Shoe Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Check And Adjust Track Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Replace Bucket Teeth (Vertical Pin Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Replace Bucket Teeth (Horizontal Pin Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Adjust Bucket Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Check Window Washer Fluid Level, Add Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Check And Maintenance Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Wash Washable Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Check Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Bleeding Air From Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Check Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Lubricating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Check Level Of Battery Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Check Air Conditioner Compressor Belt Tension, Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Lubricating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Change Oil In Engine Oil Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Replace Engine Oil Filter Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Replace Fuel Pre-filter Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Check Swing Pinion Grease Level, Add Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Clean And Inspect Radiator Fins, Oil Cooler Fins, Aftercooler Fins, Fuel Cooler Fins, And
Condenser Fins (Only Machines Equipped With Air Conditioner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Clean Air Conditioner Fresh/Recirc Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Replace Breather Element In Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Check Oil Level In Swing Machinery Case, Add Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Check Oil Level In Final Drive Case, Add Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Change Oil In Swing Machinery Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Check Oil Level In Damper Case, Add Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Replace Fuel Main Filter Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Check All Tightening Points Of Engine Exhaust Pipe Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3-18 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Replace Corrosion Resistor Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Check Fan Belt Tension And Replace Fan Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Check Nitrogen Gas Charge Pressure In Accumulator (For Breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Change Oil In Final Drive Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Clean Hydraulic Tank Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Checking Charge Pressure Of Nitrogen Gas In Accumulator (For Control Circuit) . . . . . . . . 3-80
Check Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Check Engine Valve Clearance, Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Check Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Check Vibration Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Check Starting Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Replace Accumulator (For Control Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
Check For Looseness Of High-pressure Piping Clamp, Hardening Of Rubber . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Check For Missing Fuel Spray Prevention Cap, Hardening Of Rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Check Operating Condition Of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Change Oil In Hydraulic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Replace Fuel Spray Prevention Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Replace High-pressure Piping Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
PC200/220LC-8 3-19
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Interval for Hydraulic Breaker

For machine equipped with a hydraulic breaker, the hydraulic oil deteriorates faster than for normal bucket digging operations,
so set the maintenance intervals as follows.
• Replace hydraulic filter element
On a new machine, replace the element after the first 100 to 150
hours, then carry out further replacement of the element according to
the table on the right.
• Change oil in hydraulic tank
Change the oil according to the table on the right.
• Replacing additional filter element for breaker (if equipped)
Replacing pilot filter element (if equipped)
Use a guideline of 250 hours for use of the breaker (operating ratio
for the breaker: 50 % or more), and replace the element according to
the table on the right.
X : Breaker operating ratio (%)

Y : Replacement interval (H)
(A): Hydraulic filter element, Pilot filter element

(B): Hydraulic oil
(C): Additional filter element
Remark
Breaker operating ratio 100% means that only the breaker is
used
Breaker operating ratio 0% means that the breaker is not used
3-20 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
Initial Ten Hours Maintenance

• Carry out greasing every ten hours, for the first 50 hours on a new machine. Carry out the greasing also at 250 hours and
500 hours on a new machine. After this, carry out the greasing every 500 hours or every six months, whichever comes
sooner.
• See “Every 100 Hours Maintenance” on page 3-52 for lubrication locations.
Initial 250 Hours Maintenance (Only After the First 250 Hours)
Carry out the following maintenance only after the first 250 hours of operation on new machines.
• Replace Fuel Pre-filter Cartridge
For details of the method of replacing or maintaining, see the section on “EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE”.
Initial 500 Hours Maintenance (Only After the First 500 Hours)
Carry out the following maintenance only after the first 500 hours of operation on new machines.
• Replace fuel main filter cartridge
For details of the method of replacing or maintaining, see the section on “EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE”.
PC200/220LC-8 3-21
MAINTENANCE
When Required
Check, Clean and Replace Air Cleaner Element
• When using compressed air, there is danger of dirt flying and causing personal injury.
Always wear protective glasses, dust mask, or other protective equipment.
• When removing the outer element from the air cleaner body, it is dangerous to pull it out by force. When working in
high places or where the foothold is poor, be careful not to fall because of the reaction when pulling out the outer
element.
Remark
• Do not clean the air cleaner element until the air cleaner clogging monitor on the monitor panel lights up. If
the element is cleaned frequently before the air cleaner clogging monitor lights up, the air cleaner will not
be able to display its performance fully, and the cleaning efficiency will also go down.
• In addition, during the cleaning operation, dirt stuck to the element will fall inside the inner element. If
inspection, cleaning, or maintenance is carried out with the engine running, dirt will enter the engine and
cause damage to the engine. Always stop the engine before carrying out these operations.
Checking
If air cleaner clogging monitor (1) of the monitor panel flashes, clean the
air cleaner element.
Replacing
• Replace element, O-ring
If the element has been used for one year, or air cleaner clogging
monitor (1) on the monitor panel lights up after the element has been
cleaned, replace outer element (5), inner element (6), and O-ring (8).
• Replacing vacuator valve
Replace vacuator valve (4) if it is damaged or if the rubber is
markedly deformed.
3-22 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Outer Element
Remark
Before and after cleaning the element, do not leave or keep it
in direct sunlight.
1. Open the rear door at the left side of the machine, remove four hooks
(2), then remove cover (3).
Remark
Never remove the inner element (6). It will allow dirt to enter
and cause failure of the engine.
Do not use a screwdriver or other tool.
2. Hold the outer element (5), rock it lightly up and down and to the left
and right, and rotate the element to the left and right to pull it out.
3. When the outer element (5) has been removed, check that the inner
element has not come out of position and is not at an angle. If it is at
an angle, insert your hand and push it in straight.
4. After removing the outer element (5), cover the inner element (6)
with a clean cloth or tape to prevent dirt or dust from entering.
5. Wipe off or brush off the dirt stuck to cover (3) and the inside of the
air cleaner body (7).
6. Remove any dirt or dust that is accumulated to evacuator valve (4)
installed to cover (3).
Remark
When cleaning the element, do not hit or beat it against
anything.
7. Direct dry compressed air (less than 7 kgf/cm2 (99.4 psi)) to the outer
element from inside along its folds, then direct it from outside along
its folds and again from inside.
A. Replace the outer element which has been cleaned six times
repeatedly or used throughout a year. Replace the inner element
at the same time.
B. Replace both inner and outer elements when the air cleaner
clogging monitor (1) lights up soon after installing the cleaned
outer element even though it has not been cleaned six times.
PC200/220LC-8 3-23
MAINTENANCE
C. Remove one seal from the element whenever the element has
been cleaned.
8. If small holes or thinner parts are found on the element when it is

checked by shining a light through it after cleaning, replace the
element.
9. Remove the cloth or tape covering inner element (6).

Remark
Do not use an element whose folds or gasket or seal are damaged.
If the element or O-ring are cleaned and used again after they have been used for more than one year, it will
cause problems. Do not use them again.
10. Check that there is no dirt or oil stuck to the seal portion of the new element or cleaned element. Wipe off any dirt or oil.
11. Push the outer element in straight with your hand when installing it to the air cleaner body.
If the outer element is held and rocked lightly up and down and to the left and right while pushing it in, the outer element
can be inserted easily.
Remark
Be sure to install the air cleaner element facing in the correct
direction.
Install so that the bottom of the air cleaner element cylinder
(face where no hole is drilled) (B), (C) is at cover (3) end. If the
direction of installation is mistaken, there is danger that it will
cause breakage of the air cleaner element or serious damage
to the engine.
3-24 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Remark
When inserting the element, if the rubber at the tip is swollen
or the outer element is not pushed in straight, and cover (3) is
assembled by force to hook (2), there is danger that the hook
and air cleaner body may be damaged, so be careful when
assembling.
12. Install cover (3) as follows.

A. Align cover (3) with the element.
B. Hook the tip of hook (2) to the protruding part of the air cleaner
body and lock it in position.
C. When locking hooks (2) in position, apply the hooks in turn on

opposite sides (top, bottom, left, right) in the same way as when
tightening bolts.
D. Always install cover (3) so that the evacuator (4) is facing the
ground (A).
E. When cover (3) is installed, check that the clearance between

the air cleaner body and cover (3) is not too large. If it is too large, install again.
PC200/220LC-8 3-25
MAINTENANCE
Replacing Element
1. Open the rear door at the left side of the machine, remove four hooks
(2), then remove cover (3).
2. Hold the outer element (5), rock it lightly up and down and to the left
and right, and rotate the element to the left and right to pull it out.
Do not remove inner element (6) when doing this.
3. When the outer element (5) has been removed, check that the inner
element has not come out of position and is not at an angle. If it at an
angle, insert your hand and push it in straight.
4. Wipe off or brush off the dirt stuck to cover (3) and the inside of the
air cleaner body (7).
5. Remove any dirt or dust that is accumulated to evacuator valve (4)
installed to cover (3).
Remark
• The inner element must not be cleaned and used again. When replacing the outer element, replace the
inner element at the same time.
• If the inner element is not installed properly and the outer element and cover are installed, there is danger
that the outer element will be damaged.
• The seal portion on imitation parts lacks precision, and allows the entry of dust, which leads to damage of
the engine. Do not use such imitation parts.
6. Remove inner element (6), then quickly install the new inner element.
Insert the inner element securely so that it does not move.
7. Push the new outer element (5) in straight with your hand when installing it to the air cleaner body.
If the element is held and rocked lightly up and down and to the left and right while pushing it in, the element can be
inserted easily.
3-26 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Remark
Be sure to install the air cleaner element facing in the correct
direction. Install so that the bottom of the air cleaner element
cylinder (face where no hole is drilled) (B), (C) is at cover (3)
end. If the direction of installation is mistaken, there is danger
that it will cause breakage of the air cleaner element or serious
damage to the engine.
8. Replace O-ring (8) of cover (3) with a new part.
Remark
When inserting the element, if the rubber at the tip is swollen
or the outer element is not pushed in straight, and cover (3) is
assembled by force to hook (2), there is danger that the hook
and air cleaner body may be damaged, so be careful when
assembling.
9. Install cover (3) as follows:

A. Align cover (3) with the element.
B. Hook the tip of hook (2) to the protruding part of the air cleaner
body and lock it in position.
C. When locking hooks (2) in position, apply the hooks in turn on

opposite sides (top, bottom, left, right) in the same way as when
tightening bolts.
D. Always install cover (3) so that the evacuator (4) is facing the
ground (A).
E. When cover (3) is installed, check that the clearance between

the air cleaner body and cover (3) is not too large. If it is too large, install again.
PC200/220LC-8 3-27
MAINTENANCE
10. Replace seal (9) on the cover (3) with a new seal.
3-28 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Clean Inside of Cooling System
• Immediately after the engine is stopped, the coolant is at a high

temperature and the radiator is under high internal pressure.
If the cap is removed to drain the coolant in this condition, there
is a hazard of burns. Wait for the temperature to go down, then
turn the cap slowly to release the pressure before removing it.
• Cleaning is carried out with the engine running. When standing
up or leaving the operator's seat, set the lock lever (1) to the
LOCK position (L).
• For details of starting the engine, See “Before Starting Engine”
on page 2-115 and “STARTING ENGINE” on page 2-134.
• There is danger of touching the fan if the undercover is left
removed.
• Never enter behind the machine when the engine is running.
Clean the inside of the cooling system, change the coolant and replace the corrosion resistor according to the table below.
Interval of cleaning inside of cooling systemand

Antifreeze coolant changing antifreeze coolant
Komatsu supercoolant Every two years or every 4000 hours whichever
(AF-NAC) comes first
*: Permanent type antifreeze shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3306-03.
Stop the machine on level ground when cleaning or changing the coolant.
The coolant has the important function of preventing corrosion as well as preventing freezing.
Komatsu machines are supplied with Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC). Komatsu Supercoolant (AF-NAC) has excellent
As a basic rule, we do not recommend the use of any coolant other than Komatsu genuine supercoolant (AF-NAC).
If you use another coolant, it may cause serious problems, such as corrosion of the engine and aluminum parts of the cooling
system.
PC200/220LC-8 3-29
MAINTENANCE
To maintain the anticorrosion properties of Supercoolant (AF-NAC), always keep the density of Supercoolant between 30%
and 68%.
Supercoolant (AF-NAC) is already diluted with distilled water. When using coolant, investigate the lowest temperatures in the
past and decide the density for the coolant from the coolant density table below.
When actually deciding the density for the coolant, set it for a temperature 10°C (18°F) below the actual temperature.
The coolant density varies according to the ambient temperature, but it must always be a minimum of 30%.
Coolant density table
°C Above -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45 -50
Minimum Temp
°F Above 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40 -49 -58
Concentration (%) 30 36 41 46 50 54 58 61 64
• Antifreeze is toxic. When open the drain valve, be careful not to get water containing antifreeze on you. If it gets in
your eyes, flush your eyes with large amount of fresh water and see a doctor at once.
• When changing the coolant or draining the coolant from the radiator before carrying out repairs, ask a specialist
company to handle any coolant containing antifreeze, or contact your Komatsu distributor. Antifreeze is toxic, so
never pour it into drainage water ditches or drain it onto the ground surface.Antifreeze is flammable, so keep it
away from flame.
The coolant is already diluted with distilled water. (For details, See “Coolant and Water for Dilution” on page 3-5).
Check the density with a coolant tester.
Prepare a container whose capacity is larger than the specified coolant volume to catch drained coolant.
Prepare a hose to use when filling with coolant.
3-30 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
1. Stop the machine on level ground, then stop the engine.
2. Open engine hood (1).
3. Check that the cooling water temperature has gone down enough to
make it possible to touch the radiator cap surface by hand, then turn
radiator cap (2) slowly until it contacts the stopper to release the
pressure.
4. Following this, push radiator cap (2), turn it until it contacts the
stopper, then remove it.
5. Remove the undercover, then set the container under drain valve (3)
to catch the coolant mixture.
Open drain valve (3) at the bottom of the radiator and drain the
coolant.
6. After draining the coolant, close drain valve (3), and fill with city
water. When the radiator is full, start the engine and run at low idling
to raise the temperature to at least 90°C (194°F), then continue to run
for approximately ten minutes.
7. Stop the engine and open drain valve (3) to drain the coolant.
8. After draining the water, clean the radiator with detergent.
For the cleaning method, follow the instruction of detergent..
9. Close drain valve (3).

10. Install the undercover.
11. Add Supercoolant through the water filler up to the bottom of the
filler port. For details of the Supercoolant density, see the
COOLANT DENSITY TABLE.
12. Run the engine at low idling for five minutes to remove the air from
the water, then run at high idling for five minutes. (Leave radiator
cap (2) removed when doing this.)
PC200/220LC-8 3-31
MAINTENANCE
13. Drain the coolant from sub-tank (4), clean the inside of the sub-tank,
then add coolant until the coolant level is between the FULL and
LOW marks.
• If the sub-tank is extremely dirty and it is difficult to clean,
replace it with a new part.
14. Stop the engine, wait for approximately three minutes, then add
coolant until the coolant level is near the coolant filler port, and
tighten the cap. Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary.
15. Close engine hood (1).
3-32 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Check and Tighten Track Shoe Bolts

If the machine is used with track shoe bolts (1) loose, they will break, so
tighten any loose bolts immediately.
Tightening
• Triple shoe and swamp shoe
1. First tighten to a torque of 490 ± 49 N·m (360 ± 36 lb/ft) then check that the nut and shoe are in close contact with the link
contact surface.
2. After checking, tighten a further 120° ± 10°.
Order for Tightening

Tighten the bolts in the order shown in the diagram on the right. After
tightening, check that the nut and shoe are in close contact with the link
mating surface.
PC200/220LC-8 3-33
MAINTENANCE
Check and Adjust Track Tension
For details on starting the engine and operating the work equipment, See “Before Starting Engine” on page 2-115,
“STARTING ENGINE” on page 2-134, “AFTER STARTING ENGINE” on page 2-138, and “WORK EQUIPMENT CON-
TROLS AND OPERATIONS” on page 2-158.
Wear on pins and bushings of the undercarriage will vary with working conditions and type of soil, so inspect the track tension
every now and then in order to maintain the standard tension.
For carrying out inspection and adjustment of track shoes, park the machine on the flat and solid ground.
Checking
1. Run the engine at low idle, then move the machine forward for a
distance equal to the track length on ground, and slowly stop the
machine.
2. Put on the track shoe a straight wooden bar (3) which stretches from
idler (1) to upper carrier roller (2).
3. Measure the maximum deflection between bottom surface of the
wooden bar and top surface of the track shoe.
Deflection “a” should be 10 - 30 mm (0.4 - 1.2 in).
If the track tension is not at the standard value, adjust it in the following
manner.
Adjustment
• Grease inside the adjusting mechanism is under high pressure.

Grease coming from plug (1) under pressure can penetrate the
body, causing injury or death. For this reason, do not loosen
plug (1) more than one turn.
• Do not loosen any part other than plug (1). Furthermore, do not
bring your face in front of the plug (1).
• If track tension is not relieved by this procedure, contact your
Komatsu distributor for repairs.
Increasing Track Tension

Prepare a grease pump.
1. Pump in grease through grease fitting (2) with a grease pump.
(Grease fitting (2) forms one part with plug (1).)
2. To check if the tension is correct, run the engine at low idle, move
the machine slowly forward (by an amount equal to the length of
track on ground), then stop the machine.
3. Check the track tension again, and if the tension is not correct, adjust
it again.
3-34 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
4. Continue to pump in grease until dimension (S) becomes zero (0). If
the tension is still loose, the pin and bushing are excessively worn, so
they must be either turned or replaced. Please contact your Komatsu
distributor for repairs.
Loosening Track Tension
• It is extremely dangerous to release the grease by any method except the procedure given below.
• If track tension is not relieved by this procedure, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
1. Loosen plug (1) gradually to release the grease.

2. When loosening plug (1), turn it a maximum of one turn.
3. If the grease does not come out smoothly, move the machine
forwards and backwards a short distance.
4. Tighten plug (1).
5. To check if the tension is correct, run the engine at low idle, move
the machine slowly forward (by an amount equal to the length of
track on ground), then stop the machine.
6. Check the track tension again, and if the tension is not correct, adjust
it again.
PC200/220LC-8 3-35
MAINTENANCE
Replace Bucket Teeth (Vertical Pin Type)

Replace the bucket teeth before the adapter starts to wear.
• It is dangerous if the work equipment moves by mistake when the teeth are being replaced.
• Set the work equipment in a stable condition, then stop the engine and set the lock lever securely to the LOCK
position.
• The pins can be knocked out only with strong force, so there is a hazard that the pin may fly out. Check that there is
no one in the surrounding area.
• There is a hazard that fragments will fly during the replacement work, so always wear protective equipment like
safety glasses and gloves.
1. To make it possible to knock out pin of tooth (1), put block (5) under
the bottom of the bucket, and set so that the bottom surface of the
bucket is horizontal.
2. Check that the work equipment is in a stable condition, then set the
lock lever to the LOCK position (L).
3. Use a hammer and drift to knock out lock pin (2). (If the drift is set
against rubber pin lock (3) when it is hit, the rubber pin lock may
break. Set it against the back of the pin.)
4. After removing lock pin (2) and rubber pin lock (3), check them.
3-36 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
If lock pin (2) and rubber pin lock (3) are used in the condition below, it will cause tooth (1) to come off during operation.
Always replace them with new parts.
• The lock pin (2) is too short.
Dimension (B) is 1/3 or more of dimension (A) when locking pin (2)
is aligned with bottom face (C).
• Rubber (6) of the rubber pin lock is cut and the steel ball is about to
come out.
• Steel ball (7) sinks in when it is pushed by hand.
5. Clean the surface of adapter (4) and remove the soil with a knife.
6. Use your hand or a hammer to push rubber pin lock (3) into the hole
of the adapter.
When doing this, be careful that the rubber pin lock (3) does not fly
out from the adapter surface.
7. Clean the inside of teeth (1), then install it to adapter (4). If there is
mud affixed to it or if there are protrusions, the teeth (1) will not
enter the adapter properly, and there will not be proper contact at the
mating portion.
PC200/220LC-8 3-37
MAINTENANCE
8. Fit tooth (1) to adapter (4), and confirm that when the pointer is
pressed strongly, the rear face of the hole for the pin of the teeth (1)
is at the same level as the rear face of the hole for the pin of the
adapter (4).
If the rear face of the pin hole of tooth (1) protrudes in front of the
rear face of the pin hole of adapter (4), do not knock the pin in.
If this happens, there is something (C) preventing the tooth (1) from
fitting completely in adapter (4), locate the problem and remove the
obstruction. When tooth (1) fits completely in adapter (4), knock in
lock pin (2).
9. Insert lock pin (2) in the pin hole in the tooth (1), and knock it in so
that the top surface of lock pin (2) is the same height as the surface of
tooth (1).
10. After replacing a bucket tooth, always check the following.
A. After the lock pin (2) has been knocked in completely, check
that it is secured by the teeth (1) and surface.
B. Lightly hit lock pin (2) in the reverse direction from which it
was hit in.
C. Lightly hit the tip of the teeth (1) from above and below, and hit
its sides from right and left.
D. Confirm that rubber pin lock (3) and lock pin (2) are set as
shown in the figure.
Remark
If the tooth is turned, the wear will become uniform. This will extend the service life of the tooth and reduce the
frequency of replacement.
When replacing the tooth, replace the rubber pin lock and lock pin with new parts at the same time. This will
prevent the tooth from falling out.
3-38 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Replace Bucket Teeth (Horizontal Pin Type)
• Replace the bucket teeth before the adapter starts to wear.

• It is dangerous if the work equipment moves by mistake when the teeth are being replaced.
• Set the work equipment in a stable condition, then stop the engine and set the lock lever securely to the LOCK
position.
• The pins can be knocked out only with strong force, so there is a hazard that the pin may fly out. Check that there is
no one in the surrounding area.
• There is a hazard that fragments will fly during the replacement work, so always wear protective equipment like
safety glasses and gloves.
1. To make it possible to knock out pin (1) of tooth (2), put block (5)
under the bottom of the bucket, and set so that the bottom surface of
the bucket is horizontal.
2. Check that the work equipment is in a stable condition, then set the
lock lever to the LOCK position (L).
3. Place a bar on the head of pin (1), hit the bar with a hammer to knock
out the pin, then remove tooth (2).
Remark
If the bucket teeth cannot be safely removed by this method,
have your Komatsu distributor replace the bucket teeth.
PC200/220LC-8 3-39
MAINTENANCE
4. Clean the mounting face. Fit a new tooth (2) in the adapter, push in
pin (1) partially by hand, then lock it with a hammer to install the
tooth to the bucket.
3-40 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Adjust Bucket Clearance
• It is dangerous if the work equipment is mistakenly moved when

adjusting the bucket clearance.
• Set the work equipment in a stable condition, stop the engine,
then set lock lever (1) securely to the LOCK position (L).
1. Set the work equipment to the position shown in the diagram on the
right, then stop the engine and set the lock lever (1) to the LOCK
position (L).
2. Shift O-ring (1) and measure the amount of play “a”.
Measurement is easier if you move the bucket to one side so that all
the play can be measured at one place (the left side in the diagram).
Use a clearance gauge for easy and accurate measurement.
3. Loosen four plate mounting bolts (2), and loosen plate (3).
The shim is a split type, so the operation can be carried out without
removing the bolts.
4. Remove shim (4) corresponding to the amount of play “a” measured
above.
[Example]
In the case of play of 3 mm (0.118 in), remove two 1.0 mm (0.039
in) shims and one 0.5 mm (0.020 in) shim. Play becomes 0.5 mm
(0.020 in). For shim (4), two types of 1.0 mm (0.039 in) and 0.5 mm
(0.020 in) are used.
When play “a” is smaller than one shim, do not carry out any
maintenance.
5. Tighten the four bolts (2).
If the bolts (2) are too stiff to tighten, pull out pin stopper bolt (5) for
easier tightening.
Remark
Item (6) is the arm
Item (7) is the bucket
PC200/220LC-8 3-41
MAINTENANCE
Check Window Washer Fluid Level, Add Fluid

If there is air in the window washer fluid, check the level of the fluid in
window washer tank (1). Add automobile window washer fluid if
necessary.
When adding fluid, be careful not to let any dust get in.
Mixture Ratio of Pure Washer Fluid and Water

The proportion differs according to the ambient temperature, so dilute the washer fluid with water to the following proportions
before adding.
Area, season Proportions Freezing temperature

Normal Washer fluid 1/3: water 2/3 -10°C (14°F)
Winter in cold area Washer fluid 1/2: water 1/2 -20°C (-4°F)
Winter in extremely cold area Pure washer fluid -30°C (-22°F)
There are two types depending on the freezing temperature:

-10°C (14°F) (general use) and -30°C (-22°F) (cold area use), select according to the area and season.
3-42 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Check and Maintenance Air Conditioner

Check Level of Refrigerant (gas)
• If the refrigerant used in the air conditioner gets into your eyes or on your hands, it may cause loss of sight or
frostbite. Do not touch the refrigerant. Never loosen any part of the refrigerant circuit.
• Do not bring any flame close to any point where the refrigerant gas is leaking.
If the refrigerant (gas) level is low, the cooling effect will become poor.
When the engine is running at full throttle and the cooler is running at
high speed, look at the sight glass (1) (inspection window) in the
refrigerant hose mouthpiece to check the condition of the refrigerant gas
(Freon 134a) flowing in the refrigerant circuit.
(A) No bubbles in refrigerant flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suitable

(B) Some bubbles in flow (bubbles pass continuously):. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lack of refrigerant
(C) Colorless, transparent: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .No refrigerant
Remark
When there are bubbles, the refrigerant gas level is low, so
contact your Komatsu distributors to have refrigerant added. If
the air conditioner is run with the refrigerant gas level low, it
will cause damage to the compressor.
Inspection During Off Season
Even during the off-season, operate the air conditioner for three to five
minutes once a month to maintain the oil film at all parts of the
compressor.
Inspection and Maintenance Items
Check, maintenance items Content of check, maintenance Guideline for maintenance interval
Refrigerant (gas) Charge amount Twice a year (spring, autumn)
Condenser Clogged fins Every 500 hours
Compressor Operating condition Every 4000 hours
V-belt Damage, tension Every 250 hours
Operating condition
Blower motor, fan When required
(does it make abnormal noise?)
Control mechanism Operating condition (does it function normally?) When required
Mounting condition, looseness at tightening or
Piping mounts When required
connecting portions, leakage of gas, damage
PC200/220LC-8 3-43
MAINTENANCE
Wash Washable Floor
• When setting the machine at an angle, use strong blocks to

stabilize the machine and be extremely careful when carrying out
the operation.
• If the control levers are touched by mistake, the machine may
suddenly move, and this may lead to a serious accident. Always
set lock lever (1) securely to LOCK position (L) before standing
up from the operator's seat.
Remark
• When carrying out this operation, be careful not to get
water on the monitor and connectors inside the operator's cab.
• Never spray water above the pedestal of the operator's seat (2).
• If any water splashes on the surrounding equipment, be sure to wipe it off.
With the washable floor, it is possible to flush out the dirt on the cab floor directly with water.
Washing Washable Floor Mat

1. Stop the machine on horizontal ground, lower the bucket to the ground, and then stop the engine.
2. When washing the floor mat, use a brush to remove the dust, or direct the water onto the mat and wash it with a brush.
Method of Washing
1. Set the machine at an angle.
For details, See “Method of Setting Machine at Angle” on page 3-47.
2. Swing the upper structure slowly so that water drain holes (3) in the
cab floor are at a low position.
3-44 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
3. Lower the work equipment to the ground and set the machine in a
stable condition.
4. Set lock lever (1) to LOCK position (L) and stop the engine.
5. Remove the floor mat holder plate (4).

6. Pull the knob of floor mat holder clip (5) and remove clip (5).
7. Remove the floor mat.
8. Remove the cap from water drain port (3).
9. Flush out the dirt on the floor with water through water drain port
(3).
10. After completing the washing operation, install the cap in water
drain port (3).
PC200/220LC-8 3-45
MAINTENANCE
11. Fit the floor mat, then secure it with floor mat holder plate (4).
12. Secure the floor mat in position with the floor mat holder clip (5).
3-46 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Method of Setting Machine at Angle
Method Using Slope
• Select a solid and smooth slope.

• Always put blocks under the track to prevent the machine from moving, and dig the work equipment into the ground.
1. Stop the machine so that the work equipment is on the downhill side.
2. Put blocks under the track and dig the work equipment into the
ground.
Method Using Block
• Select a firm flat place.

• Put strong blocks under the undercarriage to stabilize the machine and be extremely careful when carrying out the
operation.
1. Raise the chassis with the boom and arm.

When doing this, operate the levers slowly.
2. Insert block (5) under the raised track to make the machine stable.
3. Raise the boom slowly and lower the machine.

When doing this, check that the machine is always stable.
PC200/220LC-8 3-47
MAINTENANCE
Check Gas Spring
The gas spring is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so mistaken operation may cause an explosion, which will
lead to serious injury or damage. When handling the gas spring, always do as follows.
• Do not disassemble the gas spring.
• Do not make holes in it or weld it.
• Do not hit it, roll it, or subject it to any impact.
• When disposing of the gas spring, the gas must be released. Please contact your Komatsu distributor to have this
work carried out.
The gas springs are located at the engine hood (left, right: two places) and the cab roof (left, right: two places).
In the following cases, please ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out
inspection, repair, and replacement.
• When the engine hood or cab roof window cannot be opened with
light effort.
• When the engine hood or cab roof window do not stay open.
• When oil or gas is found to be leaking from the gas spring.
3-48 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Bleeding Air from Hydraulic System

For details, See “STARTING ENGINE” on page 2-134. If it is necessary to refer to the items for starting the engine, moving
the machine off, steering, or stopping, see the OPERATION section.
1. Bleeding air from pump
A. Loosen air bleed plug (1) and check that oil oozes out from the
air bleeder.
B. If the oil does not ooze out, remove the drain hose from the
hydraulic pump case and fill the pump case completely with
hydraulic oil through drain port (2).
Hold the removed hose firmly, keeping the mouthpiece higher
than the oil level in the hydraulic tank so that oil will not spill
out of the hose.
C. After completing the air bleed operation, tighten air bleed plug
(1) and install the drain hose.
Remark
If the drain hose is installed first, oil will spurt out from plug hole (1).
If the pump is operated without filling the pump case with hydraulic oil, abnormal heat will be generated and
this may cause an unexpected damage to the pump.
2. Starting engine
Start the engine, referring to “STARTING ENGINE” on page 2-134.
Run the engine at low idle for ten minutes after starting, then start operations.
3. Bleeding air from cylinders
A. Run the engine at low idle, and extend and retract each cylinder four to five times, taking care that a cylinder is not
moved to the end of its stroke. (Stop the cylinder approximately 100 mm (3.9 in) short of its stroke end)
B. Next, operate each cylinder three to four times to the end of its stroke.
C. Finally, operate each cylinder four to five times to the end of its stroke to completely remove the air.
Remark
If the engine is run at high speed immediately after startup or a cylinder is pushed up to its stroke end, air taken
inside the cylinder may cause damage to the piston packing.
4. Bleeding air from swing motor
A. Run the engine at low idling, loosen hose (1) at port S, and
check that oil oozes out from port S hose (1).
Remark
Do not operate the swing under any circumstances.
B. If oil does not ooze out, stop the engine, remove port S hose (1),
and fill the inside of the motor case with hydraulic oil.
C. After completely bleeding the air, tighten port S hose (1).
D. Run the engine at low idle and slowly swing at least two times
uniformly to the left and right. This will automatically bleed the
air.
PC200/220LC-8 3-49
MAINTENANCE
Remark
• If the air is not bled from the swing motor, the motor bearings may be damaged.
• When replacing the travel motor safety valve, please contact your Komatsu distributor to have it replaced
and to have the air bled.
5. Bleeding air from travel motor
(Bleed the air only when the oil inside the travel motor case has been
drained.)
A. Run the engine at low idling, loosen air bleeder (1), and check
that oil flows out.
B. Run the engine at low idle and swing the work equipment 90° to
bring it to the side of the track.
C. Jack up the machine until the track is raised slightly from the
ground. Rotate the track under no load for two minutes.
Repeat this procedure on both the left and right sides, and rotate
the track equally both forward and in reverse.
6. Bleeding air from attachment (when installed).

If a breaker or other attachment has been installed, run the engine at low idle and operate the attachment pedal repeatedly
(approximately ten times) until the air has been bled from the attachment circuit.
Remark
• If the method of bleeding the air from the attachment itself is specified by the manufacturer, bleed the air
according to the specified procedure.
• After completing the air bleeding operation, stop the engine, and leave the machine for five minutes before
starting operations. This will remove the air bubbles in the oil inside the hydraulic cylinders.
• Check that there is no leakage of oil and wipe off any oil that has been spilled.
• After completing the air bleeding operation, inspect the oil level, and if the oil level is low, add oil.
3-50 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Check Before Starting

For details of the following items. See “Checks Before Starting” on page 2-116.
• Drain water and sediment from fuel tank
• Check for water and sediment in water separator, drain water
• Check oil level in hydraulic tank, add oil
• Check coolant level, add coolant

• Check oil level in engine oil pan, add oil
• Check electric wiring
• Check fuel level, add fuel

• Check working lamp switch
• Check function of horn
PC200/220LC-8 3-51
MAINTENANCE
Every 100 Hours Maintenance

Lubricating
Remark
If any abnormal noise is generated from any greasing point, carry out greasing regardless of the greasing
interval.
Carry out greasing every ten hours for the first 50 hours on a new machine.
After the machine was subjected to jobs in the water, be sure to grease the wet pins.
1. Set the work equipment in the greasing posture below, then lower the work equipment to the ground and stop the engine.
2. Using a grease pump, pump in grease through the grease fittings shown by arrows.
3. After greasing, wipe off any old grease that was pushed out.
(1) Arm - Bucket coupling pin (one place)

(2) Arm - Link coupling pin (one place)
3-52 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
(3) Bucket-Link coupling pin (one place)
(4) Link coupling pin (two places)
(5) Bucket cylinder rod end (one place)
PC200/220LC-8 3-53
MAINTENANCE

Maintenance for every 100 hours service should be carried out at the same time.
Check Level of Battery Electrolyte
Perform this check before operating the machine.
• Do not use the battery if the battery electrolyte level is below the LOWER LEVEL line. This will accelerate
deterioration of the inside of the battery and reduce the service life of the battery. In addition, it may cause an
explosion.
• The battery generates flammable gas and there is danger of explosion, do not bring fire or sparks near the battery.
• Battery electrolyte is dangerous. If it gets in your eyes or on your skin, wash it off with a large amount of water and
consult a doctor.
Remark
When adding distilled water to the battery, do not allow the battery electrolyte to go above the UPPER LEVEL
line. If the electrolyte level is too high, it may leak and cause damage to the paint surface or corrode other
parts.
When adding distilled water in cold weather, add it before starting operations in the morning to prevent the
electrolyte from freezing.
Inspect the battery electrolyte level at least once a month and follow the basic safety procedures given below.
Open cover (1) at the rear left side of the machine. The batteries are
installed at (A) part.
When Checking Electrolyte Level from Side of Battery

If it is possible to check the electrolyte level from the side of the battery, check as follows.
1. Use a wet cloth to clean the area around the electrolyte level lines
and check that the electrolyte level is between the UPPER LEVEL
and LOWER LEVEL lines.
If the battery is wiped with a dry cloth, static electricity may cause a
fire or explosion.
3-54 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
2. If the electrolyte level is below the midway point between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL lines, remove cap (2) and add
distilled water to the UPPER LEVEL line.
3. After adding distilled water, tighten cap (2) securely.
Remark
If distilled water is added to above the UPPER LEVEL line,
use a syringe to lower the level to the UPPER LEVEL line.
Neutralize the removed fluid with baking soda (sodium
bicarbonate), then flush it away with a large amount of water
or consult your Komatsu distributor or battery maker.
When it is Impossible to Check Electrolyte Level from Side of Battery

If it is impossible to check the electrolyte level from the side of the battery, or there is no display of the UPPER LEVEL line on
the side of the battery, check as follows.
1. Remove cap (2) at the top of the battery, look through the water filler
port (3), and check the electrolyte surface. If the electrolyte does not
reach the sleeve (4), add distilled water so that the level reaches the
bottom of the sleeve (UPPER LEVEL line) without fail.
• (A) Suitable level:
Electrolyte level is up to bottom of sleeve, so surface tension
causes electrolyte surface to bulge and poles appear bent.
• (B) Low:
Electrolyte level is not up to bottom of sleeve, so poles appear
straight and not bent.
2. After adding distilled water, tighten cap (2) securely.
Remark
If distilled water is added to above the bottom of the sleeve,
use a syringe to lower the level to the bottom of the sleeve.
Neutralize the removed fluid with baking soda (sodium
bicarbonate), then flush it away with a large amount of water
or consult your Komatsu distributor or battery maker.
When it is Possible to Use Indicator to Check Electrolyte Level

If it is possible to use an indicator to check the electrolyte level, follow
the instructions given.
PC200/220LC-8 3-55
MAINTENANCE
Check Air Conditioner Compressor Belt Tension, Adjust

Checking
Press the belt with a finger force of approximately 60 N (6.2 kgf) at a
point midway between drive pulley (1) and compressor pulley (2).
Deflection (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 to 8.7 mm (0.248 to 0.343 in).
Adjustment
1. Loosen bolts (1) and (2).
• Compressor (3) is installed to bracket (4), so when bolts (1) and
(2) are loosened, it becomes possible to move bracket (4) with
the mounting position of bolt (2) as the fulcrum.
2. Move compressor (3) to adjust.

3. When the position of the compressor is determined, tighten bolts (1)
and (2) to hold it in position.
Remark
• Check each pulley for damage, wear of the V-groove, and wear of the V-belt. In particular, be sure to check
that the V-belt is not touching the bottom of the V-groove.
• In case any of the following occurs, ask the Komatsu distributor in your territory to replace the belts with
new ones.
• The fan belt has elongated, leaving little allowance for adjustment.
• A cut or crack is found on the belt.
• Slipping or creaking sound is heard coming from the belt.
• When the new V-belt is set, readjust it after one hour of operation.
3-56 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
MEMORANDUM
PC200/220LC-8 3-57
MAINTENANCE

Maintenance for every 100 and 250 hours service should be carried out at the same time.
Lubricating
Remark
For the first 50 hours on a new machine, carry out greasing every ten hours. Carry out the greasing also at 250
hours and 500 hours on a new machine. After this, carry out the greasing every 500 hours or every six months,
whichever comes sooner.
After carrying out digging work in water, always greasing the pins that were under water.
When carrying out heavy-duty operations, such as hydraulic breaker operations, carry out the greasing every
100 hours.
1. Set the work equipment in the greasing posture below, then lower the work equipment to the ground and stop the engine.
2. Using a grease pump, pump in grease through the grease fittings shown by arrows.
(1) Boom cylinder foot pin (two places)
3-58 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
(2) Boom foot pin (two places)
(3) Boom cylinder rod end pin (two places)
(4) Arm cylinder foot pin (one place)
(5) Boom - Arm coupling pin (one place)

(6) Arm cylinder rod end (one place)
(7) Bucket cylinder foot pin (one place)
Lubricate Swing Circle

1. Lower the work equipment to the ground.
2. Using a grease pump, pump in grease through the grease fittings
shown by arrows. (two places)
PC200/220LC-8 3-59
MAINTENANCE
Change Oil in Engine Oil Pan

Replace Engine Oil Filter Cartridge
Parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped and may cause serious burns. Wait for
the oil temperature to go down before performing this operation.
Refill capacity of oil pan: . . . . . . . . . . . . .23.1 liters (6.10 US gal)

Filter wrench
1. Remove the inspection cover of the undercover directly under drain

plug (P) under the machine, then place a container to catch the oil.
2. To prevent getting oil on yourself, lower the lever of drain valve (P)
slowly, drain the oil, then raise the lever to close the valve.
3. Open the cover at the rear right, then use a filter wrench to turn filter
cartridge (1) to the left to remove it.
4. Clean filter holder (2), fill the new filter cartridge with clean engine
oil, coat the thread and packing surface of the new filter cartridge
with clean engine oil (or coat it thinly with grease), then install it to
the filter holder.
Remark
Check that there is no old packing stuck to filter holder (2). If there is any old packing stuck to the filter, it will
cause leakage of oil.
5. When installing, tighten until the packing surface contacts the seal surface of filter holder (2), then tighten it a further 3/4
to 1 turn.
3-60 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
6. After replacing the filter cartridge, open the engine hood and add
engine oil through oil filler (F) to between the H and L marks on
dipstick (G).
7. Run the engine at idle for a short time, then stop the engine, and
check that the oil level is between the H and L marks on the dipstick.
For details, See “Check Oil Level in Engine Oil Pan, Add Oil” on
page 2-120.
8. Install the undercover.
PC200/220LC-8 3-61
MAINTENANCE
Replace Fuel Pre-Filter Cartridge
• After the engine has been operated, all parts are at high temperature, so do not replace the filter immediately. Wait
for all parts to cool down before starting the operation.
• High pressure is generated inside the engine fuel piping system when the engine is running.
• When replacing the filter, wait for at least 30 seconds after stopping the engine to let the internal pressure go down
before replacing the filter.
• Do not bring any fire or flame close.
Remark
• Genuine Komatsu fuel filter cartridges use a special filter that has highly efficient filtering ability. When
replacing the filter cartridge, always use a genuine Komatsu part.
• The common rail fuel injection system used on this machine consists of more precise parts than the
conventional injection pump and nozzle.
If any part other than a genuine Komatsu filter cartridge is used, dust or dirt may get in and cause problems
with the injection system. Always avoid using substitute parts.
• When carrying out inspection or maintenance of the fuel system, pay more attention than normal to the
entry of dirt. If dirt is stuck to any part, use fuel to wash it off completely.
Prepare a container to catch drain fuel.
Prepare a filter wrench
position (S).
2. Open the cover on the right side of the machine.

3. Set the container to catch the fuel under the pre-filter cartridge.
4. Loosen drain valve (2), then drain all the water and sediment in the
transparent cap (3) and also the fuel accumulated in filter cartridge
(4).
5. Remove connector (5). Wrap the removed connector in a vinyl bag
to prevent water from getting on it.
6. Using a filter wrench, turn transparent cap (3) to the left to remove it.
(This cap is used again.)
7. Using a filter wrench, turn cartridge (4) to the left to remove it.
8. Install transparent cap (3) to the bottom of the new filter cartridge.
(When doing this, always replace O-ring (6).)
9. When installing, apply oil to the packing surface and bring the
packing surface into contact with the seal surface of filter cartridge
(4) and then tighten it further by 1/4 - 1/2 turns.
If the transparent cap is tightened too much, the O-ring will be damaged and this will cause leakage of fuel; if it is not
tightened enough, fuel will leak through the gap at the O-ring. To prevent these problems, always tighten securely to the
fixed tightening angle.
3-62 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
10. Clean the filter holder, fill the new filter cartridge with clean fuel, coat the packing surface thinly with oil, then install to
the filter holder.
Remark
• When adding fuel, do not remove cap (B). Always add fuel
from the eight small holes (A) on the dirty side.
• After adding fuel, remove cap (B) and install the fuel filter.
• Always fill with clean fuel. Be careful not to let any dirt or
dust get into the fuel. In particular, center portion is the
clean side, so do not remove cap (B) when adding fuel. Be
careful not to let dirt or dust get into center portion on the
clean side.
11. When installing, tighten until the packing surface contacts the seal
surface of the filter holder, then tighten it 3/4 of a turn.
If the filter cartridge is tightened too far, the packing will be
damaged and this will lead to leakage of fuel. If the filter cartridge is
too loose, fuel will also leak from the packing, so always tighten the
correct amount.
When tightening with a filter wrench, be extremely careful not to dent or damage the filter.
12. Check that the drain valve (2) is tightened securely.
13. Remove the vinyl bag covering connector (5), then connect connector (5).
Remark
• If water gets on the connector (5), the sensor may
malfunction and the water separator monitor may light up.
When removing connector (5), be extremely careful not to
let water get on the connector.
• If water gets on connector (5), dry it completely before
connecting it.
15. After completing the replacement of filter cartridge (4), bleed the air.
Bleed the air as follows:

16. Fill the fuel tank with fuel (to the position where the float is at the highest position).
17. Loosen the knob of feed pump (7), pull it out, then pump it in and out until the movement becomes heavy.
Remark
It is not necessary to remove the plug at the top of the fuel pre-filter and fuel main filter.
After the engine runs out of fuel, use the same procedure to operate feed pump (7) and bleed the air.
18. After finishing bleeding the air, push in the knob of feed pump (7) and tighten it.
19. After replacing the filter cartridge, start the engine and run it at low idling for 10 minutes.
Check for leakage of oil from the filter seal surface and transparent cap mounting. If any oil is leaking, check the
tightening of the filter cartridge.
If there is still oil leakage, repeat Steps 1 - 7 to remove the filter cartridge, and if any damage or embedded foreign
material in the packing surface is found, replace it with a new cartridge and repeat Steps 8 - 19 to install it.
Remark
Sometimes some air is still left inside water separator (3) after air bleeding, but the engine can be started by
operating feed pump (7) until its motion gets hard. The remaining air is naturally bled when the water separator
is left as it is for some time after the engine comes to a stop.
PC200/220LC-8 3-63
MAINTENANCE
Check Swing Pinion Grease Level, Add Grease

Prepare a scale.
1. Remove bolts (1) (2 bolts) on the top of the revolving frame and
remove cover (2).
2. Insert scale (3) into the grease through inspection and adjustment
hole (A). Check that the height of grease (S) in the area passing the
pinion is at least 9 mm (0.355 in). Add grease if the level is low.
3. Check if the grease is milky white. If it is milky white, it is necessary
to change the grease. Please contact your Komatsu distributor.
Total amount of grease: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 liters (3.86 US gal) (PC200)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8 liters (4.17 US gal) (PC220)
4. Install cover (2) with bolts (1).
3-64 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Clean and Inspect Radiator Fins, Oil Cooler Fins, Aftercooler Fins, Fuel Cooler Fins, and
Condenser Fins (Only Machines Equipped With Air Conditioner)
If compressed air, high-pressure water, or steam hits your body directly, or they cause dirt or dust to be blown up,
there is a hazard of serious injury. Always use safety glasses, dust mask, or other protective equipment.
Remark
When using compressed air for cleaning, keep some distance to avoid damaging the fins. Damage on the fins
can cause water leakage and overheating. In a dusty job site, check the fins every day, regardless of the main-
tenance interval.
1. Open engine hood (1).
2. Loosen screw (3) and pull up net (2).

3. After pulling up net (2), clean it.
(Install it again in Step 7.)
4. Check the front and rear surfaces of oil cooler fins (4), radiator fins
(5), aftercooler fins (6), condenser fins (7), and fuel cooler fins (8). If
there is any mud, dirt, or leaves stuck to the fins, blow the dirt off
with compressed air.
Steam or water may be used instead of compressed air. However,
when carrying out powerful steam cleaning (high-pressure machine
wash) of the heat exchange equipment (radiator, oil cooler,
aftercooler, fuel cooler, condenser), maintain sufficient distance
from the machine when carrying out the operation. If steam cleaning
(high-pressure machine wash) is carried out at close range, there is
danger that the internal fins of the heat exchange equipment may be
deformed, and this will cause early clogging and breakage.
Remark
Do not wash cameras. They cannot withstand high pressure
spray or steam. Wipe cameras off with soft cloths.
5. Check the rubber hose. Replace with a new one if the hose is
found to have cracks or to be hardened by aging. In addition,
check the hose clamps for looseness.
PC200/220LC-8 3-65
MAINTENANCE
6. Remove undercover (9) and blow the mud, dirt, and leaves that have
been cleaned off to the outside.
7. Push in cleaned net (2) back to the original place and secure it with
screw (3).
3-66 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
MEMORANDUM
PC200/220LC-8 3-67
MAINTENANCE
Clean Air Conditioner Fresh/Recirc Filters
If compressed air is used, there is danger that dirt may fly and cause personal injury.
Always wear protective glasses, dust mask, and other protective equipment.
Remark
As a guideline, the filters should be cleaned every 500 hours, but on dusty jobsites, clean the filters more
frequently.
Remark
If the filter becomes clogged, the air flow will be reduced, and there will be an abnormal noise from the air
conditioner unit.
Cleaning Recirculated Air Filter

1. Remove wing bolts (1) from the inspection window at the bottom
rear left on the inside of the operator's cab, then take out the
recirculated air filter.
2. Clean the filter with compressed air. If there is oil on the filter, or if
the filter is extremely dirty, wash it in a neutral agent. After rinsing it
in water, dry it thoroughly before using it again.
Replace the filter with a new part every year. If the clogging of the
filter cannot be removed by blowing with air or washing in water,
replace the filter immediately.
• The RECIRC filter must be installed facing in the correct

direction. Install it so that the projecting part faces the front of
the machine.
Cleaning Fresh Air Filter
1. Use the starting switch key to open cover (2) at the rear left of the
operator's cab, then open cover (2) by hand and remove filter (3)
inside the cover.
2. Clean the filter with compressed air. If there is oil on the filter, or if
the filter is extremely dirty, wash it in a neutral agent. After rinsing it
in water, dry it thoroughly before using it again.
Replace the filter with a new part every year. If the clogging of the
filter cannot be removed by blowing with air or washing in water,
replace the filter immediately.
3. After cleaning, return filter (3) to its original position and close the
cover. Use the starting switch key to lock the cover. Do not forget to
remove the starting switch key.
Remark
The FRESH filter must be installed facing in the correct
direction. When installing, insert the long (L) end of filter (3)
into the filter case first. If the short (S) end is installed first,
cover (2) will not close.
3-68 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Replace Breather Element in Hydraulic Tank
• The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause burns. Wait for the
temperature to go down before starting the work.
• When the oil filler cap is removed, oil may spurt out, turn the cap slowly to release the pressure before removing the
cap.
1. Remove the cap of oil filler (F) at the top of the hydraulic tank.
2. Replace element (1) inside the cap.
PC200/220LC-8 3-69
MAINTENANCE
Check Oil Level in Swing Machinery Case, Add Oil
• Parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped and may cause serious burns. Wait for
1. Remove dipstick (G) and wipe the oil from the dipstick with a cloth.
2. Fully insert dipstick (G) into the filler pipe.
3. Pull out dipstick (G) and check that the oil level is between the H and
L marks on the dipstick.
4. If the oil does not reach the L mark on dipstick (G), remove the cap
of oil filler port (F) and add oil.
Remove dipstick (G) when adding oil.
5. If the oil is above the H mark on the dipstick, loosen drain valve (P)
and drain the excess oil.
For details of the method of draining the oil, See “Change Oil in
Swing Machinery Case” on page 3-73.
6. After checking oil level or adding oil, insert the dipstick (G) into the
hole and install oil filler (F) cap.
3-70 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Check Oil Level in Final Drive Case, Add Oil
• The parts and oil are at high temperature immediately after the engine is stopped, and may cause serious burns.
Wait for the temperature to go down before starting the operation.
• If there is still pressure remaining inside the case, the oil or plug may fly out. Loosen the plug slowly to release the
pressure.
• Please do not stand in front of the plug when you loosen the plug.
Prepare a handle.
1. Set the TOP mark at the top, with the UP mark and plug (P)
perpendicular to the ground surface.
2. Remove plug (F) using the handle. When the oil level reaches a point
10 mm (0.4 in) below the bottom of the plug hole, the correct amount
of oil has been added.
3. If the oil level is too low, install plug (F), operate the travel levers,
and drive forward or in reverse to rotate the sprocket one turn. Then
repeat Step 2 to check again.
4. If the oil level is low, add oil through plug hole (F) until the oil
overflows from plug hole (F).
5. After checking, install plug (F).
Plugs (F) torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.6 ± 9.8 N·m (50.6 ± 7.2 lb/ft)
Remark
There are two plugs (F). Add oil through the one easier to fill
oil and through which no internal gears are to be seen.
PC200/220LC-8 3-71
MAINTENANCE

Maintenance for every 100, 250 and 500 hours service should be carried out at the same time.
Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter Element
Remark
If the machine is equipped with a hydraulic breaker, the
hydraulic oil will deteriorate much faster than during normal
bucket operations. For details, See “Maintenance Interval for
Hydraulic Breaker” on page 3-20 when carrying out
maintenance.
1. Set the work equipment on the hard and flat ground in the
maintenance posture as shown in the figure, then lower it to the
ground and stop the engine.
2. Remove the cap from oil filler (F), and release the internal pressure.
3. Loosen 6 bolts, then remove cover (1). When doing this, the cover
may fly out under the force of spring (2), so hold the cover down
when removing the bolts.
4. After removing spring (2), valve (3) and strainer (4), take out
element (5).
• Inspect the bottom of the filter case for dirt, and remove it, if
any. Take good care not to let dirt fall into the hydraulic tank.
5. Clean the removed parts in diesel oil.
6. Install the new element in the place where old element (5) was
installed.
7. Set valve (3), strainer (4) and spring (2) on top of the element.
8. Set cover (1) in position, push it down by hand, and install the cover
with the mounting bolts.
9. Screw in the oil filler cap and install the cover.
10. To bleed the air, start the engine according to “STARTING
ENGINE” on page 2-134 and run the engine at low idle for ten
minutes.
11. Stop the engine.
3-72 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Change Oil in Swing Machinery Case
• Refill capacity
PC200: 7.1 liters (1.88 US gal)
PC220: 8.2 liters (2.17 US gal)
1. Remove cover (A) of the inspection hole.
2. Set a container under drain valve (P) under the machine body to
catch the oil.
3. Loosen drain valve (P) under the body, drain the oil, then tighten the
drain valve again.
Remark
• If the oil forms thin threads, there is no problem in stopping
the draining operation.
• In low temperatures, swing the work equipment to raise
the oil temperature slightly before starting the operation to
drain the oil. However, never swing the work equipment
during the draining operation. This will cause breakage of
the swing machinery.
4. Remove the cap of oil filler (F), then add the replacement amount of
oil through oil filler (F).
5. Pull out dipstick (G) and wipe off oil on the dipstick with cloth.
6. Fully insert dipstick (G) into filler pipe (F), then remove it.
7. The oil level should be between H and L marks on the dipstick (G).
If the oil does not reach the L mark, add oil through oil filler port (F).
PC200/220LC-8 3-73
MAINTENANCE
Check Oil Level in Damper Case, Add Oil
Remark
Park the machine on flat ground and stop the engine. After waiting for more than 30 minutes after stopping the
engine, check the oil level.
1. Open the cover on the right side of the machine.
2. Remove plug (G) and check the oil level. If the oil level is near the
bottom of the plug hole, the oil amount is at a proper level. If found
short, remove plug (F) and replenish oil through plug (F) filler port
up to the bottom of plug (G) hole.
Remark
If excess oil is supplied, drain it to the specified amount to
avoid overheating.
3. Install plugs (G) and (F).
4. Close the door.
3-74 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Replace Fuel Main Filter Cartridge
• After the engine has been operated, all parts are at high temperature, so do not replace the filter immediately. Wait
for all parts to cool down before starting the operation.
• High pressure is generated inside the engine fuel piping system when the engine is running.
When replacing the filter, wait for at least 30 seconds after stopping the engine to let the internal pressure go down
before replacing the filter.
• Do not bring any fire or flame close.
Remark
• Genuine Komatsu fuel filter cartridges use a special filter that has highly efficient filtering ability. When
replacing the filter cartridge, always use a genuine Komatsu part.
• The common rail fuel injection system used on this machine consists of more precise parts than the
conventional injection pump and nozzle.
• If any part other than a genuine Komatsu filter cartridge is used, dust or dirt may get in and cause problems
with the injection system. Always avoid using substitute parts.
• When carrying out inspection or maintenance of the fuel system, pay more attention than normal to the
entry of dirt. If dirt is stuck to any part, use fuel to wash it off completely.
• Prepare a container to catch drain fuel.

• Prepare a filter wrench
position (S).
2. Open the engine hood.

3. Set the container to catch the fuel under the filter cartridge.
4. Using a filter wrench, turn filter cartridge (2) counterclockwise to
remove it.
5. Clean the filter holder, coat the packing surface of the new filter
cartridge thinly with oil, then install the filter cartridge to the filter
holder.
PC200/220LC-8 3-75
MAINTENANCE
• Replace inner seal (3) with a new part.
Remark
Do not fill the new filter cartridge with fuel.
Remove cap (B) and install the filter cartridge.
6. When installing, tighten until the packing surface contacts the seal
surface of the filter holder, then tighten it 3/4 of a turn.
If the filter cartridge is tightened too far, the packing will be damaged and this will lead to leakage of fuel. If the filter
cartridge is too loose, fuel will also leak from the packing, so always tighten the correct amount.
8. After completing the replacement of filter cartridge (2), bleed the air.
Bleed the air as follows:

9. Fill the fuel tank with fuel (to the position where the float is at the highest position).
10. Loosen the knob of feed pump (4), pull it out, then pump it in and out
until the movement becomes heavy.
Remark
• It is not necessary to remove the plug at the top of the fuel
pre-filter and fuel main filter.
• After the engine runs out of fuel, use the same procedure
to operate feed pump (4) and bleed the air.
11. Push in the knob of feed pump (4) and tighten it.
12. After replacing the filter cartridge, start the engine and run it at low
idling for ten minutes.
Check for leakage of oil from the filter seal surface. If any oil is
leaking, check the tightening of the filter cartridge.
If there is still oil leakage, repeat Steps 1 - 4 to remove the filter
cartridge, and if any damage or embedded foreign material in the packing surface is found, replace it with a new cartridge
and repeat Steps 5 - 12 to install it.
Remark
Sometimes some air is still left inside water separator after air bleeding, but the engine can be started by
operating feed pump (4) until its motion gets hard. The remaining air is naturally bled when the water separator
is left as it is for some time after the engine comes to a stop.
3-76 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Check All Tightening Points of Engine Exhaust Pipe Clamps

Please ask your Komatsu distributor to check the tightening of the clamps between the air cleaner - turbocharger - aftercooler -
engine.
Check Fan Belt Tension and Replace Fan Belt

Special tools are required for inspection and replacement of the fan belt. Contact your Komatsu distributors for inspection and
replacement.
Remark
An installed auto fan belt tension adjuster, “Auto Tensional Fan Belt”, dispenses with the belt deflection
adjustment.
Check Nitrogen Gas Charge Pressure In Accumulator (For Breaker)

(If equipped)
A special tool is needed for inspecting and charging with nitrogen gas.
Have your Komatsu distributor inspect and charge the accumulator.
PC200/220LC-8 3-77
MAINTENANCE

Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500 and 1000 hours service should be carried out at the same time.
Change Oil in Final Drive Case
• Immediately after the engine is stopped, the oil and parts are at high temperature. For this reason, if you touch the
oil or parts immediately after the engine is stopped, you will suffer burns. Wait for the temperature to go down
before starting the operation.
• If there is pressure remaining inside the case, the oil or plug may fly out. Loosen the plug slowly to release the
pressure. To avoid danger, do not stand directly in front of the plug.
• Refill capacity
PC200 (each): 3.3 liters (0.87 US gal)
PC220 (each): 5.2 liters (1.37 US gal)
• Prepare a handle.
1. Set the TOP mark at the top, with the TOP mark and plug (P)
perpendicular to the ground surface.
2. Set a container under plug (P) to catch the oil.
3. Remove plugs (P) and (F) with the handle and drain the oil.
Remark
Check the O-rings in the plugs for damage. If necessary,
replace with new ones.
4. Tighten plug (P).

5. Add oil through the hole of plug (F).
6. When oil begins to overflow from the plug (F) hole, install plug (F).
Plugs (P) and (F ) torque: . . . . . . 68.6 ± 9.8 N·m (50.6 ± 7.2 lb/ft)
Remark
There are two plugs (F). Add oil through the one easier to fill
oil and through which no internal gears are to be seen.
3-78 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Clean Hydraulic Tank Strainer
1. Remove the cap from oil filler (F), and release the internal pressure.
2. Loosen six bolts, then remove cover (1). When doing this, the cover
may fly out under the force of spring (2), so push the cover down
when removing the bolts.
3. Hold the top of rod (3) and pull up to remove spring (2) and strainer
(4).
4. Remove all the dirt stuck to strainer (4), then wash it in flushing oil.
If strainer (4) is damaged, replace it with a new part.
5. When installing, insert strainer (4) into protruding part (5) of the
tank, and assemble.
6. Assemble so that the protruding part at the bottom of cover (1) holds
spring (2), then tighten with the bolt.
PC200/220LC-8 3-79
MAINTENANCE
Checking Charge Pressure of Nitrogen Gas in Accumulator (For Control Circuit)
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so mistaken operation may cause an explosion, which
will lead to serious injury or damage. When handling the accumulator, always do as follows.
• The pressure in the hydraulic circuit cannot be completely removed. When removing the hydraulic equipment, do
not stand in the direction that the oil spurts out when carrying out the operation. In addition, loosen the bolts slowly
when carrying out the operation.
When disposing of the accumulator, the gas must be released. Please contact your Komatsu distributor to have this
work carried out.
Remark
If the nitrogen gas charge pressure in the accumulator is low and operations are continued, it will become
impossible to release the remaining pressure inside the hydraulic circuit if a failure occurs on the machine.
Function Of Accumulator
The accumulator stores the pressure in the control circuit. Even after the
engine is stopped, the control circuit can be operated, so the following
actions are possible.
• If the control lever is operated in the direction to lower the work
equipment, it is possible for the work equipment to go down under
its own weight.
• The pressure in the hydraulic circuit can be released.
The accumulator is installed to the position shown in the diagram on the
right.
3-80 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Checking Function of Accumulator
When carrying out the inspection, check first that there is no person or obstacle in the surrounding area.
Check the nitrogen gas charge pressure as follows.

1. Stop the machine on firm, level ground.
2. Hold the work equipment in the maximum reach posture (arm fully
out, bucket fully dumped) at a height (A) 1.5 m (4 ft 11 in) from the
ground.
Carry out Steps 3 - 5 within 15 seconds.

When the engine is stopped, the pressure in the accumulator gradually goes down. For this reason, the check can only be
carried out immediately after the engine is stopped.
3. Keep the work equipment at the maximum reach, turn the starting
switch to the OFF position (A), and stop the engine.
4. Turn the starting switch to the ON position (B).
PC200/220LC-8 3-81
MAINTENANCE
5. With the lock lever at the FREE position (F), operate the work
equipment control levers fully in the LOWER direction and check
that the work equipment is lowered to the ground.
6. If the work equipment goes down under its weight and contacts the
ground, the accumulator is normal.
If the work equipment does not go down or stops in midway, the
charged pressure of the gas in the accumulator for the hydraulic
circuit has probably dropped.
Please contact your Komatsu distributor for inspection.
7. This completes the inspection. After completion of the inspection,
set the lock lever to the LOCK position and turn the starting switch
to the OFF position.
Method of Releasing Pressure in Hydraulic Circuit

1. Place the work equipment on the ground. Close the crusher attachment jaws, etc.
2. Operate the work equipment lock lever to the LOCK position.
3. Insert the lock pin for the attachment control pedal in position (c)
where it is possible to operate the pedal.
(If equipped)
3-82 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Carry out Steps 4 - 6 within 15 seconds.
When the engine is stopped, the pressure in the accumulator gradually goes down. For this reason, the check can only be
carried out immediately after the engine is stopped.
4. Stop the engine.
5. Turn the starting switch to the ON position (B).
6. Set lock lever to FREE position (F), then operate the work
equipment control levers and the attachment control pedal (if
equipped) fully to the front, rear, left, and right to release the
pressure in the control circuit.
7. Set the lock lever to the LOCK position, then turn the starting switch
to the OFF position.
8. Insert the lock pin in position (a) so that the attachment control pedal
cannot be operated.
(If equipped)
Check Alternator
The brushes may be worn or the bearing may have run out of grease, contact your Komatsu distributor for inspection and
repairs.
If the engine is started frequently, have this inspection carried out every 1000 hours.
Check Engine Valve Clearance, Adjust

Special tools are needed for inspection and maintenance, please contact your Komatsu distributor.
PC200/220LC-8 3-83
MAINTENANCE

Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500, 1000 and 2000 hours service should be carried out at the same time.
Check Water Pump
Check for leakage of oil around the water pump. If any problem is found,
contact your Komatsu distributor to have the parts disassembled,
repaired, or replaced.
Check Vibration Damper

For the check and replacement of the vibration damper, special tools are
required. Contact distributor for the replacement. It has to be replaced
with a new one in the following cases.
Mating mark (1) is notched both on the damper hub and on the inertia
member of the vibration damper to show any misalignment between the
two.
If this misalignment exceeds 1.6 mm (0.063 in), or if there is any dent
found on the damper metal surface deeper than 3.2 mm (0.1 in), then (2)
the vibration damper must be replaced.
Check Starting Motor

Contact your Komatsu distributor to have the starting motor checked.
If the engine is started frequently, have this inspection carried out every 1000 hours.
3-84 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Replace Accumulator (for Control Circuit)

Replace the accumulator every two years or every 4000 hours, whichever comes sooner.
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so mistaken operation may cause an explosion, which
will lead to serious injury or damage. When handling the accumulator, always do as follows.
not stand in the direction that the oil spurts out when carrying out the operation. In addition, loosen the bolts slowly
when carrying out the operation.
• When disposing of the accumulator, the gas must be released. Please contact your Komatsu distributor to have this
work carried out.
If operations are continued after the performance of the accumulator has

dropped, it will be impossible to release the remaining pressure in the
hydraulic circuit if there should be a failure on the machine. Please ask
your Komatsu distributor to replace the accumulator.
The accumulator is installed to the position shown in the diagram on the

right.
PC200/220LC-8 3-85
MAINTENANCE
Check for Looseness of High-pressure Piping Clamp, Hardening Of Rubber
Check visually and touch by hand to check that there is no hardening of the rubber and no loose bolts of the mounting clamps
(2 places) for the high-pressure piping between the supply pump and the common rail. If there are any problems, the parts
must be replaced. In this case, please ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out replacement.
Check for Missing Fuel Spray Prevention Cap, Hardening Of Rubber
The fuel spray prevention caps (14 places) on the fuel injection piping and both ends of the high-pressure piping act to prevent
the fuel from coming into contact with high-temperature parts of the engine and causing a fire if the fuel should leak or spray
out. Check visually and touch by hand to check that there are no missing caps, loose bolts or hardening of the rubber. If there
are any problems, the parts must be replaced. In this case, please ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out replacement.
3-86 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE
Check Operating Condition of Compressor

Check the following two items.
1. When the air conditioner switch is turned ON-OFF, does the compressor and magnet clutch also turn ON-OFF?
2. Is any abnormal noise generated by the clutch or compressor body?
If any problem is found, contact your Komatsu distributor to have the parts disassembled, repaired, or replaced.
PC200/220LC-8 3-87
MAINTENANCE

Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500 and 1000 hours service should be carried out at the same time.
Change Oil in Hydraulic Tank
Remark
If the machine is equipped with a hydraulic breaker, the hydraulic oil will deteriorate much faster than during
normal bucket operations. For details, See “Maintenance Interval for Hydraulic Breaker” on page 3-20 when
carrying out maintenance.
• Refill capacity: 135 liters (35.67 US gal)
• Prepare a handle (for the socket wrench).
1. Swing so that the drain plug at the bottom of the hydraulic tank is in
the middle between the left and right tracks.
2. Retract the arm and bucket cylinders, then lower the boom and put
the teeth in contact with the ground.
3. Set the lock lever to the LOCK position and stop the engine.
4. Remove the cap of oil filler port (F) at the top of the hydraulic tank.
5. Set a container directly under the drain plug under the machine to
catch the oil that is drained. Remove drain plug (P) and drain the oil.
Check that the O-ring installed to plug (P) is not damaged. If it is
damaged, replace the O-ring. After draining the oil, tighten drain
plug (P).
Drain plug torque: . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.6 ±9.81 N·m (50.6 ±7.2 lb/ft)
• Take care not to get oil on yourself when you remove drain plug
(P).
6. Fill with the specified amount of oil through oil filler port (F). Check
that the oil level is between the H - L lines on the sight gauge.
• For details of the suitable oil, See “RECOMMENDED FUEL,
COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT” on page 3-9.
• For details of the method of checking the oil level, See “Check Oil Level in Hydraulic Tank, Add Oil” on page 2-118.
3-88 PC200/220LC-8
MAINTENANCE

Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, and 4000 hours of service should be performed at the same time.
Replace Fuel Spray Prevention Cap
Contact your Komatsu distributor to have the fuel spray prevention cap replaced.
Replace High-pressure Piping Clamp
When replacing the engine high-pressure piping clamps, always ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out the replacement.
PC200/220LC-8 3-89
MAINTENANCE
MEMORANDUM
3-90 PC200/220LC-8
4SPECIFICATIONS
PC200/220LC-8 4-1
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Unit PC200LC-8 PC220LC-8
kg 20,900 24,330
Operating weight (lb) (46,085) (53,648)
Bucket capacity m3 (cu.yd) 0.8 (1.05) 1.0 (1.3)
Name of engine - KOMATSU SAA6D107E-1 diesel engine
Engine horsepower kW (HP)/rpm 110 (148)/2,000 125 (168)/2,000
mm 9,425 9,885
A Overall length (ft in) (30' 11") (32' 5")
B Overall height mm (ft in) 2,970 (9' 9") 3,185 (10' 5")
C Overall width mm (ft in) 3,080 (10' 1") 3,280 (10' 9")
D Track width mm (ft in) 700 (2' 4") 700 (2' 4")
E Height of cab mm (ft in) 3,040 (9' 12")
F Radius of upper structure mm (ft in) 2,750 (9' 0") 2,940 (9' 8")
G Length of track mm (ft in) 4,450 (14' 7") 4,640 (15' 3")
H Tumbler center distance mm (ft in) 3,655 (11' 12") 3,845 (12' 7")
Min. ground clearance mm (ft in) 440 (1' 5") 440 (1' 5")
km/h 3.0/4.1/5.5 3.1/4.2/5.3
Travel speed (Lo/Mi/Hi) (MPH) (1.9/2.5/3.4) (1.9/2.6/3.3)
Swing speed rpm 12.4 11.7
4-2 PC200/220LC-8
SPECIFICATIONS
Working ranges Unit PC200LC-8 PC220LC-8

A Max. digging reach mm (ft in) 9,875 (32' 5") 10,180 (33' 5")
B Max. digging depth mm (ft in) 6,620 (21' 9") 6,920 (22' 8")
C Max. digging height mm (ft in) 10,000 (32' 10") 10,000 (32' 10")
D Max. vertical wall depth mm (ft in) 5,980 (19' 7") 6,010 (19' 9")
E Max. dumping height mm (ft in) 7,110 (23' 4") 7,035 (23' 1")
F Min. dumping height mm (ft in) 2,645 (8' 8") 2,530 (8' 4")
G Max. reach at ground level mm (ft in) 9,700 (31' 10") 10,020 (32' 10")
PC200/220LC-8 4-3
SPECIFICATIONS
MEMORANDUM
4-4 PC200/220LC-8
5OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS
PC200/220LC-8 5-1
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY
When installing attachments or options to the machine, it is necessary to pay attention to safety. Please obey the following
precautions strictly when selecting, installing, or using attachments or options.
Precautions when selecting

• Please consult your Komatsu distributor before installing attachments or options to the machine. Depending on the type of
attachment or option, it may be necessary to install a front guard, overhead guard, or other safety structure to the machine.
There may also be problems of the attachment or option hitting the operator's cab.
• Install only attachments or options authorized by Komatsu. Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for any accident,
damage, or failure caused by the use of attachments or options not authorized by Komatsu.
Read the Instruction Manual Thoroughly

• Before installing or using any attachment or option, make sure that you thoroughly read and understand the instruction
manuals for the machine and the attachment or option.
• If you lose the instruction manual or it is damaged, always obtain a new copy from the attachment manufacturer or your
Komatsu distributor.
Precautions when Removing or Installing

When removing or installing the attachment or option, obey the following precautions, and take care to ensure safety during
the operation.
• Carry out the removal and installation operation on a flat, firm ground surface.
• When the operation is carried out by two or more workers, choose the leader and follow his instructions.
• Use a crane when handling heavy objects (more than 25 kg (55 lb)). (The crane must be operated by a qualified operator.)
• Never go under a load raised by the crane.
• Do not carry out operations with the load kept raised by the crane. Always use a stand to prevent the load from falling.
• When removing a heavy part, consider the balance after it is removed. To prevent the machine from tipping over, set a
support in position if necessary before removing the part.
• Before installing or after removing the attachment or option, set it in a stable condition to prevent it from falling over.
• For details of the removal or installation operation, please consult your Komatsu distributor.
Precautions When Using

When long or heavy work equipment is installed, remember the following precautions. Before starting operations, move the
machine to a safe place and carry out a test operation to make sure that you fully understand the movement, center of gravity,
and working range of the machine.
• Do not swing the work equipment if the machine is at an angle. If the work equipment is swung with the machine at an
angle, there is danger that the machine will tip over.
• Always maintain a safe distance from obstacles in the surrounding area when operating. If long work equipment is
installed, the working range becomes larger.
• If heavy work equipment is installed, pay careful attention to the following precautions.
• The swing overrun (the distance the work equipment moves before completely stopping after the swing brake is
applied) will be greater. There is danger of hitting objects if the swing overrun is miscalculated, so allow extra space
to the swing position when swinging.
• The hydraulic drift of the work equipment (the amount of the work equipment moves down under its own weight
when it is stopped in a raised position) also becomes greater. Do not stop the work equipment in a raised position;
always lower it to the ground.
• Do not swing, lower, or stop the work equipment suddenly. There is danger that the machine may tip over.
• Do not suddenly extend or retract the boom cylinder. The shock may cause the machine to tip over.
5-2 PC200/220LC-8
BUCKET WITH HOOK
Hook Condition
Check that there is no damage to the hook, stopper, or hook mount. If there is any problem, contact your Komatsu distributor.
Prohibited Operations
Operations with Care
• During lifting operations, reduce the engine speed and carry out the
operation in L mode.
• Depending on the operating posture, there is danger that the wire or
ring may come off the hook. To prevent this, pay careful attention to
the angle of the hook.
• Never travel the machine while lifting a load.
• If the bucket with hook is turned and used for operations, it will hit
the arm during dumping operations, be careful when using it.
• If you are planning to newly install a hook, contact your Komatsu
distributor.
PC200/220LC-8 5-3
MACHINE READY FOR ATTACHMENT
Locations
1. Stop valve 5. Breaker circuit additional oil filter

2. Selector valve 6. Accumulator (for low pressure)
3. Attachment control pedal 7. Accumulator (for high pressure: if equipped)
4. Lock pin
Stop Valve
This valve (1) stops the flow of the hydraulic oil.
(a) FREE: Hydraulic oil flows.
(b) LOCK: Hydraulic oil stops.
When removing or installing attachments, set this valve to the LOCK
position.
5-4 PC200/220LC-8
Selector Valve
This valve (2) switches the flow of hydraulic oil.
It is automatically switched according to the selected working mode. It is
necessary to switch the working mode to match the attachment that is
installed. For details of switching the working mode, see “HYDRAULIC
CIRCUIT” on page 5-8.
Remark
If a service circuit from the attachment maker has been added,
the return circuit may not switch automatically.
Attachment Control Pedal
Do not carry out operations with your foot on the pedal. If the pedal is depressed by mistake, the
attachment may suddenly move and cause a serious accident. Lock the pedal with the lock pin when you
are not operating the attachment.
This pedal (3) is used to control the attachment.

When the front, center (neutral), and rear of the pedal are depressed, the
movement of the attachment is as follows.
Hydraulic breaker
Front of pedal (A): Actuated
Center of pedal (N): Stopped
Rear of pedal (B): Stopped
Regarding other attachments, hold a meeting with the attachment maker at the time of installation to confirm the operation of
the pedal and attachment before using it.
PC200/220LC-8 5-5
Lock Pin
Use this lock pin (4) to lock the control pedal.
Position (a): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LOCK

Position (b): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Only front of pedal can be operated fully (rear of pedal is locked)
Position (c): . . Both front and rear of pedal can be operated fully
• When not using the attachment, keep lock pin (4) at position (a).
• When using the breaker, use the working mode selector switch on
the monitor switch portion to set the working mode to B mode, and
set the lock pin to position (b) when using the pedal.
• When using the crusher, use the working mode selector switch on the
monitor switch portion to set the working mode to ATT mode, and set the lock pin to position (c) when using the pedal.
Remark
• When using the breaker, if the lock pin is set to position (c)
and the pedal is operated in direction (D), it will cause
damage or defective operation of the breaker. To prevent
this, when using the breaker, always set the lock pin to
position (b).
• Before changing the position of the lock pin, set lock lever
to the LOCK position (L) and turn the key in the starting
switch to OFF position (A).
Breaker Circuit Additional Oil Filter

This filter (5) prevents deterioration of the hydraulic oil when using a
breaker.
Oil only flows when B mode is selected on the monitor.
• Attachment-ready machines are equipped with additional filter (5) as
standard when they are shipped from the factory.
Remark
Always install an additional filter in the return circuit on
machines equipped with a hydraulic breaker.
5-6 PC200/220LC-8
Accumulator
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so mistaken operation may cause an
explosion, which will lead to serious injury or damage. When handling the accumulator, always do as
follows.
not stand in the direction that the oil spurts out when carrying out the operation. In addition, loosen the bolts
slowly when carrying out the operation.
When disposing of the accumulator, the gas must be released. Please contact your Komatsu distributor to have this
work carried out.
These accumulators (6) and (7) are installed to reduce the peak pressure
in the hydraulic circuit when the breaker is being used. Normally, do not
touch them.
Remark
On machines equipped with a breaker, it is necessary to install an accumulator to the breaker piping to match
the model number of the breaker manufacturer. If no accumulator is installed and the breaker is operated, the
service life of the machine will be reduced. For questions about the breaker, please contact your Komatsu
distributor.
If the pressure of the nitrogen gas charging the accumulator drops, it will be impossible to release the
remaining pressure in the control circuit after the engine is stopped. In addition, if operations are continued with
the nitrogen gas at low pressure, it will cause damage to the hydraulic circuit or machine.
Check the nitrogen charge pressure periodically.
For details, see “Check Nitrogen Gas Charge Pressure In Accumulator (For Breaker)” on page 3-77 or “Check-
ing Charge Pressure of Nitrogen Gas in Accumulator (For Control Circuit)” on page 3-80.
PC200/220LC-8 5-7
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Remark
• The return circuit when a breaker is installed must return directly to the return filter, so do not use it except
in B mode.
• The standard set pressure for the service valve safety valve is set when the machine is shipped from the
factory. When B mode is selected, it is set to 210 kgf/cm² (2980 psi); when ATT mode is selected, it is set
to 280 kgf/cm² (3980 psi). Depending on the attachment, adjustment may be necessary. In such a case,
please ask your Komatsu distributor to carry out the adjustment.
Switching Hydraulic Circuit

Depending on the type of attachment, set the working mode on the monitor as follows.
The set pressure of the service valve safety valve and the hydraulic circuit switch is according to the working mode selected.
Attachment Working mode Hydraulic circuit Set pressure of service safety valve
Automatically forms circuit When shipped from factory:
One-way circuit attachment, B mode where return circuit does not
such as breaker 210 kgf/cm2 (2980 psi)
pass through control valve
Automatically forms circuit When shipped from factory:
Double-acting circuit attachment, ATT mode where return circuit passes
such as crusher 280 kgf/cm2 (3980 psi)
through control valve
Adjusting Oil Flow

Depending on the attachment, it is necessary to change the oil flow in the service circuit.
For details of setting the oil flow, see “ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS” on page 5-21.
Switching Between Breaker and General Attachment
• When optional attachment is installed and working mode is set to B mode.
(1) Forms breaker circuit (one-way circuit).
(2) Hydraulic oil flowing through breaker circuit passes through additional filter for breaker.
(3) Relief valve is set to low pressure. When shipped from factory: 210 kgf/cm2 (2980 psi).
(4) Maximum oil flow can be adjusted in user mode.
• When optional attachment is installed and working mode is set to ATT mode.
(1) Forms crusher circuit (double-acting circuit).
(2) Hydraulic oil flowing through crusher circuit does not pass through additional filter for breaker.
(3) Relief valve is set to high pressure. When shipped from factory: 280 kgf/cm2 (3980 psi).
(4) Maximum oil flow can be adjusted in user mode.
5-8 PC200/220LC-8
Hydraulic Circuit Connection

When connecting the attachment, connect the hydraulic circuit as
follows.
1. Check that stop valve (1) is at LOCK position (b)
(a) FREE:
Hydraulic oil flows (direction of arrow is parallel to long direction of
arm)
(b) LOCK:
Hydraulic oil does not flow (direction of arrow is at right angles to
long direction of arm)
• When setting the FREE or LOCK position of the stop valve rotor,
remove bolt (2), turn over plate (1), then turn the rotor. After setting,
install plate (1) again with bolt (2).
2. Remove plug (3) at the tip of the stop valve piping. (Left and right, 2
places)
Be careful not to lose or damage the removed parts.
3. After removing plug (3), connect the attachment piping (4) is

provided by the attachment manufacturer.
For the mouthpiece size and accumulator add-on, the action to take
differs according to the attachment manufacturer, so please consult
your Komatsu distributor.
PC200/220LC-8 5-9
Oil Flow Path

The direction of operation of the pedal and the path of the oil flow is as shown in the diagram below.
When the front of the pedal is depressed, oil flows to the piping on the left side of the work equipment; when the rear of the
pedal is depressed, oil flows to the piping on the right side of the work equipment. (When a breaker is installed, only the front
of the pedal can be used.)
5-10 PC200/220LC-8
Replace Additional Breaker Filter Element
Immediately after operating the engine, all parts still retain

high temperature. Never replace the filter in such condition.
Replace it only after each part has sufficiently cooled.
Remark
For details of the replacement interval for the element, see
“Maintenance Interval for Hydraulic Breaker” on page 3-20.
• Prepare a container to catch the oil.

1. Lower the work equipment to the ground and stop the engine.
2. Turn the starting switch to the ON position (B), then set the lock
lever to the FREE position (F).
3. Operate each work equipment control lever and the attachment

control pedal back and forth, left and right at full stroke two to three
times to eliminate the internal pressure in the hydraulic circuit.
PC200/220LC-8 5-11
4. Set the lock lever to LOCK position (L).
5. Loosen slowly oil filler cap (F) on top of the hydraulic tank to
eliminate the internal pressure in the hydraulic circuit.
6. Place a container under the filter element to catch the oil.
7. Set a container in position to catch the drained oil, then remove plug
(3) and drain the oil accumulated in filter case (1).
8. Check that the hydraulic oil is at room temperature, then turn filter
case (1) to the left to remove it, and take out element (2).
5-12 PC200/220LC-8
9. Clean the removed parts, then install new element (2).
• Element (2) must be installed facing in the correct direction. Set

direction Y with the holes in it facing up, and insert the hole in
element (2) on the protruding portion inside filter head (6).
10. Install O-ring (4) to filter case (1), then screw filter case (1) to filter
head (6). When the top of filter case (1) contacts the filter head,
tighten it at least a further 1/2 turns.
11. Clean plug (3), then fit a new O-ring (5) to plug (3).
12. Install plug (3) to filter case (1).
Torque: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4 - 58.8 N·m (20.3 - 43.4 lb/ft)
PC200/220LC-8 5-13
Replace Additional Breaker Pilot Filter Ele-

ment
Immediately after operating the engine, all parts still retain

high temperature. Never replace the filter in such condition.
Replace it only after each part has sufficiently cooled.
Remark
For details of the replacement interval for the element, see
“Maintenance Interval for Hydraulic Breaker” on page 3-20.
• Prepare a container to catch the oil.
1. Lower the work equipment to the ground and stop the engine.

times within 15 seconds to release the internal pressure in the
hydraulic circuit.
5-14 PC200/220LC-8
6. Place a container under the filter element to catch the oil.
7. Check that the hydraulic oil is at room temperature, then turn filter
case (1) to the left to remove it, and take out element (2).
PC200/220LC-8 5-15
8. Clean the removed parts, then install new element (2).
• Element (2) must be installed facing in the correct direction. Set

direction Y with the holes in it facing up, and insert the hole in
element (2) on the protruding portion inside filter head (6).
9. When installing, install O-ring (3) to filter case (1), then tighten filter
case (1).
Torque: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 35 N·m (18.8 - 26.0 lb/ft)
5-16 PC200/220LC-8
ATTACHMENT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Attachment Removal
1. Lower the attachment to the ground and stop the engine.
3. To release the pressure inside the hydraulic circuit, operate each

work equipment control lever and attachment control pedal slowly to
the front, rear, left, and right fully two or three times.
PC200/220LC-8 5-17
6. After checking that the oil temperature is low, set the rotor of the
stop valve installed to the inlet port on the side face of the arm and
the outlet port piping to LOCK position (b).
(a) FREE: Hydraulic oil flows (direction of arrow is parallel to long

direction of arm).
(b) LOCK: Hydraulic oil does not flow (direction of arrow is at right
angles to long direction of arm).
• When setting the FREE or LOCK position of the stop valve

rotor, remove bolt (2), turn over plate (1), then turn the rotor.
After setting, install plate (1) again with bolt (2).
7. Remove the hoses on the attachment side. Install the plugs to the two
outlets.
The plugs are used to prevent the attachment from incorrect
operation caused by mixing in of foreign matter. After the plugs are
correctly installed, store the attachment.
8. Pull out the mounting pins (two places), remove the attachment, then
install the bucket.
For details of the procedure for installing the bucket, see “BUCKET
REPLACEMENT AND INVERSION” on page 2-171.
9. After installing the bucket, check the oil level in the hydraulic tank.
5-18 PC200/220LC-8
Attachment Installation
1. Remove the bucket.
For bucket dismounting procedure, see “BUCKET REPLACE-
MENT AND INVERSION” on page 2-171.
2. Place the attachment in a horizontal position, then install to the arm

with pin (A) and then pin (B).
3. Lower the attachment to the ground and stop the engine.

times to eliminate the internal pressure in the hydraulic circuit.
PC200/220LC-8 5-19
8. After confirming low oil temperature, remove the plug from the outlet and inlet port respectively.
Take care that no dust, mud etc. adheres to the hose mouse piece portions.
If O-ring is damaged, replace it with a new one.
9. Connect the hose at the attachment side.

When doing this, check the direction of flow of the oil and be careful not to make any mistakes.
10. Set the rotor of the stop valve installed to the inlet port on the side
face of the arm and the outlet port piping to FREE position (a).
(a) FREE: Hydraulic oil flows (direction of arrow is parallel to long

direction of arm)
(b) LOCK: Hydraulic oil does not flow (direction of arrow is at right
angles to long direction of arm)
• When setting the FREE or LOCK position of the stop valve

rotor, remove bolt (2), turn over plate (1), then turn the rotor.
After setting, install plate (1) again with bolt (2).
11. After installing the attachment, check the oil level in the hydraulic
tank.
5-20 PC200/220LC-8
ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS
• If the pedal is operated when the auto-deceleration is being actuated and the engine speed has dropped, the
engine speed will suddenly rise, so be careful when operating.
• If you leave your foot resting on the pedal and depress the pedal by mistake, there is danger that the attachment
may suddenly move and cause serious personal injury. If you do not need to operate the pedal, do not rest your
foot on the pedal.
• When the attachment is not being used, set the lock pin of the pedal to the LOCK position to prevent the pedal
from being operated.
• When changing the oil flow setting for the breaker mode, see “Breaker/Attachment Setting” on page 2-47, “Changing
Breaker Mode Setting” on page 2-47 for details.
• When changing the oil flow setting for the attachment mode for the crusher or other attachment, see “Breaker/Attachment
Setting” on page 2-47, “Changing Breaker Mode Setting” on page 2-47 for details.
The method of operating the attachment is as follows.
When Using Breaker

Remark
When carrying out breaker operations, use the breaker mode. If the breaker mode is not used, the breaker
may be damaged.
With the working mode set to B mode, insert the lock pin in front-only
FREE position (b). Press the front of the pedal to operate the breaker.
PC200/220LC-8 5-21
If the working mode pilot monitor does not display B for the breaker
mode, press working mode selector switch (1) and set to the breaker
mode as follows.
• When working mode selector switch (1) is pressed, the screen
switches to the working mode selection screen.
1. Press working mode selector switch (1) or press switches F3 or F4 to

select breaker mode B.
2. With breaker mode B highlighted in yellow, do one of the following

to accept the selection.
• Keep working mode selector switch (1) pressed.

• Press switch F6.
• Leave as it is for five seconds.
3. If the breaker mode is selected, “Really Set Breaker Mode?” is

displayed on the screen. To set to the breaker mode, press switch F6.
• If switch F5 is pressed, the screen returns to the working mode

selection screen without changing to the breaker mode.
• If a slide arm or other special attachment is installed and the
mode is switched to the breaker mode by mistake, it may lead to
serious danger, such as the work equipment suddenly dropping.
• If breaker operations are carried out in a mode other than the
breaker mode, the warning screen is displayed. Always carry out
breaker operations in the breaker mode
5-22 PC200/220LC-8
Precautions when using:
• Check that the stop valve is at the FREE position.
• Check that the working mode is B mode.
For details of the path of the oil, see “HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT” on page 5-8.
• When considering whether it is necessary to install an accumulator for the attachment circuit, contact the attachment
manufacturer and then decide.
• For other precautions when handling the breaker, follow the instruction manual from the breaker manufacturer and use the
breaker correctly.
• The deterioration of the hydraulic oil when using the breaker is much faster than for normal operations, so reduce the
maintenance interval for the hydraulic oil and element.
For details, see “Maintenance Interval for Hydraulic Breaker” on page 3-20.
When Using General Attachment such as Crusher

With the working mode set to ATT mode, insert the lock pin in front-and-
rear FREE position (c). Press the front or rear of the pedal to operate the
attachment.
If the working mode pilot monitor does not display ATT for the
attachment mode, press working mode selector switch (1) and set to the
attachment mode as follows.
• If P, E, or L mode are selected, the attachment is not actuated.
PC200/220LC-8 5-23
1. Press working mode selector switch (1) or press switches F3 or F4 to
select attachment mode ATT.
2. With attachment mode ATT highlighted in yellow, do one of the

following to accept the selection.
• Keep working mode selector switch (1) pressed.

• Press switch F6.
• Leave as it is for five seconds.
• On the user menu attachment setting, it is possible to make the attachment mode inactive.
• When using the attachment mode, check that the attachment mode is active before starting operations.
Precautions when using

• Check that the stop valve is at the FREE position.
• Check that the working mode is ATT mode.
• For details of the path of the oil, see “HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT” on page 5-8.
• For other precautions when handling the attachment, follow the instruction manual from the attachment manufacturer and
use the attachment correctly.
5-24 PC200/220LC-8
LONG TERM STORAGE
If the equipment is not to be used for a long time, do as follows.
• Set the stop valve in the LOCK condition.
• Install the plug and O-rings to the valves.
• Set the lock pin at the LOCK position.
If there is no breaker or general attachment installed, operating the pedal may cause overheating and other problems.
Specifications
Hydraulic specifications
• Max. merging oil flow 214 x 2 liters / min
• Safety valve of service valve relief setting pressure 280 kgf/cm2 (3980 psi) (except B mode)
• Safety valve of service valve cracking pressure 250 kgf/cm2 (3550 psi) (except B mode)
• Safety valve of service valve relief setting pressure 210 kgf/cm2 (2980 psi) (B mode)
• Safety valve of service valve cracking pressure 155 kgf/cm2 (2200 psi) (B mode)
In addition, valves with a safety valve relief set pressure of 250 kgf/cm2 (3550 psi) and relief valve cracking pressure of
205 kgf/cm2 (2911 psi) are also available so please contact your Komatsu distributor.
PC200/220LC-8 5-25
Attachment Guide
• Please read the instruction manual for the attachment and the sections of this manual related to attachments and
options.
• When installing any attachment or option, there may be problems with safety, so please contact your Komatsu
distributor before installing.
• Installing attachments or options without consulting your Komatsu distributor may not only cause problems with
safety, but may also have an adverse effect on the operation of the machine and the life of the equipment.
• Any injuries, accidents, or damage resulting from the use of unauthorized attachments or options will not be the
responsibility of Komatsu.
Attachment Combinations
• Depending on the type or combination of work equipment, there is danger that the work equipment may hit the
cab or machine body.
• When using unfamiliar work equipment for the first time, check before starting if there is any danger of interfer-
ence, and operate with caution.
5-26 PC200/220LC-8
PC200LC-8
This table lists the combination of attachments which can be installed to the long arm (standard), short arm and extension arm.
❍: Can be used
▲: Can be used only for light duty work
✪: Cannot be used
Remark
• When the extension arm is equipped, if the bucket is drawn to the machine body, the arm interferes with
the body. Operate the extension arm carefully.
• When the boom is fully lowered during oblique digging, the boom interferes with the undercarriage.
Operate the boom carefully.
Categories of use
For general digging: Digging or loading sand, gravel, clay etc.
For light duty digging: Digging or loading dry, un-caked earth and sand, mud etc.
For loading work: Loading dry, loose earth and sand
• For digging or loading hard soil or soft rock, it is recommended that the strengthened bucket with high durability and high
wear resistance be employed.
*:Equipped with side cutter
Capacity Outside Standard Short Short Extension

width arm arm arm arm
Name of bucket m3 mm Use 2.9 m 2.4 m 1.8 m 1.1 m
(cu.yd) (ft in) (9 ft 6 in) (7 ft 10 in) (5 ft 11 in) (3 ft 7 in)
0.50 750
*Narrow bucket (0.65) (2' 6") Narrow digging ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
0.60 970
*Narrow bucket (0.78) (3' 2") Narrow digging ❍ ❍ ❍ ✪
0.8 1,150
*Standard bucket (1.05) (3' 9") General digging ❍ ❍ ❍ ✪
0.9 1,200
*Light duty bucket (1.18) (3' 11") Light duty digging ▲ ❍ ❍ ✪
1.0 1,330
Light duty bucket (1.3) (4' 4") Loading ▲ ▲ ▲ ✪
1.17 1,450
Light duty bucket (1.5) (4' 9") Loading ✪ ▲ ▲ ✪
Slope finishing 0.40
bucket (0.52)
- Slope finishing ❍ ❍ ❍ ✪
Trapezoidal bucket 0.55 Trapezoidal
(Variable slope type) (0.72) - shaped diching ❍ ❍ ❍ ✪
0.61 950
Ripper bucket (0.80) (3' 1") Digging rocks ✪ ❍ ❍ ✪
0.66 866
Clamshell bucket (0.86) (2' 10") Ditching, loading ❍ ❍ ❍ ✪
Ditch cleaning 0.8 1,800
bucket (1.05) (5' 11") Ditching, cleaning ❍ ❍ ❍ ✪
Digging, remov-
One tooth ripper - - ing rocks ❍ ❍ ❍ ✪
Digging, remov-
Three teeth ripper - -
ing rocks ❍ ❍ ❍ ✪
PC200/220LC-8 5-27
PC220LC-8
This table lists the combination of attachments which can be installed to the long arm (standard), short arm and extension arm.
❍: Can be used
▲: Can be used only for light duty work
✪: Cannot be used
Remark
• When the extension arm is equipped, if the bucket is drawn to the machine body, the arm interferes with
the body. Operate the extension arm carefully.
• When the boom is fully lowered during oblique digging, the boom interferes with the undercarriage.
Operate the boom carefully.
Categories of use
For general digging: Digging or loading sand, gravel, clay etc.
For light duty digging: Digging or loading dry, un-caked earth and sand, mud etc.
For loading work: Loading dry, loose earth and sand
• For digging or loading hard soil or soft rock, it is recommended that the strengthened bucket with high durability and high
wear resistance be employed.
*: Equipped with side cutter. *1: is available only during loading.
Capacity Outside Standard Long Short Short

width arm arm arm arm
Name of bucket m3 mm Use 3.2 m 3.5 m 2.5 m 2.0 m
(cu.yd) (ft in) (10 ft 6 in) (11 ft 6 in) (8 ft 2 in) (6 ft 7 in)
0.72 900
*Narrow bucket (0.94) (2' 11") Narrow digging ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
1.0 1,260
*Standard bucket (1.3) (4' 2") General digging ❍ ▲*1 ❍ ❍
1.14 1,300
*Light duty bucket (1.5) (4' 3") Light duty digging ▲ ✪ ▲ ▲
1.26 1,400
Light duty bucket (1.6) (4' 7") Loading ▲ ✪ ▲ ▲
For triming of a
0.40
Slope finishing bucket (0.52) - slope and rolling ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
compaction
Trapezoidal bucket 0.55 Trapezoidal shaped
(Variable slope type) (0.72)
-
diching ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
0.61 950
Ripper bucket (0.80) (3' 1") Digging rocks ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
0.66 866
Clamshell bucket (0.86) (2' 11") Ditching, loading ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
0.80 1,800
Ditch cleaning bucket (1.05) (5' 11") Ditching, cleaning ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Digging, removing
One tooth ripper - - rocks ❍ ✪ ❍ ❍
Digging, removing
Three teeth ripper - - rocks - ✪ ❍ ❍
5-28 PC200/220LC-8
TRACK SHOES SELECTION
Select suitable track shoes to match the operating conditions.
Selection
Check the category from the uses in the table below, then select the shoes from the table below that.
• Category of use B and C are the wide shoe, so there are limits on the use. Check the precautions for use, examine the
conditions of use thoroughly, and use the optimum shoes for the situation.
• When selecting the shoe width, choose the narrowest shoes possible to bring the machine within the range where there is
no problem regarding the machine flotation and ground contact pressure. If wider shoes than necessary are used, the load
on the shoe will increase, this may cause problems such as bending of the shoe, cracking of the link, damage of the pin,
and looseness of the shoe bolts.
Category Use Precautions when using
Rocky ground,
A riverbeds, • On rough ground with large obstacles such as boulders or fallen trees, travel at Lo speed.
normal soil
• These shoes cannot be used on rough ground where there are large obstacles such as
Normal soil, boulders or fallen trees.
B soft ground • Travel at Hi or Mi speed only on flat ground, and if it is impossible to avoid going over
obstacles, shift down and travel at half speed in Lo.
• Use the shoes only in places where the machine sinks and it is impossible to use A or B
shoes.
Extremely • These shoes cannot be used on rough ground where there are large obstacles such as
C soft ground
(swampy ground) boulders or fallen trees.
• Travel at Hi or Mi speed only on flat ground, and if it is impossible to avoid going over
obstacles, shift down and travel at half speed in Lo.
PC200LC-8 PC220LC-8
Specifications Specifications
Category Category
mm (ft in) mm (ft in)
700 (2' 4") 700 (2' 4")
Standard B B
Triple Triple
Option 600 (1' 12") A 600 (1' 12") A

Triple Triple
800 (2' 7") 800 (2' 7")
Option C C
Triple Triple
900 (2' 11")
Option C - -
Triple
860 (2' 10")
Option C - -
Swamp
PC200/220LC-8 5-29
BUCKET TEETH SELECTION
Depending on the working conditions, there is danger that an adapter and teeth may break, so select from the vertical pin and
horizontal pin teeth to give teeth that are suitable for the purpose.
While the standard teeth of both vertical and horizontal pin types may be used widely, the following kinds of teeth are
recommended depending on the working conditions.
Teeth Selection
Vertical Pin Type Tooth

General digging: Digging and loading normal soil, such as sand, gravel, clay, etc.
Light-duty digging: digging and loading dry and loose sandy soil, or muddy soil.
Loading: loading of dry and loose earth.
Horizontal Pin Type Tooth

Heavy-duty digging: Digging and hammering work on hard soil, soil with rocks, scraping or other heavy-duty work
• The heavy-duty bucket is of a horizontal pin type and as such, use it for heavy duty-digging.
Long-life Tooth
• Jobsites where long wear life is demanded, such as when loading hard rocks.
• Jobsites where no penetration is needed, such as when working with crushed rocks after blasting or ripping.
• Jobsites where heavy-duty operations are carried out, such as hitting or pulling up rocks with the tips of the teeth.
Self-sharpening Tooth
• Jobsites demanding penetration such as digging and loading sandy or clayey soil.
Selection Guide for Horizontal or Vertical Pin Type Tooth

Applicable Work Site
Clayey soil,
Rock Crushed stone Decompressed Sand
weathered granite
Heavy Digging with hammering work Horizontal pin type teeth Vertical pin type teeth
Work Contents
↑ Scraping down Horizontal pin type teeth Vertical pin type teeth
General excavation Vertical pin type teeth
↓
Light Loading Vertical pin type teeth
5-30 PC200/220LC-8
TRAPEZOIDAL BUCKET
Use the trapezoidal bucket when digging trapezoidal ditches in fields. By
installing the variable plate, it is possible to excavate three angles of ditch
slope face (45°, 40°, 38°).
• The position of installation of the variable plate is different for each
ditch slope face angle (45°, 40°, 38°).
Digging Work
Operate the boom, arm, and bucket so that line A of the side plate of the
bucket is always perpendicular, then carry out digging.
Horizontal calculation plate B is welded to the bucket pin hole portion, so
when digging, operate so that the plate is horizontal during the digging
operation.
Ditch slope face 45 degrees

Use the bucket only or install the variable plate using the ditch slope
angle holes, and use the method above for digging.
PC200/220LC-8 5-31
Ditch slope face 40 degrees, 38 degrees
Install the variable plate using the respective ditch slope angle holes, and
use the method above for digging.
Even when the variable plate is fitted, keep the line on the bucket side
plate perpendicular during the digging operation.
5-32 PC200/220LC-8
HANDLING EXTENSION ARM
When an extension arm is installed, the bucket will hit the boom cylinder
foot and revolving frame when the arm is pulled in, so be extremely
careful during operations and when transporting the machine.
• When an extension arm is installed, use a narrow bucket (width: 750
mm (29.6 in), 560 mm (22.1 in)) without side cutters.
If the standard bucket is used, the stability is poor, and the bucket
will also hit the operator's cab when the arm is pulled in, so do not
install the standard bucket.
• For operations on hard soil or rock, do not use the extension arm.
The service life of the extension arm, boom, and arm will be
reduced.
PC200/220LC-8 5-33
HANDLING CLAMSHELL BUCKET
Use a clamshell bucket for digging or loading soil for side ditching and in limited areas.
Digging Method
Digging is carried out with the clamshell pushed by the boom, but when operating the bucket, raise the boom slightly and carry
out digging.
When the clamshell bucket rotates, relieve the hydraulic pressure in the bucket cylinder, then return the lever to the HOLD
position. The rotation is locked for a short time.
Precautions During Operation

• It is dangerous to carry out sudden steering, sudden swings, or sudden stops when using the clamshell bucket. Avoid such
operations.
• When pushing with the boom, keep the clamshell straight.
• Do not swing the bucket to the side to break up or cut rocks or soil.
• Do not use the bucket for driving piles or removing piles.
• When the machine is not being used, open the bucket and lower it to the ground to set the bucket in a stable position.
Remark
Remove the clamshell bucket from the arm before transporting the machine.
Lubrication
• Prepare a grease gun
1. Lower the work equipment to the ground and set it in a stable
condition before stopping the engine.
2. Using a grease gun, apply grease to the grease fittings marked by

arrows (12 places).
5-34 PC200/220LC-8
RECOMMENDED ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS
Below described are instructions which must be followed without fail when doing the work using a hydraulic excavator
equipped with an attachment.
Remark
Select the optimum model of attachment for a hydraulic excavator on which it is to be mounted.
• Depending on machine models of hydraulic excavator, the kind of attachments or the model of specific
attachments that can be mounted will vary. Consult your Komatsu distributor for the selection of optimum
attachments.
Hydraulic Breaker
Main Applications
• Crushed rock
• Demolition work
• Road construction
This attachment can be used for a wide range of applications including
demolition of buildings, breaking up road surfaces or slag, tunnel work,
rock crushing and breaking operations in quarries.
Keep the chisel pushed perpendicularly against the impact surface when
carrying out breaking operations.
PC200/220LC-8 5-35
When applying impact, push the chisel against the impact surface and
operate so that the chassis rises approximately 5 cm (2 in) off the ground.
Do not let the machine come further off the ground than this amount.
When applying continuous impact to the same impact surface, if the

chisel does not penetrate or break the surface within one minute, change
the point of impact and carry out breaking operations closer to the edge.
The direction of penetration of the chisel and the direction of the breaker
body will gradually move out of line with each other, always adjust the
bucket cylinder to keep them aligned.
Always keep the chisel pressed against the impact surface properly to
prevent using the impact force when there is no resistance.
5-36 PC200/220LC-8
Prohibited Works
To ensure that the machine has a long life, and to ensure that operations
are carried out in safety, do not operate the machine in any of the
following ways.
• Do not operate all cylinders to the end of their strokes. Always leave
approximately 5 cm (2 in) to spare.
Using the mount to gather in pieces of rock
Operations using the swing force
Moving the chisel while carrying out impacting operations
Holding the chisel horizontal or pointed up when carrying out impacting

operations
PC200/220LC-8 5-37
Twisting the chisel when it has penetrated the rock
Pecking operations
Extending the bucket cylinder fully and thrusting to raise the machine off
the ground
5-38 PC200/220LC-8
Greasing
Supply grease in the correct position.
Remark
If the breaker is greased in an improper posture, it is filled with
more grease than necessary. As a result, soil and sand will
enter the hydraulic circuit and can damage the hydraulic
components, while the breaker is in use. Therefore, be sure to
grease the breaker, holding it in the right posture.
PC200/220LC-8 5-39
HANDLING MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH KOMTRAX
• KOMTRAX is a machine management system that uses wireless communications.
• A contract with your Komatsu distributor is necessary before the KOMTRAX system can be used. Any customers
desiring to use the KOMTRAX system should consult their Komatsu distributor.
• The KOMTRAX equipment is a wireless device using radio waves, so it is necessary to obtain authorization and conform
to the laws of the country or territory where the machine equipped with KOMTRAX is being used. Always contact your
Komatsu distributor before selling or exporting any machine equipped with KOMTRAX.
• When selling or exporting the machine or at other times when your Komatsu distributor considers it necessary, it may be
necessary for your Komatsu distributor to remove the KOMTRAX equipment or to carry out action to stop
communications.
• If you do not obey the above precautions, neither Komatsu nor your Komatsu distributor can take any responsibility for
any problem that is caused or for any loss that results.
Basic Precautions
• Never disassemble, repair, modify, or move the communications terminal, antenna, or cables. This may cause
failure or fire on the KOMTRAX equipment or the machine itself. (Your Komatsu distributor will carry out removal
and installation of KOMTRAX.)
• Do not allow cables or cords to become caught; do not damage or pull cables or cords by force. Short circuits or
disconnected wires may cause failure or fire on the KOMTRAX equipment or the machine itself.
• For anyone wearing a pacemaker, make sure that the communication’s antenna is at least 22 cm (8.7 in) from the
pacemaker. The radio waves may have an adverse effect on the operation of the pacemaker.
Remark
• Even when the key in the starting switch of the KOMTRAX system is at the OFF position, a small amount
of electric power is consumed. When putting the machine into long-term storage, take the action given in
“LONG TERM STORAGE” on page 2-194.
• Please contact your Komatsu distributor before installing a top guard or other attachment that covers the
cab roof.
• Be careful not to get water on the communications terminal or wiring.
Remark
• The KOMTRAX system uses wireless communications, so it cannot be used inside tunnels, underground,
inside buildings, or in mountain areas where radio waves cannot be received. Even when the machine is
outside, it cannot be used in areas where the radio signal is weak or in areas outside the wireless
communication service area.
• There is absolutely no need to inspect or operate the KOMTRAX communications terminal, but if any
abnormality is found, please consult your Komatsu distributor.
Remark
• The new updated monitor (7 in. monitor) requires the key switch to be on for a minimum of two consecutive
hours before KOMTRAX comes out of Power Save mode. In addition, the updated monitor if put into long
term storage (longer than 14 days) will prevent battery discharge.
Remark
• KOMTRAX reporting on error codes may indicate a DY2CKA error code. the standard description is “Wind
Wash Motor + Open Circuit”. This code may also be associated with frequent replacement of the 10 Amp
Fuse located in Fuse socket #4 of the fuse panel.
• In troubleshooting, the technician is advised to check the condition of the heating coil element in the
cigarette lighter. If the heating coil element is heavily worn or damaged, short circuit can occur and the #4
fuse will blow. When this happens, the monitor panel registers error code DY2CKA.
5-40 PC200/220LC-8

PC200LC 8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PC200LC 8

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PC200LC 8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEAM007103

Operation & Maintenance

Copyright 2016 Komatsu

This machine may contain mercury in two areas:

Storage location for the Operation and Maintenance Manual:

Safety precautions are described in SAFETY section 1.

Example of safety label using words

Safety labels using pictogram

(A) Front (C) Left (E) Operator’s Seat

(B) Rear (D) Right (F) Sprocket

Visibility from Operator's Seat

EPA* Regulations, Engine Number Plate

*EPA: Environmental Protection Agency, U.S.A.

Your Machine Serial Numbers and Distributor

SAFETY LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Location of Safety Labels

Monitor decal (09974-00601)

2. Caution before operating. (09802-03000)

• Honk horn to alert people nearby.

3. Caution for leaving operator's seat. (09654-03001)

Sudden and unwanted machine movement can cause serious injury

5. Caution for operating pattern. (09822-03000)

Inadvertently touching any of the working equipment control levers

7. Caution when stowing front window. (09803-03000)

Falling window can cause injury.

8. Caution for high-temperature hydraulic oil. (09653-03001)

To prevent hot oil from spurting out:

9. Caution with high-temperature coolant. (09668-03001)

To prevent hot water from spurting out:

• Keep away from flame

11. Caution when adjusting track tension. (09657-03003)

• When adjusting track tension, only turn lubricator ONE TURN,

12. Caution when handling cable. (09808-03000)

• Follow instructions in manual when using booster cable and

13. Stopping rotation for inspection and maintenance. (09667-03001)

1. Do not open cover.

2. Keep away from fan and fan-belt.

14. Emergency escape. (09844-00050)

16. Caution against falling. (09805-23000)

17. Caution against falling. (09805-C0481)

18. Prohibited to enter swing radius. (09133-23000)

19. Caution for operation. (09134-A1681)

Keep away from machine during operation.

21. Prohibition of jump start. (09842-A0481)

Understanding the Machine

Precautions Regarding Safety-related Equipment

If Problems Are Found

Clothing and Personal Protective Items

Fire Extinguisher and First Aid Kit

Keep Machine Clean

Keep Operator's Compartment Clean

Leaving Operator's Seat with Lock

• When leaving the machine, always lower the work equipment

Handrails and Steps

• To ensure safety, always face the machine and maintain three-point